Handleiding Vauxhall Vectra 2007 (pagina 314 van 330) (Engels)

529281

314

Verklein

Vergroot

Pagina terug

1/330

Pagina verder

VECTRA

©Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd., England.

Reproduction or translation, in whole or in parts,

is not permitted without prior written consent from

Vauxhall Motors Ltd.

All rights as understood under the copyright laws are explicitly

reserved by Vauxhall Motors Ltd.

All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this

manual are based on the latest production information

available at the time of publication.

The right is reserved to make changes at any time without

notice.

Edition: July 2007.

TS 1557-A-08

VECTRA

Operation, Safety and Maintenance

Owner’s Manual

VAUXHALL Vectra

Operation, Safety, Maintenance

Data specific to your vehicle

Please enter your vehicle’s data here to ke ep it ea sily accessible.

This information is available under the section "Technical da ta" as well as on the identification plate and in the Service Booklet.

Fuel

De signation

Engine oil

Grade

Viscosity

Tyre pressure

T yre si ze wi th up to 3 pe ople wi th fu ll lo ad

Su mmer tyres Fro nt Rear Fro nt Rear

Winter tyres Fro nt Rear Fro nt Rear

Weights

Permissible Gross Vehicle

Weight

– EC kerbweight

=Loading

Your Vectra

is an intelligent c ombination of forward-

looking technology, impressive safety,

environmental friendliness and economy.

It now lies with you to drive your vehicle

safely and ensure that it performs

perfectly. This Owner’s Manual provides

you with all the necessary information to

that end.

Make sure your passengers are awa re

of the possible risk of accident and injury

which may result from improper use of the

vehic le.

You must always comply with the specific

laws of the country that you are travelling

through. These laws may differ from the

information in this Owner’s Manual.

When instructed to consult a w ork shop,

we recomm end that you consult your

Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers provide

first-class service at rea sonable prices.

You will receive quick, reliable and

individual service.

Experienced mechanics, trained by

Vauxhall, work accord ing to specific

Vauxhall instructions.

The Owner’s Manual should always be kept

in the vehicle: Ready to hand in the glove

compartment.

Make use of the Owner’s

Manual:

z The "In brief" section will give you an

initial overview.

z The table of contents at the beginning of

the Owner’s Manual and within the

individual chapters will show you where

everything is.

z Its index will help you find what you

want.

z It w ill familiarise you with the

sophisticated technology.

z It w ill increase your pleasure in your

vehicle.

z It will help you to handle your vehicle

expertly.

The Owner’s Manual is designed to be

clearly laid-out and easily understood.

This symbol signifies:

6 Continue reading on next page.

3 The asterisk signifies equipment not

fitted to all vehicles (model variants,

engine options, models specific to one

country, optional equipment, Genuine

Vauxhall Parts and Accessories).

Yellow arrows in the illustrations serve as

points of reference or indicate some action

to be performed.

Black arrows in the illustrations indicate a

reaction or a second action to be

performed.

Directional data, e.g. left or right, or front

or back, in the descriptions always relate to

the direction of travel.

Thank you for choosing a Vauxhall. We

wish you many hours of pleasurable

driving.

Your Vauxhall Team

9 Wa rn ing

Text marked 9 Warning provides

information on risk of accident or injury.

Disregard of the instructions may lead

to injuries or endanger life. Inform your

passengers accordingly.

Contents

Commitment to customer

satisfaction:

Our ai m: to keep you happy with your

vehicle. All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers

offer first-class service at competitive

prices. Experienced, factory-trained

technicians work according to factory

instructions. Your Authorised Repairer can

supply you with GENUINE VAUXHALL-

APPROVED PARTS, which have und ergone

stringent quality and precision checks, and

of course useful and attractive

VAUXHALL-APPROVED ACCESSORIES.

Our name is your guarantee!

For d etails of the

Va uxhall Authorised Rep airer Netw ork,

please ring this number; 0845 090 2044

In b rief ....... ......... ............................... ........ . 2

Keys, doors, w indows, sunroof .............. 26

Seats, interior ..... ..................................... 50

Instruments, controls .......... ......... ........... 98

Lighting ............................... .............. .... 128

Infotainment system . ......... .................. 137

Climate control ........................ ......... .... 140

Driving and op eration ... ...................... 168

Self-help, vehicle care ............. ............. 228

Service, maintenance ....................... .... 268

Technical data ............................ ......... 282

Index . ........................................ ......... .... 314

2In brief

In brief

To unlock and open vehicle:

Press button

q , pull door handle

6 Door locks, child safety locks –

see p age 41,

keys – see page 26,

electronic immobiliser – see page 27,

re mote contro l – see page 28,

central locking – see page 30,

mechanical anti-theft locking system 3 –

see p age 30,

Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see pag e 38.

To unlock an d open the luggage

compartment:

Press button

q on remote con trol,

press button on boot lid/tailgate

and for Estate, pull catch

under handle

6 Remote control – see page 28,

central locking – see page 30,

Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 38,

electrically op erated tailgate 3 –

see page 35.

3In brief

To adjust front seats:

Pull handle, slide seat,

release handle

6 Seats – see page 50,

seat p osition – see page 52,

electrically adjustable front seats –

see page 52.

To adjust front seat backrests:

Turn handwheel

Move seat backrest to suit seating position.

Do not lean on seat backrest whilst

adjusting it.

6 Seats – see page 50,

seat position – see page 52,

folding down front passenger’s seat

backrest – see page 66,

electrically adjustable front seats –

see p age 52.

To adjust fron t seat height 3 :

Operate lever on outboard side of

seat

Pump action of lever

6 Seats – see page 50,

seat position –see page 52,

electrically adjustable front seats –

see page 52.

9 Wa rning

Important: Do not sit nearer than

10 inches (25 cm ) from the stee ring

wheel, to permit safe airbag deployment.

Upwa rds: Seat higher

Downwards: Seat lower

4In brief

Adjusting front seat inclination 3:

Operate front lever on outboard

side of seat

Pump action of lever

6 Seats – see page 50,

seat p osition – see page 52,

electrically adjustable front seats –

see page 52.

Electric seat adjustment 3:

Operate switch on outboard side

of seat

6 Seats – see page 52,

seat position – see page 52,

electrically adjustable front seats –

see p age 52.

To adjust head restraint height 3

of front and outboard rear seats:

Press button to release,

adjust height, engage in position

6 Head restraints – see page 55,

head restraint position – see page 56,

rear head restraints – see page 55.

Upwards: Seat steeper

Downwards: Seat flatter

1 Adjusting the longitudinal position

2 Adjusting the inclination

3 He ig ht adjustme nt

4 Seat backrest adjustment

5 Lum bar support 3

5In brief

To adjust head restraint ang le 3

of front and outboard rear seats:

Swivel bottom edge of head

restraint forwards or backwards

6 Head restra ints – see page 55,

head restraint position – see page 56,

rear head restraints – see page 55.

To apply seat belt:

Pull o ut seat belt smoothly from

inertia reel, guide it over the

shoulder and engage in the

belt buckle

The seat belt must not be twisted at any

point. The lap belt must lie snugly against

the body. The backrests must not be tilted

back too far (recommended maximum

tilting a ngle approx. 25°).

To release belt, press red button on belt

buckle.

6 Three-point seat belts – see page 72,

airbag systems 3 – see page 81,

seat position – see page 52.

Adjusting interior mirror:

Swivel mirror housing

Swivel lever on underside of mirror housing

to reduce d azzle at night.

6 Mirror – see page 44,

automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror 3 –

see page 44.

6In brief

To adjust exterior mirrors:

Four-way switch in driver’s door

If the outer mirror switch (1) is pressed, the

four-way switch operates the driver’s and

front passenger’s mirrors 3 , a nd if the inner

mirror switch (2 ) is pressed, it only operates

the front passenger’s mirror.

6 Mirrors – see page 43,

aspherical exterior mirrors 3 – see pa ge 43,

automatic anti-dazzle exterior mirrors 3 –

see page 43,

heated exterior mirrors – see page 13,

electric seat adjustment 3 – see page 54.

Steering column lock and ignition:

Turn key to position 1.

Move steering wheel slightly to

release steering column lock

Positions:

6 Starting – see page 15,

electronic immobiliser – see page 27,

parking the vehicle – see page 16.

Steering wheel adjustment 3 :

Move lever down,

adjust height and distance,

move lever up,

engage

Adjust steering wheel only when vehicle is

stationary and steering colum n loc k is

released.

6 Airbag systems 3 – see page 81.

0 = Ignition off

1 = Steering free, ignition off

2 = Ignition on, for diesel engines:

Preheating

3=Starting

7In brief

Turn light switch:

Press button:

6 Lighting – see page 128,

headlight control indicator –

see pages 100, 126, 128.

Headlight flash, main beam and

dipped beam:

6 Main beam, headlight flash –

see p age 129.

Switch on tu rn signal lights:

6 Turn signal lights – see page 130.

7 =Off

8 = Parking lights

9 = Dipped or main beam

AUTO = Automatic dipped

beam activation

> = Front fog lights 3

r = Fog tail light

Headlight

flash

= Pull stalk

towards

steering wheel

Main beam = Push stalk

forwards

Dipped beam = Push stalk

forwards ag ain

or pull towards

steering wheel

Right = Stalk up

Left = Stalk down

8In brief

9In brief

Page

1 Side air v ents ........ .......................... 142

2 Front pa ssenger’s airbag ............... 81

3 Centre air v ents ........ ..................... 142

4 Infotainment system 3 ......... ........ 137

5 Central information display for

time, date, outside temperature,

Infotainment system 3,

check control 3,

trip computer 3,

Electronic Climate Control 3 ......... 108

6 Turn signal lights................................. 7

Headlight flash,

dipped beam a nd main beam ......... 7

Door-to-door lighting 3 ................. 133

Parking lights ... ......... ..................... 134

Cruise control 3 .............................. 200

7 Steering wheel remote control 3 .. 137

8 Instruments .. ......... ............................98

9 Horn .... ......... ............................... ...... 11

Driver’s airb ag ................... .............. 81

Pa ge

10 Windscreen wiper,

windscreen wash system,

headlight wash system 3 and

rear window wash system 3 ........... 11

11 Park ing lights, dipped beam ........ 128

Instrument illumination ................. 134

Fog tail light .... ......... ...................... 131

Front fog lights 3 ..... ........ .............. 130

Headlight range adjustment 3 ..... 131

12 Unlock ing the bonnet ....... ............. 228

13 Starter switch with steering

colum n lock ..... ......... ......................... 6

14 Accelera tor pedal ................. ........ 184

15 Brake peda l ..... ...................... 185, 208

16 Steering wheel adjustm ent .............. 6

17 Clutch ped al 3 . ......... ..................... 185

18 Heated seat (right) 3 and

seat climate control 3 .......... .........144

Vauxhall alarm system 3 ............... 38

Rear w indow blind 3 ....... ......... ...... 49

and

Electronic Stability Programme 3 196

SPORT mode

3 ............ ................. 198

Page

19 Ashtrays ......... ............. .................... 94

20 S towa ge c om partment

with AUX input 3 ...................... .... 138

21 Cigarette lighter 3 or socket ......... 93

22 Climate control .. .............. ............. 163

23 Heated seat (left) 3 ......... ......... .... 144

Haz ard warning lights ................. 131

Parking distance sensors 3 .......... 202

24 Glove compartment ... ............ 95, 135

25 Fusebox . ........................................ . 246

10 In brief

Control indicators

Turn signal lights,

see pages 7, 98, 130.

Engine oil pressure,

see page 98.

Brak e sy stem , clu t ch sy ste m,

see pages 99, 209, 276.

Alternat or,

see page 99.

Airbag systems 3,

belt t ensioners 3,

see pages 74, 86.

Coola nt temperat ure,

see pages 100, 106.

Exterior l ights,

see pages 100, 128.

SPO RT mode of autom atic

tra nsm ission 3,

see pages 100, 178, 179.

Winter programme of

autom atic transmission 3 or

Easytronic 3,

see pages 100, 172, 180.

(

Door open 3,

see page 100.

Easytronic 3,

starting the engine 3,

see pages 100, 169.

Bulb re plac em ent 3,

see pages 100, 252.

Open lugg age comp artment,

see pages 34, 101.

Front fog lights 3 ,

see pages 101, 130.

Main beam,

see pages 7, 101, 128.

Fog tail li ght,

see pages 101, 131.

Parking distance sensors 3,

see pages 101, 202.

Continuous Dam ping Control 3 ,

SPORT m ode,

see pages 101, 198.

Seat belt 3,

see p age 101.

Engine electronics, transmission

ele ct ronics 3, diesel fuel filter 3,

immob iliser,

see pages 27, 101, 192.

Preheating for diesel engines 3,

diesel p artic le fi lter 3,

see pages 102, 194.

H Coolant level,

see pages 102, 275.

An ti -lock B ra ke Sy st em (A BS ),

see page 210.

Electro-hydraulic power

assisted steering,

see page 103.

Electronic S tabil ity Prog ramm e

(ESP®

Plus

) 3 ,

see pages 103, 196.

Seat occupancy recognition 3,

see pages 87, 103.

S Engine oil level 3 ,

see pages 103, 272.

Cruise control 3,

see page 200.

Fuel lev el,

see pages 103, 106, 228.

Exhaust gases 3,

see pages 104, 192.

Tyre pressure monitori ng

system 3,

see pages 104, 204.

Ad aptive Forwa rd Lighting

(AFL) 3,

see pages 104, 132.

11In brief

Hazard warning lights:

6 Hazard warning lights – see page 131.

Activate horn:

Press

j in centre of steering

wh eel

6 Airbag systems 3 – see pag e 81,

remote control on steering wheel 3 –

see p age 137.

Windscreen wiper:

Gently push stalk upwards

Press the stalk down from position §:

Single swipe.

6 Windscreen wiper – see page 126,

adjustable wiper interval 3 – see page 126,

wiper blades – see pages 277, 278,

vehicle care – see page 264.

On = Press ¨

Off = Press ¨ again

§ =Off

$ = Adjustable timed

interval wipe

% =Slow

& =Fast

12 In brief

Automatic wiping with rain

sensor

Gently push stalk upwards

Automatic wiping $:

6 Windscreen wiper – see page 126,

wiper blades – see pages 277, 278,

vehicle care – see p age 264.

Operating windscreen and

headlight wash systems

3 :

Pull stalk towards steering wheel

6 Windscreen wash system and headlight

wash system 3 – see page 127,

further information – see pages 264, 278.

Operating rear window wiper 3

and wash systems

3 :

6 Rear window wiper 3 and rear window

wash 3 systems – see page 127,

further information – see pages 264, 277,

278.

§ =Off

$ = Automatic wiping with

ra i n s enso r

Low sensitivity: Move adjuster wheel

to the left

High sensitivity: Move adjuster wheel

to the right

Wiper on = Push stalk

forwards

Wiper off = Push stalk

forwards again

W as h = H old sta lk in fully

forwards position

13In brief

Heated rear window,

heated exterior mirrors:

6 Air conditioning 3 – see page 140,

heated rear window, heated exterior

mirrors – see page 143.

To demist or defrost windows:

Set air distribution to l,

turn rotary knob for temperature

and airflow clockwise;

Air conditioning system

Press buttons n and V;

Automatic air conditioning

system

Press buttons n and V,

turn rotary knob for

temperature clockwise,

airflow to A ;

Electronic Climate Control

Press button V

6 Clim ate control – see page 140.

Setting automatic mode of

Electronic Climate Control

Press AUTO button,

s et te mpera ture for d ri ver’ s

and front passenger’s sides using

left and right rotary knobs

6 Electronic Climate Control 3 –

see page 156.

On = Press Ü

Off = Press Ü again

14 In brief

Manual transmission:

Reverse gear: with vehicle stationary, pull

the ring up three seconds after depressing

clutch pedal and engage gear.

If the gear does not engage, set the lever in

neutral, release the clutch pedal and

depress again; then repeat gear selection.

Easytronic 3:

The selector lever must alway s be mov ed in

the appropriate direction as far as it will

go. Upon release, it automatically returns

to the centre position. Pay heed to the

gear/mode indicator in the transmission

display.

The footbrake must be depressed when

starting.

6 Easytronic 3 – see page 168.

Automatic transmission 3 :

Selector lever in D to the left:

Manual mode

P or N must be engaged when starting.

N=Idling

o =Drive position

+ = Higher gear

- = Lower gear

A/M = Switch between

Automatic and Manual

mode

R=Reverse gear (with

selector le v er lock)

P=Park position

R = Reverse gear

N = Neutral position (idling)

D = Automatic gear selection

+=Higher gear

-=Lower gear

15In brief

In order to leave P, switch on ignition,

depress footbrake and press button on

selector lever.

To engag e P or R, press button on selector

lever.

6 Automatic transmission 3 –

see page 176.

Before starting -o ff, check :

z Tyre pressure and condition –

see pages 204, 211, 299.

z Engine oil level and fluid levels in engine

compartment – see pages 271 to 279.

z All windows, mirrors, exterior lighting

and number plates are free from dirt,

snow and ice and are operational.

z No objects are placed in front of the rear

window, on the instrument panel or in

the area in w hich the airbags infla te.

z Seats, seat b elts and mirrors are

correctly adjusted.

z Brake operation.

To start engine:

O p er a t e cl u tc h an d b r ak e pe d al s,

automatic transmission

in P or N,

Easytronic

3: Depress brake,

do not accelerate,

Petrol engines: Turn key to 3;

Diesel engines : Turn key to 2,

when control indicator

goes out

, tu rn key to 3;

release key once engine

is running

To restart or switch off the engine, turn key

back to 0.

To switch on the ignition, only turn the key

to 2.

6 Electronic immobiliser – see page 27,

diesel fuel system – see page 228.

P Only with vehicle stationary, apply

ha nd brake beforehan d.

R Only if vehicle is stationary.

Preheating system switches on only if outside

temperature is low.

16 In brief

Releasing th e handbrake:

Raise lever slightly,

press release button,

lower lever fully

6 Handbrake – see pag e 209.

Parking the vehicle

z Always ap ply the handbrake firmly

without pressing the release button;

to do this, fold up the armrest 3. Apply

handbrake as fully as possible on an

uphill or downhill incline. To reduce the

amount of force required to activate the

handbrake, depress the footbrake at the

same time.

z Switch off the engine; to do this, turn the

ignition key to 0. Remove the ignition key

and turn the stee ring whee l until the

s t ee r in g co lu m n lo ck ( anti- the ft

protection) engages. In vehicles with

automatic transmission 3, the key ca n

only be removed when the selector lever

is in P.

z If the vehicle is parked on a flat surfa ce

or an uphill incline, engage first gear

before switching off the ignition if you

have manual transmission or

Easytronic 3 ; if the vehicle has

automatic transmission 3, place the

selector lever in P. On an uphill incline,

also turn the front wheels away from the

kerb.

If the vehicle is on a downhill incline,

engage reverse gear before switching off

the ignition if you have manual

transmission or Easytronic 3; if the

vehicle has automatic transmission 3,

place the se lector le ver in P. Also turn the

front wheels towards the kerb.

z Lock the doors and luggage

compartment and activate the Vauxhall

alarm system 3 by pressing button p on

the remote control.

To activate the mechanical anti-theft

locking system 3 , press button p again

no more than 15 seconds after locking.

Advice when parking:

z Do not park vehicle on easily ignitable

surfaces, since the hot exhaust system

temperatures could cause the surfa ce to

ignite.

z On vehicles with Easytronic 3 , control

indicator R flashes for a few seconds

after the ignition is switched off if the

ha nd brake ha s not be en a pplied –

see page 174.

z Close windows and sunroof 3.

z The engine cooling fans may run after

the engine has been switched off –

see page 271.

6 Remote control – see page 28,

central locking – see page 30,

Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 38,

vehicle decommissioning – see page 281.

17In brief

That was a brief overview of the

most important in forma tion for

your first drive in your vehicle.

The other pages o f this chapter

contain a summary of the

interesting functions in your

vehicle.

The rema in ing ch apters of the

Owner’s Manual contain

important information on

operatio n, safety and

maintenance as well as a

com plete index.

18 In brief

Airbag system

The airbag system consists of several

separate systems.

Front airbag system

The front airbag system will be triggered in

the event of a serious accident involving a

frontal impact and forms safety cushions

for the driver and front passenger.

The forward movement of the driver and

front passenger is checked and the risk of

injuries to the upper body and head are

thereby substantially reduced.

Side airbag system 3

The side airbag system triggers when a

side-on collision occurs and provides a

safety barrier for the driver and/or front

passenger in the respective front door

area. This reduces the risk of injury to the

upper body considera bly, in the event of a

side-impact.

Curtain ai rbag system 3

The curtain airbag system triggers in the

event of a side-on collision and provides a

safety barrier in the head area on the

re spe ctive side of the v ehicle. This red uce s

the risk of injury to the head considera bly in

the event of a side-on collision.

6 Airbag systems 3 – see page 81.

19In brief

Active head restraints 3 at front

seats

In the event of a rear-impact, the active

head restraints tilt forwards a little. The

head is more effectively supported by the

head restraint and the danger of injuries

caused by whiplash in the neck area is

reduced.

Active head restraints are identified by the

lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint

guide sleeves.

6 Head restra ints – see page 55.

Operating menus in th e

information display

Menu options are selected using menus

and using the buttons/four-way button

or the multi-function knob of the

Infotainme nt sy ste m 3 or the left-h and

adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel.

The respective menu options are shown

on th e dis play.

To select with four-way button:

Press the four-way button up, down, right

or left.

Selection using multi-function knob:

Rotate and press multi-function knob.

To exit a menu, turn the multi-function

knob left or right to Return or Main and

select.

20 In brief

Selection using left-hand adjuster wheel on

steering wheel:

Rotate and press adjuster wheel.

6 Information display – see page 108.

Trip computer 3

The trip computer provides information on

driving data, which is continually recorded

and evaluated electronically.

Functions:

z Range,

z Instantaneous consumption,

z Distance travelled,

z Average speed,

z Effective consumption,

z Average consumption,

z Stop watch,

z Tyre pressure 3.

6 Trip computer 3 – see pages 114, 120.

Check control 3

The check control software monitors:

z Fluid le vels,

z Tyre pressures 3 ,

z Remote control battery,

z Vauxhall alarm system 3,

z Important exterior lights, including

cables and fuses.

6 Check control 3 – see page 124.

Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36

BC 1 All values

BC 2

257.0 miles

Timer

Ø40mph

Tyres

7.0 ga l .

Ø 31.0 miles/ gal.

Coolant level

check

21In brief

Remote control on steering

wheel

The functions of the Infotainment system 3

and the information display can be

operated with the buttons and adjuster

whee ls on the stee ring wheel.

Further information is available in the

Infotainment system operating

instructions.

6 Remote control on steering wheel 3 –

see page 137,

Infotainment system – see page 137.

Twin Audio 3

Tw in Audio provides rear seat occupants

with the opportunity to listen to a different

audio source than the one selected by the

driver on the Infotainment system 3 .

Only an audio source that is not currently

active on the Infotainm ent system can be

controlled using Twin Audio.

Tw o headphone connections are available,

with separate volume controls.

Further information is available in the

Infotainme nt sy ste m ope ra ting

instructions.

6 Twin Audio 3 – see page 138.

FlexOrganizer 3

The side walls contain retaining strips,

where various components can be

attached to divide the luggage

compa rtm ent or fasten loads.

The sy ste m consists of:

z Variable partition net,

z Variable partition wall,

z Partition rod,

z Mesh pockets for the side walls,

z Hooks.

6 Fle xO rg aniz er 3 – see page 69.

22 In brief

Travel Assistant 3

The Travel Assistant contains:

z Arm re st,

z Stowage compartments,

z Waste containe r,

z Drink holders,

z Acc es sory socke ts,

z Connection console

e.g. for DVD player 3,

z Elec tric cool box,

z Foldaway tables,

z Tw in Audio (rear audio module) 3 or

stowage compartment.

The Travel Assistant is installed on a

console above the centre seat in the rear.

6 Travel Assistant 3 – see page 58.

Adaptive Forward Lighting

(AFL)

On vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights, AFL

improves illumination of:

z Curves (curve lighting),

z Intersections and tight turns (turn

lighting).

C ur ve lighti ng

The Xenon light beam pivots based on

steering wheel position and ve hicle speed,

from approx. 6 mph (10 km/h).

The headlights shine at an angle of up

to 15° to the right or left of the direction of

travel.

Turn lig hting

An additional light illuminates at certain

steering wheel settings (after approx. 90°),

turn signal settings and speeds up to

approx. 25 mph (40 km/h).

The lig ht beam projects at a 90° angle to

the left or right of the vehicle up to a

distance of approx. 30 metres.

Mot or way lighti ng

At higher speeds and continuous straight

ahead travel, the dipped beam

automatically raises slightly, thereby

increasing headlight range.

6 Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 3 –

see page 132.

23In brief

Parking distance sensors 3

When reverse gear is selected, the parking

distance sensors switch on automatically.

The parking distance sensors can also be

activated at speeds of less than 15 mph

(25 km/h) by pressing the r button on

the instrument panel.

If the vehicle approaches an obstacle to

the front or rear, a series of signals is

audible in the vehicle interior. The interval

be tween the signals becomes shorter a s

the d istance is reduced. If the distance is

less than 30 cm, the signal will be

continuous.

6 Parking distance sensors 3 –

see page 202.

SPORT mode 3

To activ ate

Pre ss the SPORT button. The LED in the

button illuminates.

SPORT mode is used to change

damping 3, stee ring 3, throttle application

and the shifting times and shifting points

for E asytro nic 3 and automatic

transmission 3 whilst driving.

Damping and steering 3 become more

direct and provide better contact with the

road surface. The engine reacts more

quickly to accelerator movements.

With automatic transmission 3, the shift

tim es are reduced and gear changes occur

at higher engine speeds (not when cruise

control 3 is a ctive).

6 SPORT mode 3 – see page 198.

Tyre pressure monitoring

system

The tyre pressure monitoring system

continuously monitors the pressure of all

four tyres while the vehicle is being driven.

A pressure sensor is installed in each wheel.

The tyre pressures of the individual tyres

are transmitted to a controller, where they

are compared.

The current tyre pressures can be

displayed on the Graphical Information

Display or the Colour Information

Display 3.

Deviating tyre pressures are displayed in

the form of messages on the information

display whilst driving.

6 Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 –

see page 204.

Ü Board Computer

BC 1

BC 2

Timer

Tyres

24 In brief

Electrically operated tailgate,

Estate

z To op en :

- or -

z To close:

- or -

6 Electrically operated tailgate 3 –

see p age 35.

Towing equipment with pivoting

coupling ball bar

The release lever is in the left stowag e

compartment in the lugga ge

compartment. Open cover.

z Pull release lever downwards.

z Pivot the coupling ball bar backwards

until it engages.

6 Towing equipment with pivoting

coupling ball b ar 3 – see page 222.

– Hold down remote control button r

(see page 35, Fig. 17548 J) for a pprox.

1second.

– When the key is inserted in the starter

switch and the handbrake is app lied,

hold down the x button in the driver’s

door for approx. 1 second.

– Unlock the tailgate and open by pulling

the catch beneath the handle.

–Hold down the r button on the remote

control until the tailgate is closed.

– When the key is inserted in the starter

switch and the handbrake is applied ,

hold down th e x button in the driver’s

door until the tailgate is shut.

–Press the F button in the tailgate.

– The LED on the lever is illuminated w hile

the coupling ball bar is not engaged.

– In addition, a warning buzzer sounds

and the coupling ball bar pivots

downwards.

– LED must extinguish,

– Warning buzzer must cease,

– Otherwise, repeat the procedure.

25In brief

Diesel particle filter 3

The d iesel pa rticle filter system remove s

polluting soot particles out of the engine

exhaust gases. The system includes a

self-cleaning function that operates

automatically whilst driving. The filter is

cleaned by burning the trapped soot

particles at a high temperature. There may

be an increase in fuel consumption,

exhaust smell, and engine cooling fan

operation 3 during the self-cleaning

operation.

The self-cleaning function cannot operate

automatically during certain driving

situations where the engine does not reach

its normal operating tempera ture.

An example of this would be driving only

short distances in cold weather.

If the filter needs cleaning and rec ent

driving situations did not allow the function

to autom atically operate, then control

indicator ! will flash. If this occurs, then

you may continue to drive the vehicle

normally. The vehicle will not be damaged

and does not require service.

The self-cleaning function will

automatically operate whilst driving after

the engine has reached its normal

operating temperature. Control

indicator ! will continue to flash until the

self-cleaning operation is complete. This

may take up to 20 minutes of driving.

The time will be shorter at higher vehicle

spe eds .

6 Diese l particle filte r 3 – see page 194.

26 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Keys, doors, windows,

sunroof

Replacement keys

The key number is specified in the vehicle

documents and in the Car Pass 3.

The key is a constituent of the electronic

immobiliser. Ordering keys from a Vauxhall

Authorised Repairer g uarantees problem -

free operation of the electronic

immobiliser.

Keep the spare key in a safe place.

Locks - see page 266.

Lock cylinders

Designed to free-whe el if they are

forcefully rotated without the correct key or

if the correct key is not fully inserted.

To reset, turn cylinder with the correct key

until its slot is vertica l, remove key and then

re-insert it. If the cylinder still free-wheels,

turn the key through 180° and repeat

op eratio n.

Car Pass 3

The Car Pass contains all of the vehicle’s

data and should therefore not be k ept in

the vehicle.

Have your Car Pass to hand when

consu lting a V aux h all Authoris ed Re pairer.

Key with foldaway key section 3

Press button to extend. Press button to

retract and audibly engage key section.

Replacem ent keys ......................... ...... 26

Loc k cylinders ..................................... . 26

Ca r Pass 3 ..................... ......... .............. 26

Key with foldaw ay key section 3 ...... . 26

Electronic immobiliser............ .............. 27

Store and activate personal vehicle

settings using the remote control.... 28

Remote control ........ ......... ................... 28

Central locking system ........................ 30

Fault when locking or unlocking......... 33

Luggage compartment.... ................... 34

Vauxhall alarm system 3................... . 38

Child safety locks .......... ......... .............. 41

Universal remote control in mirror

housing 3........... ............. ................... 41

Exterior mirrors..... ............. ................... 43

Interior mirror .. .............. ....................... 44

Electric windows 3 ..................... ......... . 45

Window s in rear doors . ....................... 47

Sunroof 3 .... ............................... ......... . 47

Electrically operated rear window

blind 3 ............................ ......... .......... 49

Sunblinds for rear door windows 3.... 49

27Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Electronic immobiliser

The system checks whether the vehicle may

be started using the key that has been

inserted. If the k ey is recognised as

"authorised" the vehicle can be started.

The check is carried out via a transponder

in the key.

The electronic immobiliser activates

automatically when the key is removed

from the starter switch.

The c od e number of the e lectronic

immobiliser is given in the Car Pass.

Control i nd icator for imm obiliser

Control indica tor A illuminates briefly

when the ig nition is sw itche d on.

If the control indicator flashes when the

ignition is on, there is a fault in the system;

the engine cannot be started. Switch off

the ignition and then repeat the start

attempt.

If the control indicator A continues to

flash, try to start the engine using the spare

key and contact a workshop for assistance.

If control indicator A illuminates after

the engine is started, there is a fault in

the engine elec tronics or transmission

electronics 3 (see pages 101, 174, 182,

192) or there is water in the diesel fuel

filter 3 (see page 274).

Not e

The immobiliser does not lock the doors.

Therefore, after leaving the vehicle always

lock it and switch on the Vauxhall alarm

system 3 – see pages 30, 38.

28 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Store and activate personal

vehicle settings using the remote

control

The last settings selected for:

z Instrument illumination,

z Central locking,

z Memory function 3 for driver’s seat

and mirror,

z Electronic Climate Control 3

are automatically stored depending on the

vehic le key used.

Different settings are stored for each

remote control. Use of a remote control will

activate the settings associated with it.

The settings for five remote controls can be

stored.

Remote co ntro l

The remote control is integrated in the key.

Used to operate:

z Central locking system,

z Mechanical anti-theft locking system 3,

z Vauxhall alarm system 3,

z Electrically operated tailgate, Estate 3.

In addition, electric windows 3 and electric

sunroof 3 can be closed using the remote

control.

The remote control has a range of approx.

5 metres. This rang e ca n be a ffected by

outside influences. Aim the remote control

at the vehicle to operate.

Handle the remote control with care,

protect it from moisture and high

temperatures and avoid unnecessary

operation.

The hazard warning lights illuminate to

indicate that the remote control is

operational.

C entra l lock ing system,

see page 30.

Mechanical anti-theft locking system 3 ,

see page 30.

Boot lid or tailgate,

see page 34.

Vauxhall alarm system 3,

see page 38.

Electric windows 3 ,

see page 45.

Electrica lly op era ted sunr oof 3,

see page 47.

29Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Fault

If the central locking system cannot be

operated with the remote control, it may be

due to the following :

z The range of the remote control has

been exceeded.

z Remote control battery voltage is too

low. Battery replacement - see next

column.

z Frequent, repeated operation of the

remote control outside the reception

range of the vehicle (e.g. too far from

vehicle, remote control is then no longer

recognised). Remote control

synchronisation – see end column.

z If the central loc king system is

overloaded as a result of repeated

operation at short intervals. The power

supply is cut off for a brief period.

z Interference from higher-powe r radio

waves from other sources.

To eliminate the cause of a fault, we

recommend contacting a workshop for

assistance.

Manual unlocking and locking using the

vehicle key - see page 33.

Remote control b attery rep lacement

Replace the battery as soon as the range

of the remote control becomes reduced.

Extending the key – see page 26.

Open the remote control. Replace the

battery (b attery type – see page 307),

noting installation position. Close the

re mote contro l.

Make sure that you dispose of old batteries

in accordance with environmental

protection regulations.

Remote control synchronisation

After a battery change, unlock door with

key in lock - see page 33. Inserting the key

into the lock synchronises the remote

control.

30 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Central locking system

For doors, boot lid/tailgate and tank flap.

To unlock

Press button q on remote control.

To lo ck

Press button p on remote control.

Mechanical anti-theft locking system 3

All doors must be closed. Press button p

on remote control again no more than

15 se conds after locking.

Lock buttons on all doors are positioned

such that doors cannot be opened.

If the ignition was on, the driver’s door

must be opened and closed once so that

the vehicle can be secured.

9 Wa rnin g

Do not use the system if there are people

in the vehicle. The doors cannot be

unlocked from inside.

31Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Programming unlocking mode 3

When the vehicle is delive red from the

factory, the remote c ontrol is preset so that

a single press of the q button opens all of

the doors and the luggage compartment.

The unit can be configured so that a single

press of the q button unlocks the entire

vehicle or just the driver’s door.

Change to presetting:

Hold button q on the remote control and

button m in the driver’s door depressed

simulta neously until a double buzzer

sounds. Afterwards, only the driver’s door

will be unlocked when button q is pressed

once.

The entire vehicle is then unlocked by

pressing button q on the remote control

twice.

To restore the original settings, hold

button q on the remote control and

button m in the driver’s door depressed

simulta neously until a buzzer sounds.

The current setting is stored for the remote

control - see page 28.

Central l oc king sw itch for loc king a nd

unlocking the doors from inside the

vehicle

Press button m in the driver’s door:

Doors and luggage compartment are

locked.

Press button ) in the driver’s door:

Doors and luggage compartment are

unlocke d.

In the Estate with electrically operated

tailgate 3, the doors and luggage

compartment are locked and unlocked

with button m.

When the mechanical anti-theft locking

sy ste m is active 3 (see page 30), the doors

cannot be unlocked with this button.

If the vehicle is locked using the remote

control, buttons m and ) in the driv er’s

door are inopera ble.

Autom atic locking 3

The central locking can be set to lock

automatically at a certain speed.

To activate the function, hold button p on

the remote control and button m in the

driver’s door depressed simultaneously

until a double buzzer sounds.

The doors and luggage compartment a re

unlocked by switching off the ignition or by

pressing button ) or, for Estate with

electrically op erated tailgate 3, b y

pressing button m in the driver’s door.

Individual doors can b e unlocked by

pulling the lock button.

To deactivate the function, hold button p

on the remote control and button m in the

driver’s door depressed simultaneously

until a buzzer sounds.

The current setting is stored for the remote

control - see page 28.

32 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Note

z If the driver’s door is not closed properly,

the central locking system will unlock

again immediately after locking.

z 30 seconds after unlocking using the

remote control, the doors automatically

lock again 3 if neither a door nor the

luggage compartment has been

op ened.

z To lock the doors from within (e.g. to

prevent undesired access from outside),

press the central locking button m.

z If they are locked, the doors and the

luggage compartment unlock

automatically in the event of an accident

of a certain severity (to permit outside

ass istance). Prere quisite : Ignition must

not be switched off.

Closing the windows 3 and sunroof 3

from outside using the remote contr ol

The electric windows 3 can be closed from

outside: hold down button p on the

remote control until all windows are closed.

The sunroof 3 can be closed from outside:

hold down button p on the remote control

until the roof is fully closed.

Vehicle with electrically retrac ta ble

exterior mirrors 3:

When closing the windows using the

remote control, the exterior mirrors will also

be retracted. The mirrors will be folded

back out when the vehicle is unlocked using

the remote control.

If the mirrors are retracted using the button

in the driver’s door, they remain in this

position when the doors are unlocked.

9 Warning

Take care when ope rating the e lectric

windows 3 and the sunroof 3. Risk of

injury, particularly to c hildren.

Vehicle passeng ers must be informed

accordingly.

Keep a close watch on the windows and

sunroof when closing them. Ensure that

nothing becomes trapped in them as

they move.

33Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Automatic closing 3

If the mechanical anti-theft locking

system 3 is activated, the electric

windows 3 and sunroof 3 are

automatically closed and the electrically

retractable exterior mirrors 3 are

automatically retracted as soon as the rain

sensor 3 detects water on the windscreen.

To safeguard the battery from discharge

by the rain sensor 3, after four hours the

electric windows 3 and sunroof 3 are

automatically closed and the electrically

retractable exterior mirrors 3 are

automatically retracted.

For further information on electric

windows 3 and the sunroof 3 –

see pages 47, 49.

Fault

If the central locking system cannot be

operated with the remote control, it may be

due to the following :

z The central locking system is overloaded

as a result of repeated operation a t short

intervals. The power supply is cut off for

a brief period.

z Defective fuse in fusebox –

seepage246.

Seek the assistance of a workshop to rectify

the cause of the fault. To open the driver’s

door with the key - see the following

section.

Fault when locking or unlocking

Remote control fa ult

To unlock:

Insert key into lock in driver’s door and turn

towards front of vehicle as far as it will go.

Turn key back to v ertical position a nd

remove from lock. Unloc k d riv er’s d oor with

central locking switch - see page 31.

The mechanical anti-theft lock ing sy stem 3

is deactivated when the key is inserted in

the starter switch.

To lock :

Open front passenger’s door, close driver’s

door, lock vehicle using central locking

switch (see page 31), close front

passenger’s door.

Ma lfunction in centra l locki ng system

To unlock:

Insert key into driver’s door lock and turn

towards front of vehicle as far as it will go.

Turn key back to a vertical position a nd

remove. The other doors can be unlocked

by pulling the interior lock button (unless

the mechanical anti-theft locking system 3

has been enabled). The luggage

compartm ent and the tank flap

remain locked.

To lock:

Lock front passenger’s door and rear doors

by pressing the interior lock button. Lock

driver’s door with key in lock. Turn key

towards rear of vehicle as far as it will go,

turn key to a vertical position and remove.

The unlocked tank flap and the luggage

compartment cannot be locked.

34 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Luggage compartment

To unlock

Press button q on remote control.

To op en

The luggage compartment of the Saloon /

Hatch is opened by pressing the button,

and the luggage compartment of the

Estate is opened by pulling the catch

beneath the handle.

Illum ination of control indicator s

indicates that the boot lid/tailgate is open.

For notes on open boot lid/tailgate -

see p age 37.

Electrically operated tailgate, Estate 3 –

see next page.

To close

There is a handle on the inside of the

boot lid/tailgate for closing the luggage

compartment.

With the Estate, do not operate the catch

beneath the handle when closing,

otherwise the luggage compartment will

be unlocked again.

35Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

To lock

Press button p on the remote control

– or –

Press central locking b utton m in d riv er’s

door when the doors are closed.

Electrically operated tailgate, Estate 3

In Estate vehicles with an electrically

op erated tailgate, the tailga te can b e

electrica lly opene d and c losed after

unlocking.

To op en :

Unlock the vehicle by pressing button q on

the remote control; the tailga te is opened

electrica lly by pulling the catch beneath

the handle.

– or –

Briefly press button r on the remote

control to unlock the tailgate (the doors

remain locked.) The tailgate is opened

electrically by pulling the catch beneath

th e ha ndle.

– or –

Hold down button r on the remote control

for more than 1 second (the doors remain

locked); the tailgate is unlocked and opens

electrically

– or –

9 Warning

Make sure there is more than 2 metres

clearance before operating the electric

tailgate. Observe the pivoting z one of the

tailgate during operation and do not

enter the pivoting zone.

36 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

With the key in the starter switch and the

handbrake applied, hold button x in

the driver’s door depressed for app rox.

1 second; the tailgate opens electrically.

To close :

Hold d ow n button r on the remote control

until the tailgate is closed.

– or –

Hold down button x in the driver’s door

when the k ey is inserte d in the starter

switch until the tailgate is closed.

– or –

Press button F in the tailgate; the tailgate

closes electrically.

To lock, press button p on the remote

control.

Tailgate opening and closing is indicated

by the rear turn signal lights flashing three

times.

If the luggage compartment is not closed

within 20 minutes of opening, the button in

the tailgate is deactivated.

37Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Interruption of tailgate opening/closing

procedure

The opening or closing process is

immediately interrupted by:

briefly pressing button x in the driver’s

door,

– or –

button r on the remote control,

– or –

the external button beneath the handle,

– or –

button F in the tailgate.

The tailgate remains in this position for

10 se cond s a nd then slowly reope ns.

Safety function

The tailgate has an obstruction detection

facility. If the tailgate encounters

resistance during the automatic closing

movement, the closing procedure is

stopped imm ediately and the tailgate is

slowly op ened again.

Vehicles with towing equipment 3:

When towing a caravan/trailer, the

tailgate cannot be operated using

button r on the remote control or

button x in the driver’s door.

Fault in electrically operated tailgate

If the electronic drive should fail, the

tailg ate c an be op ened and closed

manually, although more force is required

to close the tailgate.

Opening the tailgate when the doors are

locked via the central locking system

If the doors are loc ked via the central

locking system, the tailgate can be opened

by pressing button r on the rem ote control

and pulling the catch beneath the handle.

Open boot lid, open tailgate

Fitting accessories to the boot lid/tailgate

will increase its weight. If it becomes too

heavy, the boot lid/tailgate will then not

stay open.

9 Wa rnin g

Do not drive with the boot lid or tailgate

open or ajar, e.g . when transporting

bulky objects, since toxic exhaust gas

could penetra te the interior.

Also, the number plate of the Estate

cannot be clearly read unless the

luggage compartment is closed.

38 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Vauxhall alarm system 3

Monitors:

z Doors, luggage compa rtment, bonnet,

z Passenger compartment,

z Vehicle tilt, e.g. if it is raised,

z Ignition.

To activ ate

All doors, windows, the sunroof 3 and the

bonnet must be closed. Press button p on

the remote control.

If the ignition was switched on, the driver’s

door must be opened and closed ag ain so

that the anti-theft alarm system can be

activated again.

Act ivat ion without monitoring of

passenger compartment and vehicle tilt

Activate e.g. when animals are left in the

vehicle.

1. Close boot lid/tailgate and bonnet.

2. Press button Ä; LED in button flashes

(maximum of 10 seconds).

3. Close doors.

4. Switch on anti-theft alarm system.

LED illuminates. After a pprox.

10 seconds, the system is activated

without monitoring of the passenger

compartment or vehicle tilt. LED

fla shes until system is switched off.

39Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Light emitting d iode (LED)

During the first 10 seconds of anti-theft

alarm system activation:

After the first 10 seconds of anti-theft

alarm system activation:

If a system fault occurs, contact a

work shop for as sistance.

To deactivate

Press button q on the remote control

– or –

turn on the ignition.

If there is a fault in the remote control,

unlock vehicle as described on page 33.

If the alarm is triggered w hen the driver’s

door is opened, deactivate the anti-theft

alarm sy ste m by sw itc hing on the ignition.

z LED

illu m in a te s

= Test, switch-on delay.

z LED flashe s

quickly

= Door, luggage

compartment or

bonnet open, or

system fault.

z LED flashes

slowly

=System switched on.

z LED illuminates

for approx.

1second

= Switch-off function.

40 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Estate with electrically operated

tailgate 3:

To open and close the lugga ge

compartment when the anti-theft

alarm system is active:

1. Briefly press button r on the remote

control – luggage compartment is

unlocked (see page 34), and monitoring

of the passenger compartment and

vehicle tilt is d isabled.

2. Open lug gage compartment –

seepage34.

3. After the luggage compartment is

closed, monitoring of the passeng er

compartment, luggage comp artment

and vehicle tilt is reactivated after a

5 minute delay and the tailga te is

locked. To override the delay, press

button p on the remote control.

Note

z Changes to the vehicle interior, such as

the use of ex tra seat covers, could imp air

the function of passeng er comp artm ent

monitoring.

z Disable passenger compartm ent

monitoring if the vehicle interior is being

heated.

Alarm

An alarm can be triggered whilst the anti-

theft alarm system is active, indicated by:

z an acoustic sig nal (horn) and

z a visual signal (hazard w arning lights).

The number of alarms and the duration

thereof are stipulated by law.

The alarm can be silenced by pressing a

button on the remote control or by

switching on the ignition. The anti-theft

alarm system is deactivated at the same

time.

Ala rm siren wit h integrated b attery 3

The alarm siren monitors the on-board

voltage network and triggers an alarm if

this network is manipulated (e.g. if the

vehicle’s battery is disconnected by

unauthorised persons). The alarm siren has

its own power supply and is therefore not

dependent on the vehicle’s battery.

If the vehicle’s battery is to be

disconnected (e.g. for maintenance work),

the alarm siren must be deactivated as

follows: switch the ignition on then off,

disconnect the vehicle’s battery within

15 se conds.

To switch off alarm siren:

Switch ignition on then off.

41Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

C hild safety lo cks

Turn rotary knob near rear door lock from

the vertical position using key;

door cannot be opened from inside.

Universal remote control in mirror

housing 3

To operate up to 3 different remotely-

operated systems (e.g. garage door,

domestic alarm system, dom estic exterior

lighting).

The programmed universal remote control

can replace the individual remote control

units of the sy ste ms to be ope rated . Three

buttons on the underside of the mirror

housing can be used to operate various

systems.

Consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer

for details on compatible systems.

Basic programming of the universal

remote control system

1. Switch on ignition.

2. When programming for the first time,

press both outer buttons on the mirror

housing, until the control indicator

along side the buttons flashes rapidly

(after approx. 20 seconds).

3. Hold the ma nual remote control unit at a

distance of 0 to 30 c m from the control

button area of the mirror housing.

9 Wa rning

Use the child safety locks whenever

children are occupying the rear seats.

Disreg ard may lead to injuries or

endanger life. Vehicle passengers must

be informed accordingly.

9 Wa rnin g

Ensure that no persons, animals or

objects are in the movement zone of the

system to be operated (e.g. a garage

door). Vehicle pa ssengers m ust be

informed of the hazards.

42 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

4. Press the button on the manual remote

control unit while pressing and holding

the desired button of the universal

re mote contro l.

5. The control indicator in the mirror

housing will flash slowly at first. As soon

as it flashes rapidly, release both

buttons. The universal remote control

system is now programmed for the

chosen system.

6. To programme other buttons with other

systems, repeat steps 3 to 5.

If a system cannot be operated after

rep eated programming, and the control

indicator flashes rapidly for a short time

after the relevant button has been pressed

and then illuminates for 2 seconds, the

receiver may be equipped with a variable

code syste m - see ne xt column.

Prog ramming the universal remote

control system for variable code systems

1. Perform b asic prog ramming –

see previous page.

2. Activate synchronisation mode of

system (see system manufacturer’s

operating manual) and briefly press the

pre-programmed button on the

universal remote control three times

within 30 seconds.

3. The universal remote control system is

now programmed for variable code

systems. To programme other systems

for variable codes, repeat steps 1 and 2

for the other buttons on the universal

remote control.

Using t he universal remote control system

With the ignition on, press the required

universal remote control button and the

control indicator in the mirror housing will

illuminate. The pre-programm ed system

can now be operated using the universal

remote control system.

Reprog ramming individual button

settings

If a button that has already been

programm ed is to b e used for a diffe rent

system, repeat steps 3 to 5 of the basic

programm ing procedure described

previously.

Clea ring all programmed button settings

Before selling the vehicle, it is a good id ea

to erase button settings.

Button settings can only be erased all at

once. It is not possible to erase individual

button settings. Buttons can, however, be

individually reprogrammed - see

"Reprogramming individual button

settings".

In order to erase the programming of all

3 buttons, press both outer buttons and

release as soon as the LED begins to flash

(after approx. 20 seconds). All button

settings have now been clea red and can

be programmed anew at any time.

43Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Note

Keep replaced m anual tra nsmitters for

possible reprogramming. The manual

transmitters can also continue to be used.

If, after repeated a ttempts at execution of

the above steps, a system cannot b e

actuated with the universal remote control,

seek the assistance of a workshop.

During programming, the vehicle should be

within the range of the receiver. Under no

circumstances should the vehicle be in the

movement zone of a system (e.g. garage

door).

Do not programme a system without an

automatic safety stop (manufactured

before April 1982).

Take note of the system manufacturer’s

safety instructions for drives and manual

remote control units.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting exterior mirrors 3

Adjustment using the four-way switch in

the driver’s door: If the outer mirror switch

(1 ) is pressed, the four-way switch operates

the driver’s and front passenger’s

mirrors 3. If the inner mirror switch (2) is

pressed, it only operate s the front

passenger’s mirror.

The glass of the mirror is adjusted in the

relevant direction in accordance with the

operation of the four-way switch.

Electrical seat adjustment with

Memory function 3:

If the inner mirror switch (2) is pressed, the

front passenger-side exterior mirror is

pointed automatically at the rear tyres

after reverse gear is engaged, in order to

assist parking (not if tow ing a caravan/

trailer) 3.

Swinging i n exterior mi rror

Manually: The exterior mirrors can be

folded in by gently pressing the oute r edge

of the housing.

Electrically 3 (both mirror switches must

not be latched into position):

Push four-way switch to the right:

outside rear view mirrors swivel in.

Push four-way switch to the left:

outside rear view mirrors swivel out.

Return the mirrors to the driving position

before starting-off.

The mirrors can be retracted from the

outside: Press button p on the remote

control approx. 1 second. The mirrors will

be extended the next time the vehicle is

unlocked.

Swivelling only a llowed at speeds of up to

4 mph (7 km/h).

44 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

For the safety of pedestrians, the exterior

mirrors will swing out of their normal

mounting position if they are bumped with

sufficient force. Reposition the mirror by

applying slight pressure to the mirror

housing.

Aspherical exterior mirror 3

The aspherical m irror g lass m akes the blind

angle smaller. The curva ture mak es objects

look smaller, making it more difficult to

estimate how far away following vehicles

are.

Automatic anti-dazzle ext eri or mirror 3

on the d river’s side

Dazzle from following vehicles at night is

automatically reduced.

The mirror does not reduce dazzle when:

z the ignition is switched off,

z reverse gear is engaged or selector lever

set to R,

z the interior lights are on,

z a door is open.

Interior mirror

To adjust, swivel mirror housing.

Swivel lever on underside of mirror housing

to reduce dazzle from following vehicles at

night.

45Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Autom atic a nti-dazzle interior mir ror 3

Dazzle from following vehicles at night is

automatically reduced.

The sensor is located at the bottom of

the housing. In the case of vehicles with

a p osition memory for electrically opera te d

front se ats 3 or a universal remote

control 3, the sensor is located at the

top right of the mirror glass.

The m irro r d oe s n ot re du ce dazzle when :

z the ignition is switched off,

z reverse gear is engaged or selector lever

set to R,

z the interior lights are on,

z a door is open.

Electric win dows 3

The electric windows can be used:

z with ignition on,

z within 10 minutes of switching ignition

off,

z within 10 minutes of opening or closing

the driver’s door,

z within 10 minutes of inserting or

removing the ignition key.

Readiness for operation stops when the

vehicle is locked.

Operation via 2 rocker buttons in the

driver’s door. Additional rocker buttons in

the front passenger’s door and the rear

doors 3.

To operate window in stages, tap switch.

For automatic opening or closing, keep

switch pressed for slightly longer; to stop

window movement, tap switch again.

9 Warning

Take care when ope rating the e lectric

windows. Risk of injury, especially for

children. Vehicle occupants should be

informed accordingly.

If there are children on the rear seat,

switch on the child safety system 3 for

the elec tric wind ow s.

Keep a close watch on the windows when

closing them. Ensure that nothing

becomes trapped in them as they move.

46 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Vehicles with rea r ele ctric wind ow s 3 have

a slide switch between the buttons in the

driver’s door

z Up:

The front windows can be operated

using the buttons.

z Down :

The rear windows can be operated using

the buttons.

Safety function

If the window glass encounters resistance

above the middle of the window during

automatic closing, it is immediately

stopped and the window opened again.

If the windows do not move easily (e.g. on

account of frost), keep pressing the switch

for the window in question until the window

has been closed in stages.

Child safety system for rear windows 3

Switch z in the driver’s door

z Press (switch z illuminates in red): rear

windows cannot be operated using the

buttons in the rear doors,

z press again (switch z no longer

illuminates in red): rear w indows ca n be

operated using the buttons in the rear

doors.

Closing windows from outside using the

remote control 3

The wind ow s c an be clos e d fro m o utside

using the remote control:

Depress the p button until the window s

are closed.

47Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Autom atic c losing 3

See page 33.

Overload

If the windows are rep eatedly operated at

short intervals, the power supply is briefly

cut off.

The system is protected by fuses in the

fusebox – see page 246.

Fault

If the windows cannot be opened and

closed automatically, activate the window

electronics as follows:

1. Close doors.

2. Switch on ignition.

3. Window completely open.

4. Close window and press on button for at

le ast 3 seconds.

5. Repeat for eac h wind ow .

Windows in rear doors

Turn crank 3 towards the front or rear.

Su nroof 3

The ele ctric sunroof can be operated

z with ignition on,

z within 10 minutes of switching ignition

off,

z within 10 minutes of opening or closing

the driver’s door,

z within 10 minutes of inserting or

removing the ignition key.

Readiness for operation stops when the

vehicle is locked.

9 Wa rnin g

Caution when operating the sunroof. Risk

of injury, particularly to children. Vehicle

pas seng ers must be informed

accordingly.

Keep a close watch on the sliding roof

when closing it. Ensure that nothing

becomes trapped as it moves.

48 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Operated using rotary switch in the

overhead control panel.

To open

Turn the rotary switch to any position

between d and ü. The sunroof will

automatically move to the desired position.

When the switch is in position ü , the

sunroof is fully opened.

Com fort position

Set rotary switch to position f. With the

roof in this position, wind noise is reduced.

To close:

Turn rotary switch to d.

To rais e

Turn the rotary switch to any position

between d and e. The sunroof will

automatically move to the desired position.

When the rotary switch is in position e, the

sunroof is fully raised.

To lo we r

Turn rotary switch to d.

Position memory

After the ignition has been switched on, the

sunroof can be automatically returned to

its last position by briefly pressing the

ro tary sw itc h.

Safety function

If the sunroof encounters resistance during

automatic closing, it is immedia tely

stopped and opened again, as long as the

vehicle is stationary.

If the sunroof movement is stiff, e.g. due to

frost, turn rotary switch to d and keep it

pressed until the sunroof is closed.

Closing sunr oof from outside

To close the sunroof from outside with the

remote control: Press button p until the

sunroof is closed.

If the electric windows 3 are to be closed

from outside the vehicle, but the sunroof is

to be left open, briefly press the rotary

switch before switching off the ignition.

Autom atic closing 3

See page 33.

9 Warning

If when the vehicle is being driven the

sunroof encounters resistance during

automatic closing, because of the higher

closing forces involved the protective

function cannot be guaranteed, and

there is a risk of injury.

49Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Sunshade

To reduce the sunlight in the interior with

the sliding roof closed or raised.

Open or close sunshade as required.

When the sunroof is opened, the sunshade

is also op ened.

Overload

If the system is overloaded, the power

supply is automatically cut off for a short

time.

Fault

If the sunroof no longer assumes the

desired position automatically,

programme sunroof electronics as follows:

1. Switch on ignition.

2. Press the rotary switch until the sunroof is

shut, then keep it pressed for at least a

further 3 seconds.

3. Turn rotary switch to ü and keep it

depressed until the sunroof is open.

4. Turn rotary switch to d and keep it

depressed until the sunroof is closed.

5. Turn rotary switch to e and leave there

until the sunroof is fully raised.

6. Turn rotary switch to d and keep it

depressed until the sunroof is closed.

Electrically operated

rea r window bl ind 3

Reduces intensity of sunlight shining on to

rear seats. Operation with ignition

switched on.

To raise = Press N

To lower = Press N again

Do not ope rate blind if there are objects

lying in front of the rear w indow.

Su nblinds for rea r door windows 3

To reduce sunlight at the rear seats.

Pull the blind upwards using the grip and

engage it at the top in the door frame.

50 Seats, interior

Seats, interior

Manually adjustable front seats

Adjust seat longi tudinally

To adjust seat position, pull handle at front

of seat, move seat and then release

ha ndle .

Adjusting the backrest

To adjust, turn side handwheel on the seat

while releasing the load on the backrest.

Move backrest to suit seating position.

Manually a djustable front sea ts .. ...... 50

Electrically adjustable front seats 3 .. 52

Head restraints .................................... 55

Armrest 3 between the front seats.... 57

Rear seat armrest .... ......... ................... 57

Travel Assistant 3 ............ ................... 58

Luggage compartment extension ..... 65

Luggage compartment cover 3......... 66

Safety net 3, Esta te............................ . 67

Lashing eyes ........ ......... ....................... 69

Reversible carpet 3 ...... ....................... 69

FlexO rganizer 3............................. ...... 69

Notes on loading the vehic le .............. 71

Three-stage safety system.... ........ ...... 72

Three-point seat belts ...... ................... 72

Belt tensioners.......... ......... ................... 73

Using the seat belts. ......... ................... 76

Child restraint systems 3 . ................... 77

Airbag system...... ......... ....................... 80

Cigarette lighter 3 ........ ....................... 93

Accessory sockets 3 ..... ....................... 93

Ashtray ....................................... .......... 94

Stowage comp artments... ......... .......... 95

Drink holders .............................. ......... . 97

Sunvisors.. ........ ..................................... 97

9 Warning

Never adjust seats during driving, as they

can move uncontrollably.

Important: Do not sit nearer than

10 inches (25 cm) from the steering

wheel, to perm it safe airbag deployment.

51Seats, interior

Adjusting the seat height 3

To adjust height of seat, operate rear lever

on outboard side of seat.

Pump action of lever

To adjust seat incline 3

Pump action of lever

Ad just ing the lumb ar support 3

To adjust, activate the lever on the

backrest, relieving pressure on the backrest

as you do so.

Adjust lumbar support to suit personal

requirements.

Upwards: Seat higher

Downwards: Seat lower

Upwards: Seat steeper

Downwards: Seat flatter

52 Seats, interior

To adjust thigh support 3 on the sports

seats 3

To adjust, press button in recessed grip

located in the centre benea th the adjusting

cushion and m ove the thigh support.

Adjust thigh support to suit personal

requirements.

Seat positi on

Ad just driver’s seat such that with the

driver sitting upright the steering wheel is

held in the area of its upper spokes with the

driver’s arms slightly bent.

Push front passenger’s seat as far back as

possible.

The seat backrests must not be tilted too

fa r back (recommended m aximum tilting

angle approx. 25°).

Electrically adjustable front

seats 3

Adjustment

The seat position can be adjusted by

means of switches on the outboard side of

the seats.

Adjusting the inclination

Move switch 1 upwards/downwards at

front.

9 Warning

Failure to observe the descriptions could

lead to injuries which could be fata l.

Vehicle passeng ers must be informed

accordingly before starting-off.

9 Wa rnin g

Care must be taken when operating the

electric ally adjustable seats. There is a

risk of injury, partic ularly for children, and

a danger that articles could become

tra pped.

Keep a close watch on the seats when

adjusting them.

Vehic le pa ssengers m ust be inform ed

accordingly.

53Seats, interior

Adjusting the longitudinal position

Move switch 1 forwards/backwards.

Height adjustment

Move switch 1 upwards/downwards at rear

Seat backrest adjustm ent

Turn switch 2 forwards/backwards.

Operate switch until desired seat position is

rea ched. Seat position – see page 52.

After adjusting the seat, adjust height of

seat b elt – see page 76.

Electrically operated lumbar support 3 on

driver’s seat

Adjust lumbar support using four-way

switch on outboard side of driver’s seat.

Adjust lumbar support to suit personal

re qui reme nts.

Moving support up and down: press button

up or do wn .

Increasing and decreasing support: press

button forwards or backwards.

Thi gh sup po rt 3 on driver’s seat

See page 52.

Seat position

Adjust driver’s seat such that with the

driver sitting upright the steering wheel is

held in the area of its upper spokes with the

driver’s arms slig htly bent.

Push front passenger’s seat as far back as

possible.

The seat backrests must not be tilted too

far back (recommended maximum tilting

angle approx. 25°).

9 Wa rnin g

Failure to observe the descriptions could

lead to injuries which could be fatal.

Vehic le pa ssengers m ust be inform ed

accordingly before starting-off.

54 Seats, interior

Memory function 3 for el ect ricall y

adjustable driver’s seat and exterior

mirrors

Three different seat a nd mirror settings can

be stored (e.g. for three drivers).

Readiness for operation

z With ignition on,

z within 10 minutes of switching ignition

off,

z within 10 minutes of opening or closing

the driver’s door,

z within 10 minutes of inserting or

removing the ignition key.

Readiness for operation stops when the

vehicle is locked.

Storing settings

1. Adjust se at.

2. To adjust exterior mirror - see pages 6,

43.

3. Press memory button M and the position

button to be used (1, 2 or 3)

simulta neously, and stora ge is

acknowledged by an acoustic signal.

Retrieving settings

Keep position key 1, 2 or 3 pressed until the

stored s ea t and mirror positions have b een

re ach ed .

For reasons of safety, seat adjustment

stops immediately if the position button is

released or one of the setting buttons is

op erated.

Adjustments may only be performed with

vehicle stationary.

Store and activate the settings using the

remote controls 3

When the vehicle is loc ked using the remote

control the current driver’s seat and

exterior mirror positions are stored -

see page 28.

The seat adjusting procedure can be

stopped immediately by operating a

setting button.

Front passenger-side exterior m irror with

m irror par king assistanc e 3

See page 43.

Overload

If the seat setting is electrically overloaded,

the power supply is automatically cut off

for a short time.

The sy stem is protected by fuses in the

fusebox – see page 246.

55Seats, interior

Head restraints

Adjusting the front seat head restraints

and the outboard rear seat head

restraints 3

To adjust height, press button on side and

adjust height.

In order to increase the size of the luggage

compartment or if they are not being used,

push rear head restraints down as far as

possible - see page 65.

When the seats a re occupied, ad just the

height according to the body size of the

occupant.

To adjust the incline, swivel the bottom

edge of the head restraint forwards or

backwards.

Ad justing the rear head restraint s

integra ted in the rear seat ba ckrest 3

To adjust head restraints, pull forwards

with both hands and slide up or down.

To increase the size of the luggage

compartm ent or improve visibility, push

head restraint down as far as possible if

seat is unoccupied.

If seat is occupied, pull head restraint

upwards.

56 Seats, interior

Head restraint position

The middle of the head restraint should be

at eye level. If this is not possible for

extremely tall persons, set to highest

position, and set to lowest position for

small persons.

Active head restra ints 3

In the event of a rear-impact, the active

head restraints tilt slightly forwards. The

head is more effectively supported by the

head restraint and the danger of whiplash

in the neck area is reduced.

Active head restraints are identified by the

lettering ACTIVE o n th e h ead re s tra int

guid e sleeves.

Removing the head restraints

Press and release the two catches. Pull and

remove the head restraint.

In order to increase the size of the luggage

compartm ent or if they are not being used,

push rear head restraints down as far as

possible - see page 65.

Not e

Only approved objects or com ponents

should be attached to the head restraint of

the unoccupied front passenger’s seat.

9 Wa rning

Disreg arding the instructions can lea d to

injuries which could be fatal. Vehicle

pass enge rs must b e informed

accordingly before setting off.

57Seats, interior

Armrest 3 between the front seats

The armrest can be pushed forwards. If the

armrest is not required, push it back and

fold it up.

The armrest contains a stowage

compartment: to open, slide a rm rest b ack,

press button at front and lift.

Rear seat armrest

The armrest can be folded down.

If the rear centre seat is being used or the

rear seat backrests are b eing folded down,

fold armrest upwards.

58 Seats, interior

Travel Assistant 3

The Travel Assistant contains

z Arm re st

z Stowage compartments

z Waste containe r

z Drink holders

z Acc es sory socke ts.

z Connection console

e.g. for DVD player 3

z Elec tric cool box

z Foldaway tables

z Tw in Audio (rear audio module) 3 or

stowage compartment.

The Travel Assistant is installed on a

console above the centre seat in the rear.

Installing the Travel Assistant

Swivel out retaining device on seat with

strap.

Insert the two rear retainers of the

conne cting co nsole in the retain in g de vice

on the seat and engage.

Swivel open and hold cover of front

attachment points in floor in front of

console.

59Seats, interior

Swivel connecting console downwards and

engage in attachment points.

Swivel the locking lever downwards.

Check the locking position of the Travel

Assistant: The red mark (see Fig. 17566 J

on next pa ge) must not be visible.

Otherwise, lock using the key – see page

63, Fig. 17575 J.

Remove cap 3 from p lug at securing

bracket.

To lock, insert Travel Assistant into rec esses

in connecting console and slide back as far

as possible.

60 Seats, interior

If it is correctly locked, the red mark must

no longer be visible in the window,

otherwise the procedure must be repeated.

Drink holder and accessory sockets

Open the drink holder by pressing the

marking.

Only accessories with maximum power

consumption of 120 Watts must be

connected to the accessory sockets. For

notes – see page 93.

Stowage com partm ents

The lo wer sto wage co mp artment is ope ned

by pressing the ma rk . The und ersid e of the

compartment has an opening through

which objects in the compartment can be

raised.

The upper stowage compartment is

located under the armrest. To open, press

the button and fold the armrest upwards.

9 Wa rning

If it is not correctly locked, the Travel

Assistant could be propelled forwards

with considerab le force when hard

braking occurs, risk of injury.

61Seats, interior

Connecting console for DVD player 3

When not in use, pull connecting console

upwards, press button and slide

downwards.

Swivel up the display holder, slide DVD

player display into bracket from below and

fix in position with bracket.

Maximum load: 1 kg.

Electric cool box

To open, fold open the armrest together

with the stowage compartm ent.

62 Seats, interior

Switch on the cool box as needed.

Foldaway tab les

Fold arm res t upwards (1).

Use recessed grip to p ull foldaway table

upwards as far as it will go (1), swivel

foldaw ay table forwards (2) and fold

downwards (3).

Set required clearance by adjusting

longitudinal position of foldaway table (4).

S wivel a rm rest down.

63Seats, interior

To fold away the tab le, swivel the armrest

up.

Push the table forwards as far as it will

go (1).

Fold the table upwards past the resistance

point (2), swivel it downwards and insert in

the Travel Assistant (3).

Swivel armrest down.

Dismantling the Travel Assistant

Open catch using key, red mark appears in

window.

64 Seats, interior

Pull the Travel Assistant to the front on the

connecting console and remove.

Fit cap 3 to plug on securing bracket.

Press the locking lever down, press the

button on the front of the connecting

console and swivel the locking lever

up wards.

Swivel the connecting console upwards

and pull it from the retaining device on the

seat.

Swivel the retaining device back on the

seat.

65Seats, interior

Luggage compartment extension

Fold dow n the cover behind the arm rest

Fold down the arm rest on to the seat

cushion, pull the handle and tilt the cover

forwards.

The outer seats can continue to be used for

passengers.

Engage the cover behind the centre

armrest audibly in position.

Cover behind armrest can be locked from

luggage compartment 3: turn hand le 90°:

Folding down the rear seat ba ckrests

Push the rear head restraints right down.

Place the belt buckles in storage pockets in

the seat cushions.

Slide front seat forwards slightly.

Remove Travel Assistant 3 - see page 60.

Unlock one or both rear seat backrests by

depressing pushbuttons and fold down on

to seat cushion.

Return front seat to desired position.

9 Wa rning

The load must not obstruct operation of

the pedals, handbrake and gearshift, or

the freedom of movement of the driver.

Do not leave unsecured objects in the

interior. Note instruction on page 71.

Locked = Handle horizontal

Unlocked = Handle vertical

66 Seats, interior

Restoring ba ckrest to an up right position

Audibly engage the rear seat ba ckrests.

There is a locking indicator on the release

lever. If the rear seat backrests have been

correctly locked the red indicator on the

release levers must not be visible.

Fold ing down t he front passenger’s

se at 3

Push head restraint on front passenger’s

seat down as far as it will g o.

Slide front passenger’s seat backwards.

Fold front passenger’s seat forwards by

raising release lever.

To restore, raise the release lever, restore

the front seat backrest to an upright

position and audibly engage.

Notes on loading

See page 71.

Luggage com partment cover 3

5-door Hatch

Removing

Detach retaining straps from tailgate.

Pull cover from the side guides.

Fitting

Engage cover in side guides and fold down.

Attach retaining straps to tailgate.

67Seats, interior

Estate

To close

Pull luggage compartment cover toward s

rear of vehicle using handle and hook into

side retainers.

Do not place any heavy or sharp-edged

objects on the cover.

To open

Remove luggage compartment cover from

side brackets. It rolls up automatically.

Removing

Open luggage compartment cover.

Raise the release lever on the right of the

luggage compartment cover. Remove

cover from the brackets by lifting first on

the right, then on the left.

Fitting

Fit the luggage compartment cover in the

bracket on the left-hand side, fold up the

release lever on the right-hand side, fit the

luggage compartment cover in the bracket

on the right-hand side, engage and press

the release lever closed.

Safety n et 3, Estate

The safety net can be fitted behind the rear

seats or, with the rear seat backrests folded

down, behind the front seats.

Passengers must not be carried behind the

safety net.

Fitti ng behind the rear seats

Remove the luggage compartment cover -

see left column.

Fit the cassette with rolled safety net into

the side brackets and engage b y twisting.

68 Seats, interior

Extend the net from the cassette. The roof

frame houses two installation op enings. Fit

the net rod in the installation opening on

one side and then the other and engage by

pushing forwards.

Fit the luggage compa rtment cover.

Removing

Remove the lug gage compartment cover.

Detach the safety net rod from the

brackets in the roof frame.

Slide both latches inwards; push the

cassette with rolled net backwards in the

bracke t, t wi s t an d rem ov e u pw ards.

Fitting behind front seats

Fold b oth rear seat backrests. Place the

rolled net on the floor behind the front

seats in such a way that the cog rail in the

slit on the net is to the rear.

Pull each side hook from the cassette and

attach it to an eye 3 in the vehicle floor.

Extend the net from the cassette. The roof

frame houses tw o installation openings. Fit

the net rod in the installation opening on

one sid e and then the other and engag e by

pushing forwards.

Removing

Detach the safety net rod from the

brackets in the roof frame.

Undo the side hooks from the e yes 3 in the

vehicle floor.

69Seats, interior

Lashing eyes

In the luggage compartment, secure items

being transported against slipping b y

attaching lashing straps 3 or a luggage

net 3.

Reversible carpet 3

Folding floor covering with two different

surfaces. When transporting objects in the

luggage compartment, fold reversible

carpet with appropriate surface on top.

FlexOrganizer 3

Flexible system for dividing the luggage

compartment or securing loads in an

Estate.

The components are housed in a stowage

compartment at the rear in the load floor -

see p age 96.

The system consists of:

z Variable partition net,

z Variable partition wa ll,

z Partition rod,

z Mesh pockets for the side walls,

z Hooks.

The components can be mounted in the

two guide ra ils in the side walls of the

luggage compartment.

The illustrations show some possible uses.

Varia ble part ition wa ll

See Fig. 17596 J. Press the rods of the

partition w all together slightly and engage

in the desired guide rail openings in the

side walls. The rods can be engaged in

various positions.

Varia ble part ition net

See Fig. 17597 J. Push rods of partition net

together a little and insert into relevant

openings in side wall guide rails. The rods

can be engaged in various positions. The

partition net can be installed horizontally

or vertically at different heights.

70 Seats, interior

Hooks and mesh pockets for the side walls

See Fig. 17598 J. Engage the hooks in the

openings of the guide rails in the side walls

as indicated in the illustration and turn 90°.

The mesh pockets can be hung from the

hooks.

Removing

Press together the rods of the partition

wall/net or the telescopic rods and remove

from the guide rails. Turn the hooks 90°

and rem ove.

FlexOrganizer stowage

The FlexOrganizer components are housed

in a stowage compartment at the rear in

the load floor. To open, raise the handle

and open the flap – see p age 96,

Fig. 17611 J.

To stow away, pull partition rods, partition

net rods and sepa rate telescopic rod apart

in the middle and fold the tw o ha lves

together - see Fig. 17599 J. Roll up partition

and partition net and place in

compartm ent with other components.

Close lid.

71Seats, interior

Notes on loading the vehicle

z Heavy objects in the luggage

compartment should be placed against

the engaged rear seat backrests or, if the

rear seat backrests are folded down,

against the front seat backrests. If

objects are to be stacked, the heavier

objects should be placed at the bottom.

Unsecured objects in the luggage

compartment would be thrown forwards

with great force in the event of heavy

braking, for example.

z Secure objects with lashing straps 3

atta ched to lashing eyes – see p age 69.

If heavy loads slip when the vehicle is

braked heavily or driven around a bend,

the handling of the vehicle may change.

z Saloon / Hatch: loose objects in the

luggage compartment should be

secured against slipping using a

luggage net 3 – see page 69.

z Estate: mount the safety net 3 when

transporting objects in the luggage

compartment - see page 67.

z Estate: Close luggage compartment

cover - see page 67.

z When transporting objects in the

luggage compartment the rear seats

must be engaged - see page 65.

z Do not allow the load to protrude above

the upper edge of the rear seat

backrests, or above the upper edge of

the front seat backrests if the rear seat

backrests are folded down.

z The warning triangle 3 and first-aid kit 3

must always b e freely a ccessib le.

z Do not place any objects in front of the

rear window or on the instrument panel.

They are reflecte d in the glass, obstruct

the driver’s view and will be thrown

th rough the ve hicle , for insta nce in th e

event of heavy braking.

z Obje cts m ust not be store d in the a irb ag

inflation area, because they could cause

injury if the airbag inflates.

z The load must not obstruct the operation

of the pedals, the handbrake or the

gears or restrict the driver’s free dom of

movement. Do not place loose objects in

the interior.

z Do not drive with luggage compartment

open when transporting bulky objects,

for example, since toxic exhaust fumes

could penetrate the interior.

z Weights, payload and roof load -

see page 293.

z Driving with a roof load -

see pages 184, 187, 218. A roof load

increases the sensitivity of the vehicle

to crosswinds and has a detrim ental

effect on vehicle ha nd ling ow ing to the

vehicle’s higher centre of gravity.

9 Wa rnin g

Failure to observe these descriptions can

lead to injuries which may be fatal.

Vehic le pa ssengers m ust be inform ed

accordingly.

72 Seats, interior

Three-stage safety system

Com prising:

z Three-point seat belts.

z Belt tensioners at the front seats.

z Airbag sy ste ms for driver, front

passenger and outboard rear seat

occ upa nts 3 .

The three stages are activated in sequence

depending on the severity of the accident:

z The automatic seat belt locking devices

prevent the belt strap from being pulled

out and thus ensure that the vehicle

occupants are retained in their seats.

z The front seat belts are pulled down at

the belt buckles. This means the belts fit

snugly, the occupants are decelerated

early with the vehicle and the body

loading is reduced.

z The airbag systems are also triggered in

the event of serious accidents and form a

safety cushion for the occupants.

Depending on the severity of the

accident, the front airbags inflate in two

stage s.

Please read the instructions provided with

the child restraint system.

Three-point seat belts

The vehicle is equipped with three-point

seat belts with automatic retractors and

locking devices, allowing full freedom of

body movement a lthough the spring

tensioned seat belts always ensure a snug

fit.

For information on correct seating

position – see pages 52, 77, 82.

The seat belts lock during heavy

acceleration or deceleration.

9 Warning

The airbag systems serve to supplement

the three-point seat b elts and belt

te ns ioners. Th e s eat b elts mu st th e re fore

alway s be w orn. Disreg ard of these

instructions may lead to injuries or

end ang er life. Vehicle p assenge rs must

be informed a ccord ingly.

73Seats, interior

In the event of an accident, persons not

wearing seat belts endanger their fellow

occupants and themselves.

Control indicator X for the seat belt –

see page 101.

Seat b elts are only intended for one person.

They are not suitable for anyone under

12 years of age or under 150 cm tall.

For children up to 12 years of ag e, w e

recommend the Vauxhall child restraint

system – see page 77.

Belt force limi ter s

on the front seat belts reduce stresses on

the body by releasing the seat belt gently

during an impact. This allows the body to

move slightly in a nticipation of the impact.

Testing the seat belts

Check all parts of the belt system from time

to time for damage and to ensure function.

Replace damaged parts. Following an

accident, have the seat belts and actuated

belt tensioners replaced by a workshop.

Do not make alterations to the seat belts,

their anchorages, their automatic

retractors and the belt buckles.

Do not damage the seat belt with sharp

objects, and do not get it trapped.

Belt tensioners

The front seat belt systems are fitted with

belt tensioners. The seat belts are pulled

down and tensioned at the belt buckles in

the event of frontal and rear collisions,

depending on the severity of the accident.

This tensions the seat belts.

9 Wa rning

Alwa ys wear your seat belt, and that

means also in urban traffic a nd when you

are a rear seat passenger. It can save

your life.

Also, pregnant women must always wear

a seat belt – see page 76.

74 Seats, interior

Actua tion of belt t ensioners

Actuation of belt tensioners is indicated by

continuous illumination of control

indicator v - see next column.

If the belt tensioners are triggered, they

must be replaced by a workshop.

Important information - see page 73.

Control indicator v for belt tensioners

The opera tion of the belt tensioners is

electronically monitored together with

the airbag sy ste ms and indicated on

the instrument cluster by the control

indicator v. When the ignition is switched

on, the control indicator illuminates for

approx. 4 seconds. If it does not illuminate,

does not go off after 4 seconds or

illuminates whilst driving, there is a fault in

the belt tensioner system or the airbag

systems - see page 86. The belt tensioner

or the airbag systems may not activate if

an accident occurs.

Deployment of the belt tensioners is

indicated by continuous illumination of v.

The system’s integrated self-diagnostics

allows faults to b e quickly remedied.

If c ontrol indicator v in the instrument

cluster fails, for reasons of safety, the text

AIrbAG appears on the odometer display.

Pressing the reset button will cause the text

to disappear. It then reappears on the

odometer display 10 seconds later.

9 Wa rnin g

Have the cause of the fault eliminated

immediately by a workshop.

75Seats, interior

Im portant

z Do not fit accessories not specifically

released for your vehicle type or store

objects in the belt tensioner operating

area (in the area of the be lt b uc kles) d ue

to the risk of injury in the event the belt

tensioners are triggered.

z Do not make any modifications to the

components of the belt tensioners, as

this will render the vehicle unroadworthy.

z The belt tensioner and airbag system

control electronics can be found in the

centre console area. In order to avoid

malfunctions, do not store magnetic

objects in this area.

z When using the rea r seats, make sure

that the components of the front seat

belts are not damaged by shoes or other

objects. Do not allow dirt to enter the

automatic seat belt retractor.

z We recommend that you have the front

se ats remove d by a w orkshop in the

event of actuation of the belt tensioners.

z The belt tensioners trigger once only,

indicated by the lighting of the control

indicator v. Have a workshop replace

trig gered belt tensioners.

z When disposing of the vehicle, the sa fety

instructions given for this must be

observed . Ta ke the vehicle to a recycling

company for disposal.

9 Wa rning

Incorrect handling (e.g. removal or fitting

of seat belts or belt buckles) can trigger

the belt tensioners with risk of injury.

76 Seats, interior

Using the seat belts

Fitting seat bel ts

Pull the seat belt out of the retractor and

place it across the body, making sure it is

not twisted.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle. The

front seat backrest must not be tilted back

too far or the se at belt will not op erate

properly. The recommended angle of

inclination is 25°. Mak e sure that the lap

belt is not twisted and that it fits snugly

across the body. Tension the belt

frequently whilst d riving by tugging the

diagonal part of the belt.

Bulky clothing will impede the snug fit of

the seat belt. The seat belt must not be

placed over hard or break able ob jects in

the pockets of your clothing (e.g. pens,

keys, spectacles) as this may cause injury.

Do not place any objects, such as

handbags or mobile telephones, between

the seat belt and your body.

Height adjustment

Height adjustment of upper anchorage

point for front seat belts:

1. Pull out the seat belt slightly.

2. Front seat belts: Push the button down or

push the belt guide up.

Rear seat belts: Press the belt guide and

push up or d ow n.

3. Set desired height.

4. Allow belt guide to audibly engage.

Do not adjust height whilst driving.

9 Warning

O n pre gna nt wo me n in particular, the lap

belt must be positioned as low as

possible across the pelvis so as not to put

too much pressure on the abdomen.

77Seats, interior

Adjust height such that the seat belt passes

over the wearer’s shoulder and rests

against the shoulder. It must not pass over

the neck or upper arm.

Removing the belt

To remove the seat belt , press the red

button on the catch; the seat belt retracts

by itself.

Child restraint systems 3

When using a child restraint system, follow

the instructions for installation and use.

The country in w hich y ou are trav elling

may not permit the use of child restraint

systems on certain seats. Always comply

with the local or national regulations.

Selecti ng the right syst em

Your child should travel facing backwards

in the vehicle for as long as p ossible. A child

has a very weak cervical spinal column and

in the event of an accident is less likely to

suffer injury in a rear-facing, semi-lying

position than if sea ted upright.

9 Wa rnin g

Never carry child restraint systems on

your lap, risk of fatal injury.

78 Seats, interior

Permissible options for fitting a child restraint

For reasons of safety, we recommend that the child restraint be installed on

one of th e o utboard rear seats.

Weight and

age cl ass

We recommend the use of each system until the child reaches the upper weight limit.

On front passenger’s

se at

On outboard rear

seats

On centre rear sea t

Group 0:

up to 10 kg

or approx.

10 months

Group 0+:

up to 13 kg

or approx.

2years

, + U, + U

Group I:

9 to 18 kg

or approx.

8 months to

4years

, + U, + U

Group II:

15 to 25 kg

or approx.

3to7years

Group III:

22 to 36 kg

or approx.

6to12 years

X U U

= Limited, only with seat occupancy

recognition and Vauxhall child

restraint system with transponders.

If the child restraint system is being

secured using a three-point seat

belt, move seat height adjustment 3

to uppermost position. Move front

passenger’s seat as far back as

possible and move front passenger’s

seat b elt anchorage point to lowest

position.

= Limited, only with seat occupancy

recognition and Vauxhall child

restraint system with transponders.

If the child restraint system is being

secured using a three-point seat

belt, move seat height adjustment 3

to uppermost position. Move front

passenger’s seat as far back as

possible so that vehicle safety belt

runs from anchorage point towards

the front.

79Seats, interior

Note

z Children under 12 years or under 150 cm

tall should only travel in an appropriate

child restraint.

z When transporting children, use the child

restraint systems suitable for the child’s

weight.

z Ensure that the child restraint system has

been correctly fitted - see instructions

provided with child restraint system.

z The covers of the Vauxhall child restraint

system can be wiped clean.

z Do not stick anything on the child

res traint sy ste ms a nd do not cove r the m

with any other materials.

z Only allow the child to enter and exit on

the side of the vehicle facing away from

the road.

z A child restraint system which has been

subjected to stress in an accident must

be replaced.

z Secure or remove child restraint systems

carried in the vehicle when not in use.

Mounting brackets 3 for IS OF IX child

restraint systems

The brackets located between the backrest

and seat cushion are used for mounting

ISOFIX child restraint systems.

Please follow the instructions

accompanying the ISOFIX child restraint

system.

O nly ISO FIX child restraint sy stems

approved for the vehicle may be used.

U = Can be used universally in

combination with a three-point

se at be lt.

+ = Vehicle sea t available with ISOFIX

fixings. When using ISOFIX, only

ISOFIX child restraint systems

approved for the vehicle may be

used.

X = No child restraint system permitted

in this weight class.

80 Seats, interior

Airbag system

The airbag system consists of several

separate systems.

Front airbag system

The front airbag system will be triggered in

the event of a serious ac cident involving a

frontal impact and forms safety cushions

for the driver and front passenger. The

forward movement of the driver and front

passenger is checked and the risk of

injuries to the upper body and head are

thereby substantially reduced.

Side airbag system 3

The side airbag is triggered in the event of

a side-on collision to form a safety cushion

for the driver or front passenger in the

respective door area. This substantially

reduces the risk of injury to the upper body

and pelvis.

Curtain ai rbag system 3

The curtain airbag system triggers in the

event of a side-on collision and provides a

safety barrier in the head area on the

re spe ctive side of the v ehicle. This red uce s

the risk of injury to the head considerably in

the event of a side-on collision.

81Seats, interior

Airbag system

Front airbag

The front airbag system is identified by the

word AIRBAG on the stee ring whee l and

above the glove c om partment.

The front airbag system comprises:

z an airbag with inflator in the steering

wheel and a second one behind the trim

panel above the glove compartment,

z control electronics with im pact sensors,

z control indicator for airbag systems v in

instrument cluster,

z seat occupancy recognition 3,

z the control indicator for Vauxhall child

restraint systems y with tra nsponders 3

in th e od om eter displa y.

The front airbag system will be triggered:

z depending on the severity of the

accident,

z depending on the type of impact,

z within the range shown in the illustration,

z independent of side airbag and curtain

airbag system 3.

Exception:

Front passenger’s seat with seat

occupancy recognition system 3. The seat

occupancy recognition system deactivates

the front and side airbags 3 on th e fron t

passenger’s side if the front passenger’s

seat is unoccupied or a Vauxhall child

restraint system with transponders 3 has

been fitted to the front passenger’s seat.

Seat occupancy recognition - see page 87.

Vauxhall child restraint system with

transponders 3 - see page 78.

Examples of events triggering the front

airbag system:

z Impact against a non-yielding obstacle:

the front airbags are triggered at low

vehicle speed.

z Impact against a yielding obstacle:

(such as another vehicle): the front

airbags are only triggered at a hig her

vehicle speed.

82 Seats, interior

When triggered, the front airbags inflate in

milliseconds to form a safety cushion for

the driv er and front passenger. The

forward movement of the front seat

occupants is checked, thereby

substantially reducing the risk of injury to

the upp er body and hea d.

No im pairment of view will occur, because

the airbags inflate and deflate so quickly.

The front airbag system will not be

triggered in the event of:

z the ignition being switched off,

z minor frontal collisions,

z accidents in which the vehicle overturns,

z collisions involving a side or rear-impact,

tha t is to say, if it w ould not b e of b enefit

to the occupants.

9 Warning

The front airbag system provides

optimum protection when the seat,

backrest and head restraint are correctly

adjusted: Adjust the driver’s seat

according to the occupant’s height such

that with the driver sitting upright the

steering wheel is held in the area of its

upper sp okes with the d riv er’s arms

slightly bent. The front pas se ng er’s seat

should be as far b ack as possible, with

the backrest upright – see pages 3, 52.

Do not place the head, body, hands or

feet on the c ov ers of the airbag systems.

Do not place any objects in the area in

which the airbags inflate. Im portant

information - see page 89.

9 Wa rnin g

The three-point seat belt must be

correctly fitted – see page 76.

83Seats, interior

In addition, the front airbag system w ill

not be triggered for the front passenger’s

seat in model variants with seat occupancy

recognition 3 if:

z the front passenger’s seat is unoccupied,

z there is a prop erly fitted Vauxhall child

restraint system with transponders 3 .

Seat occupancy recognition – see

page 87. Vauxhall child restraint system

with tran s ponders 3 – see page 77.

Side airbag 3

The side airbag system is identified by the

word AIRBAG on the outboard sides of the

front seat backrests.

The side airbag system comprises:

z an airbag with inflator in the back of the

driver’s and front passenger’s seat

respectively,

z the control e lectronics,

z the side-impact sensors,

z control indicator for airbag systems v in

instrument cluster,

z seat occupancy recognition 3,

z the control indicator for Vauxhall child

restraint systems y with transponders 3

in th e od om eter displa y.

The side airbag system will be triggered:

z depending on the severity of the

accident,

z depending on the type of impact,

z within the range shown in the illustration

on the centre door pillar of the driver’s or

front passenger’s side,

z independently of the front airbag

sy ste m.

Exception:

Front passenger’s seat with seat

occupancy recognition system 3. The seat

occupancy recognition system deactivates

the front and side airbags 3 on th e fron t

passenger’s side if the front passenger’s

seat is unoccupied or a Vauxhall child

restraint system with transponders 3 has

been fitted to the front passenger’s seat.

Seat occupancy recognition - see page 87.

Vauxhall child restraint system with

transponders 3 - see page 78.

9 Wa rning

Seat belts must therefore always be worn.

The front airbag system serves to

supplement the three-point seat belts. If

you do not wear your seat belt you risk

being seriously injured, or even thrown

from the ve hic le, in the ev ent of an

accident.

In the event of an accident the seat belt

helps to keep you in the correct seating

position, so that the front airbag system

can provide you with effective protection.

84 Seats, interior

When triggered, the side airbag inflates

within milliseconds to form a safety cushion

for the driver or front passenger in the

respective door area. This substantially

reduces the risk of injury to the upper body

and pelvis in the event of a side-on

collision.

The side airbags will not be triggered in the

eve nt of:

z the ignition being switched off,

z frontal collisions,

z accidents in which the vehicle overturns,

z collisions involving a rear-impact,

z collisions involving a side-impact outside

the passenger cell.

In addition, the side airbag system will not

be triggered for the front passenger’s seat

in model variants with seat occupancy

recognition 3 if:

z the front passenger’s seat is unoccupied,

z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child

restraint system with transponders 3.

Seat occupancy recognition – see page 87.

Vauxhall child restraint system

with transponders 3 – see page 77.

9 Warning

There must be no objects in the area in

which the airbag inflates or in the area

between the ba ckrests and the v ehicle

body. Do not place the hands or arms on

the covers of the airbag systems.

Important information – see page 89.

The three-point seat belt must always be

correctly fitted – see page 76.

85Seats, interior

Curt ain airbag 3

The curtain airbag system is identified by

the word AIRBAG on the roof pillar trim.

The curtain airbag system comprises:

z an airbag with inflator in the roof frame

on the driver’s and front passenger’s side

re s pective ly,

z the control elec tronics,

z the side-impact sensors,

z the control indicator for airbag

system s v in th e in st rume nt .

The curtain airbag system will be triggered:

z depending on the severity of the

accident,

z depending on the type of impact,

z within the ra ng e shown in the illustration

on the centre door pillar of the driver’s or

front passenger’s side,

z together with the side airbag system,

z irrespective of sea t occupancy

recognition,

z independently of the front airbag

system.

When the curtain a irbag is triggered it

inflates within milliseconds and provides a

safety barrier in the head area on the

re spe ctive side of the v ehicle. This red uce s

the risk of injury to the head considerably in

the event of a side-impact.

86 Seats, interior

The curtain airbags will not be triggered in

the event of:

z the ignition being switched off,

z frontal collisions,

z accidents in whic h the vehicle overturns,

z collisions involving a rear-impact,

z collisions involving a side-impact outside

the passenger cell.

Control indicator v for airbag systems

The operation of the airbag systems is

electronically monitored together with the

seat occupancy recognition systems 3

and the belt tensioners and indicated on

the instrument cluster by the control

indicator v. When the ignition is switched

on, the control indicator illuminates for

approx. 4 seconds. If it does not illuminate,

does not go off after 4 seconds or

illuminates whilst driving, there is a fault in

the airbag systems, the sea t occupancy

recognition system 3 or the belt tensioners

- see page 74. The systems may not

activate if an accident occurs.

Deployment of the airbags is indicated by

continuous illumination of v.

The system’s integrated self-diagnostics

allows faults to b e quickly remedied.

If c ontrol indicator v in the instrument

cluster fails, for reasons of safety, the text

AIrbAG appears on the odometer display.

The text is acknowledged by pressing the

reset button. It then disappears from the

odometer display 10 seconds later.

9 Wa rning

The re m ust be no objects in the area in

which the airbag inflates. Do not place

the hands or arms on the covers of the

airbag systems. Important information –

see pa ge 89.

The three-point seat belt m ust always be

correctly fitted – see page 76.

9 Wa rnin g

Have the cause of the fault eliminated

immediately by a workshop.

87Seats, interior

Seat oc cupancy recognition 3

The seat occupancy recognition system

deactivates the front and side airbags for

the front passenger’s seat if the front

passenger’s seat is not occupied or a

Vauxhall child restraint system with

transponders 3 is fitted on the front

passenger’s seat. The curtain airbag

system 3 remains activated.

The control indicator for seat occupancy

recognition y is located in the odometer

display. If control indicator y illuminates

for approx. 4 seconds when the ignition is

switched on, the vehicle is equipped with

seat occupancy recognition; see next

page, Fig. S 14742.

If a Vauxhall child restraint system with

transponders 3 is fitted, the control

indicator y illuminates continuously after

the ig nition is switched on as soon as the

system has detected the child restraint

system. Only then may the child restraint

system with transponders 3 be used on the

passenger’s seat.

Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition

can also be identified by the sticker on the

side of the instrument panel - see

illustration above.

Vauxhall child restraint systems w ith

transponders 3 are automatically

detected if correctly fitted to the front

passenger’s seat. When these child

restraint systems are being used on the

front passenger’s seat, the front and side

airbag systems for the front passenger’s

seat are deactivated. The curtain airbag

system remains activated. Pay attention to

control indicator seat y for occupancy

recognition 3 - see page 88.

Vauxhall child restraint systems with

transponders 3 can be identified by a

sticker.

9 Wa rnin g

Only Vauxhall child restraint systems with

transponders 3 can be fitted on the front

pas seng er’s seat. Use of sy ste ms w ithout

transponders poses a risk of fatal injury.

88 Seats, interior

Cont rol indica tor y for Vauxhall child

restraint systems with transponders 3

The p re sence of a Vauxhall child restraint

system with transponders 3 is indicated

after the ignition has been switched on by

continuous illumination of the control

indicator y in th e od om eter disp la y, as

soon as the seat occupancy recognition

system has detected the child restraint

system.

If control indicator y does not illuminate

whilst driving, the front and side airbags

for the front p assenge r’s seat are not

deactivated and there is a risk of fatal

injury to the child. Fit the child restraint

sy ste ms on the rear s eat. Have the cause of

the fault eliminated by a workshop.

If the child restraint system is not correctly

fitted or the transponders are defective,

the control indicator flashes. Check that

child restraint system is correctly fitted. For

fitting child restraint system with

transponders 3 - see instructions provided

with child restraint system.

If the control indicator flashes when the

child restraint system with transponders 3

is correctly fitted, there is a fault with risk of

injury to the child. Fit the child restraint

system on the rear seat. Have the cause of

the fa ult eliminated by a workshop.

If no Vauxhall child restraint system with

transponders 3 is fitted, the control

indicator must not illuminate or flash, as

the front passenger’s airbag systems

would not deploy. Have the cause of the

fault elim inated by a workshop.

9 Wa rnin g

If the Vauxhall child restraint system with

transponders 3 has been fitted

according to the instructions, control

indicator y for Vauxhall c hild restraint

sy ste ms with transponders must

illuminate in the odometer display when

the ignition is switched on.

If the control indica tor does not illuminate

whilst driving, the front passenger’s

airbag systems are not deactivated and

there is a risk of fatal injury. In this case fit

child res traint sy ste ms on the rea r seat.

Have the cause of the fault eliminated by

a workshop.

89Seats, interior

Im portant

z Do not fit accessories or place objects in

the expansion zone of the airbag

system s - risk of injury if a irb ags are

deployed.

z Do not place any objects between the

airbag systems and the vehicle

occupants; risk of injury.

z Use the hooks in the roof frame only to

hang up light articles of clothing or coat

hangers. Do not place any objects in the

pockets of the hanging items – risk of

in j u ry.

z The airbag systems and b elt tensioner

control electronics can be found in the

centre console area. In order to avoid

malfunctions, do not store magnetic

objects in this area.

z Do not stick anything on the steering

wheel, instrument panel, front seat

backrests or roof frame in the vicinity of

the airbags, or on the front passenger’s

seat cushion, or cover any of those areas

with other materials.

z Use only a dry cloth or Interior/

Upholstery Cleaner to clean the steering

wheel, instrument panel, front seat

backrests, roof frame and seat cushion

of the front passenger’s seat. Do not use

any aggressive c leaning agents.

z Only protective covers which are

approved for your vehicle with side

airbag 3 may be fitted on the front

seats. When fitting the protective covers,

make sure that the airbag units on the

outboard sides of the front seat

backrests are not covered.

z The airbag systems are triggered

independently of each other based on

the severity of the accident and the type

of impact. The side airbag system 3 and

the curtain airbag system 3 are

trig gered together. See seat occupancy

recognition on page 87 for exceptions.

z Each airbag deploys once only. Have a

workshop replace deployed airbags

immediately.

z The speeds, directions of movement and

deformation properties of the vehicles,

and the properties of the obstacle

concerned, determine the severity of the

accident and triggering of the airbags.

The degree of damage to your vehicle

and the resulting repair costs alone are

not indicative that the criteria for

trig gering of the airbags were met.

9 Wa rning

Never carry child restraint systems or

other objects on your lap - risk of fatal

in j u ry.

90 Seats, interior

z Do not perform any alterations on the

components of the airbag system, as this

would render the vehicle unroadworthy.

z We recom mend hav ing the steering

wheel, the instrument p anel, all panelling

parts, the door seals, the handles and

the seats removed by a workshop.

z When disposing of the vehicle, the safety

instructions given for this must be

observed. Take the vehicle to a recycling

company for disposal.

z Persons weighing less than 35 kg should

only tra vel on th e rear se ats. This do e s

not apply to children who are travelling

in child restraint systems with

tran s po n ders 3.

z In vehicles with seat occupa ncy

recognition 3, do not place any heavy

objects on the front passenger’s seat

otherwise the airbag systems for the

front passenger’s seat may be triggered

in the event of an accide nt.

z In vehicles with seat occupa ncy

recognition 3, to prevent malfunctions

do not use protective c ov ers or extra seat

cushions on the front passenger’s seat.

z In order to prevent malfunctions when

using a Vauxhall child restraint system

with transponders 3 on the front

passenger’s seat, no objects (e.g. plastic

sheet, stickers or heated mats) may be

placed under the child restraint system.

Use of child restraint systems 3 on the

front passenger’s seat in vehicles with

ai rbag syst em s, but wi thout sea t

occup ancy recog nition 3

9 Wa rning

The systems can be triggered abruptly

and cause injury if they are handled

im pro per ly.

9 Warning

Child restraint system s as well as other

objects must never be carried on the lap

of passengers; risk of fatal injury. If

carried in this way, child restraint systems

with transponders 3 in v ehicles with seat

occupancy recognition 3 could lead to

front passenger’s airbag systems not

being triggered in the event of an

accident.

91Seats, interior

Vehicles with front passenger’s airbag can

be recognised by the word AIRBAG above

the glove compartment and the warning

sticker on the sunvisor on the front

passenger’s side - see Fig. 17424 T on

previous page. In some m odel variants, the

warning sticker may be on the side of the

instrument panel - see Fig. 17118 T. A vehicle with side airbags can be

identified by the word AIRBAG on the

outboard sides of the front seat backrests.

Seat occupancy recognition 3 –

see page 87.

9 Wa rning

Vehicles with front passenger’s airbag

and no side airbag 3:

Child restraints facing the rear of the

vehicle must not be fitted to the front

passenger’s seat; risk of fatal injury.

Child restraints facing the front

(child restraints for weight ranges I, II and

III – see page 77) are permitted on the

front passenger’s seat, providing that it is

pushed back as far as possible and the

backrest has been adjusted so that the

la p be lt f its s n ug ly .

9 Wa rnin g

Vehicles with side airbag 3: No child

restraint system 3 may be fitted on the

front passenger’s seat; risk of fatal injury.

92 Seats, interior

Use of child restraint systems 3 on front

passenger’s seat in vehicles with airbag

systems 3 and with seat occupancy

recognition 3

Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition

can be identified by control indicator y in

the odometer display. If the control

indicator illuminates for a pprox. 4 seconds

when the ignition is switched on, the vehicle

is equipped with seat occupancy

recognition - see page 87.

Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition

can also be identified by the sticker on

the side of the instrument panel -

see Fig. 17625 J.

The seat occupancy recognition system

detects Vauxhall child restraint systems

with transponders 3 and switches off the

front and side airbag systems for the front

passenger’s seat. The curtain airbag

system remains a ctiv ated. S eat occupancy

recognition – see page 87.

Vauxhall child restraint systems with

transponders 3 can be identified by

a sticker or badge - see illustration.

9 Wa rning

Only Vauxhall child restraint systems with

tran s po n ders 3 can be fitted on the front

pass enge r’s seat. Us e of sy ste ms without

transponders poses a risk of fatal injury.

93Seats, interior

Cigarette lighter 3

The cigarette lighter is in the front centre

console.

Press in cigarette lighter with ignition

switched on. Switches off automatically

when elem ent is glowing. Withdraw

cigarette lighter.

Accessory soc kets 3

The soc ket in the centre console and the

cigarette lighter socket can be used to

connect electrical accessories. The sockets

are ready for operation when the ignition is

switched on. If the engine is not running the

battery will be discharged. More accessory

socke ts 3 can be found in the centre

console beneath the rear air vents 3 and in

the Travel Assistant 3.

Estates have an additional accessory

socke t 3 to the left in the luggage

compartment next to the luggage

compartment lighting.

Do not dam age the sockets by using

unsuitable plugs.

The maximum power consumption of

electrical ac cessories m ust not exceed

120 watts.

Do not connect any current-delivering

accessories, e.g. electrical charging

devices or batteries.

Electrical accessories connected to the

socket must comply with the

electromagnetic compatibility

requirements laid down in DIN VDE 40 839,

otherwise vehicle malfunctions may occur.

Accessory sockets in the Travel

Assistant 3 – see page 60.

94 Seats, interior

Ashtray

To be used only for ash and not for

combustible rubbish.

Front ashtray

The ash tray is in the front centre console

beneath a cover.

The cover opens when pressed at the point

indicated.

To empty, grip both sides of the ashtray

insert at the points illustrated and pull

up wards.

Rear ashtray 3

The ash tray is in the rear centre console.

The cover opens when pressed at the point

indicated.

To empty, open the ashtray, press the

spring (arrow) and pull out the ashtray.

9 Wa rning

Failure to observe these descriptions can

lead to injuries which may be fatal.

Vehicle passengers must be informed

accordingly.

95Seats, interior

Stowage compartments

Glove compartment

To open, pull handle upwards.

At the front of the opened cover there is a

pe n holde r.

The g lov e com partment should remain

closed whilst driving.

Cooled glove compartment 3 –

see page 143.

Centre consol e stow age compartment 3

Division of the stowage compartment can

be changed by moving the partition in the

side guide s.

St owage compa rtment in the r oof lining 3

To open, press the point indicated.

The maximum permitted load on the

stowage compartment is 0.4 kg.

The stowage compartment must be closed

whilst driving.

96 Seats, interior

Stow age com partm ents in the luggage

com partm ent

To access press down bar and open the

cover.

Warning triangle ¨ 3 and first-aid kit + 3

stowage – see page 234.

Stowing the spare wheel – see page 236.

Jack and vehicle tools stowage –

see page 238.

Estates have an additional stowage

compartment in the load compartment

floor.

To open, pull the release lever and open

the flap.

When opening, ensure that the hinge at the

fold is opened and that the entire floor

cove ring is not raise d.

97Seats, interior

Drink holders

Drink holders, front 3

The drink holder can be found between

thefront seats in the centre console:

slide cover 3 open.

Dr inks holders, rear 3

The drink holder can be found beneath the

centre seat: pressing front edge moves

drink holder out.

Drink holder in Travel Assistant 3 –

see p age 60.

Su nvisors

Use the sunvisor to protect from glare by

pulling it down and swivelling it to the side.

During driving, the mirrors 3 in the

sunv isors should be cove red.

98 Instruments, controls

Instruments, controls

Control indicators

The control indicators described here are

not present in all vehicles. The descriptions

however, apply to all instrument versions.

The control indicator colours mean:

Turn sig nal lig ht s

Control indicator flashes green.

The control indicator flashes on the

respective side.

Both control indicators flash with the

hazard warning lights on.

Rapid flashes: A turn signal lig ht or the

related fuse has failed, fa ilure of turn signal

light on the caravan/trailer 3.

Turn signal lights – see page 130.

Change bulb s - see page 252.

Fuses - see page 246.

Engine oil pressure

Control indicator illuminates red.

It illuminates when the ignition is switched

on and extinguishes shortly after the

engine starts.

Illuminates when the engine is running:

Engine lubrication m ay be interrupted. This

may result in damage to the engine and/or

locking of the drive wheels:

1. Move out of the flow of traffic as quickly

as possible without impeding other

vehicles.

2. Depress clutch.

3. Shift manual transmission or

Easytronic 3 into neutral; for automatic

transmission 3, set selector lever to N.

4. Switch off ignition.

Check oil level before contacting a

workshop.

Control indicators ......... ......... .............. 98

Instrument display .............................. . 105

Information display ............................. 108

Warning buzzers.................... ........ ...... 126

Windscreen wiper .... ......... ................... 126

z Red

Danger, important reminder

z Yellow

Warning, note, fault

z Green

On confirmation

z Blue

On confirmation

9 Wa rnin g

When the engine is off, considerably

more force is ne eded to brake and stee r.

Do not remove key until vehicle has come

to a standstill, otherwise the steering

column lock could engage unexpectedly.

99Instruments, controls

Brak e sy stem , clu t ch sy ste m

Control indicator illuminates or flashes red.

It illuminates when the ignition is switched

on if the handbrake is applied or if the

brake and c lutch fluid level is too low. For

further instructions – see pages 209, 276.

For ve hicles with Ea sy tronic 3 , the c ontrol

indicator flashes for a few seconds when

the ignition is turned off if the handbrake is

not applied.

9 Warning

Illuminate if the handbrake has been

released: stop vehicle and interrupt

journey immediately. Contact a

workshop for assistance.

Alternator

Control indicator illuminates or flashes red.

It illuminates when the ignition is switched

on and extinguishes shortly after the

engine starts.

Flashes while starting:

Battery voltage too low. Have electrical

system tested by a workshop.

Illuminates when the engine is running:

Stop and switch engine off. Battery will not

be charged. Engine cooling may be

interrupted. Effect of brake servo unit may

stop in vehicles with diesel engines.

Check drive belt condition and tensioning

before contacting a workshop for

assistance.

Airb ag s y ste m s 3 , belt tensioners 3

Control indicator illuminates red.

Illuminates when the engine is running:

Fault in the airbag systems, seat

occupancy recognition 3 or belt tensioners

- see pages 74, 86.

100 Instruments, controls

Coola nt temperat ure

Control indicator illuminates red.

Illuminates when the engine is running:

Stop and turn engine off, coolant

temperature is too high. Risk of engine

damage. For coolant temperature display -

see page 106. Check coolant level -

see page 275.

Exterior l ights

Control indicator illuminates green.

It is illuminated when the exterior lighting is

on – see pa ge 128.

SPORT mode of automatic transmission 3

Control indicator is illuminated in the

transmission display if the SPORT mode 3

is selected.

Further information - see pages 178, 179.

Winter programme of automatic

transmission 3 or Easytronic 3

Control indica tor illuminates in

transmission display with Winter

programme engaged.

Further information – see pages 172, 180.

(

Door open

Control indicator illuminates red.

It illuminates with the doors open.

Easytronic 3, star ting the engine

Control indicator illuminates yellow.

It illuminates if the footbrake is not

depressed. The indicator extinguishes as

soon as the footbrake is depressed. The

engine can only be started with the

footbrake depressed - see page 169.

Bulb replacement 3

Control indicator illuminates red.

It illuminates if a bulb is defective. Check

the lights and replace any defective bulbs.

Replacing bulbs - see page 252.

101Instruments, controls

Open luggage compartment

Control indicator illuminates red.

It illuminates with the lug gage

compartment open, to close luggage

compartment – see pa ge 34.

Front fog lig hts 3

Control indicator illuminates green.

It is illuminated when the front fog lights

are on – see page 130.

Main beam

Control indicator illuminates blue.

It is illuminated when main beam is on and

during headlight flash – see pages 7, 128.

Fog tail light

Control indicator illuminates yellow.

It is illuminated when the fog tail light is on

– see page 131.

Parking distance sensors 3

Control indica tor illuminates yellow.

Fault in system. Contact a workshop for

he lp.

Parking distance sensors 3 – see page 202.

Continuous Damping Control 3, SPO RT

mode

Control indica tor illuminates yellow.

Fault in system. Contact a workshop for

he lp.

Further information – see page 198.

Seat belt 3

Control indica tor illuminates red.

It illum inates once the ignition has been

switched on until the seat belt is applied.

A warning buzzer also sounds once the

vehicle has started moving.

Putting on a seat belt – see page 76.

Engine electronics, transmission

electronics 3 , diesel fuel filter 3,

im mobil iser

Control indicator illuminates or flashes

yellow.

It illuminates for a few seconds when the

ignition is switched on.

Illuminates when the engine is running:

Fault in engine or gearbox electronic

system. Electronics have switched on

emergency running programme; fuel

consumption may be increased and the

vehicle’s driveability reduced -

see page 192. Contact a workshop

immediately.

Diesel engines

Z19DTL, Z19DT,

Z 19 DTH: Have water drained from diesel

fuel filter - see page 274.

Flashes when the ignition is on:

Fault in the electronic immobiliser system;

the engine cannot be started -

see page 27.

Sales designation – see page 284, 285.

102 Instruments, controls

Preheating for diesel engines 3,

diesel part icle filter 3

Control indicator illuminates or flashes

yellow.

Illuminates:

Preheating system active, switches on only

if outside temperature is low.

Flashes:

(in vehicles with diesel particle filter)

The driving situation is such that the diesel

particle filter self-cleaning function cannot

operate automatically. You may continue

to drive the vehicle normally. The vehicle

will not be damaged and does not require

se rvice.

The self-cleaning function will

automatic ally operate whilst driving after

the engine has reached its normal

op erating te mperature. The control

indicator ! will continue to flash until

the self-clea ning operation is complete.

This may take up to 20 minutes of driving.

The time will be shorter at higher vehicle

spe eds .

Further information – see page 194.

C oolant level

Control indicator illuminates yellow.

Illuminates when the engine is running:

Coolant fluid level too low. Stop, turn off

engine. Check coolant fluid level -

see page 275.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

Control indicator illuminates red.

Illuminates whilst driving:

Fault in Anti-lock Brake System -

see page 210.

103Instruments, controls

Electro-hydraulic power assisted steering

Control indicator illuminates red.

Fault in electro-hydraulic power assisted

steering system. The power assisted

steering may have failed. The vehicle can

be steered but considerably more force is

required. Contact a workshop for

assistance.

Electronic St abili ty Progra mme

(ESP®

Plus

) 3

Control indicator flashes or lights yellow.

Flashes whilst driving:

System actively engaged - see page 196.

Illuminates whilst driving:

System switched off or fault in the

Electronic Stability Programme -

see page 196.

Seat occup ancy recog ni tion 3

Control indica tor illuminates or flashes on

the odometer display.

Illuminates:

Seat occupancy recognition has detected

a child restraint system with transponders.

Airbag systems for the front passenger’s

seat are deactivated - see page 87.

Flashes:

Fault in the system or child restraints with

transponder fitted incorrectly -

see p age 87.

Engine oil level 3

Control indica tor illuminates yellow.

The engine oil level is checked

automatic ally.

Illuminates when the engine is running:

Engine oil level too low . Check engine oil

level and top up engine oil if necessary -

see p age 272.

Cruise control 3

Control indicator illuminates green.

It is illuminated when the system is on –

see page 200.

Fuel level

Control indicator illuminates or flashes

yellow.

Illuminates:

Low fuel level, fuel gauge in reserv e a rea.

Flashes:

Fuel supply exhausted, refuel immediately.

Never let the tank run dry.

Erratic fuel supply can c ause catalytic

converter to overheat - see page 190.

Diesel engines: If the tank is run dry, bleed

the fue l sy ste m as desc rib ed on pa ge 228.

104 Instruments, controls

Exhaust gases 3

Control indicator illuminates or flashes

yellow.

It illuminates when the ignition is switched

on and extinguishes shortly after the

engine starts.

Illuminates when the engine is running:

Fault in emission control sy ste m. The

permitted e missions may be exceeded.

Contact a workshop immediately.

If it flashes when the engine is running:

Fault that may cause damage to the

catalytic converter – see page 192. Contact

a workshop for assistance immedia tely.

Tyre pressure m onitoring system 3

Control indica tor illuminates red:

Tyre pressure difference, check tyre

pressure at next opportunity.

Control indicator flashes red:

Considerable pressure difference or direct

loss of pressure, stop immediately and

check tyres and tyre pressure.

Control indica tor illuminates yellow:

Fault in system. Contact a workshop for

he lp.

Tyre pressure monitoring system –

see p age 204.

Ad aptive Forwa rd Lighting (AFL) 3

Control indicator flashes yellow.

Flashing:

Fault in syste m. C ontac t a workshop for

help.

Flashing for 4 seconds when the ignition is

switched on:

System adjusted for driving abroad.

AFL - see page 132.

105Instruments, controls

Instrument display

In some model variants the pointers of the

tachometer, the speedometer, the coolant

temperature gauge and the fuel gauge

briefly go to the end stop as a functionality

check.

Tachometer

Indicates engine speed.

Warning zone: Maxim um permissible

engine speed ex ceeded; d anger to engine.

Speedometer

Speed d isplay .

Odometer

Re cords the mile s (k ilome tres) counte d.

Display in the event of airbag system

malfunction – see page 86.

Trip odometer

Display of m iles (kilom etres) covered since

reset.

To set to zero, hold reset knob down for

approx. 2 seconds with ignition switched

on.

106 Instruments, controls

Coola nt temperat ure d isplay

For physical reasons, the engine

temperature gauge shows the coolant

temperature only if the coolant level is

adequate.

During operation the system is pressurised.

The temp erature ma y there fore rise briefly

to over 100 °C.

Fuel gauge

Never let the tank run dry.

Diesel engines: If the tank is run dry, bleed

the fue l sy ste m as desc rib ed on pa ge 228.

Because of the fuel remaining in the tank,

the amount of fuel required to fill the tank

may be less than the specified tank

capacity.

Pointer in zone

at left

= Engine operating

temperature not yet

re ach ed

Pointer between

the zones

= Normal operating

te mpe r at ure

Pointer in

warning zone at

right or W is

illuminated

= Temperature too

high: Stop. Switch

off engine. Risk of

engine damage.

Check coolant level

- see page 275.

Pointer in

left zone or

Y illuminated

= Reserve area

Pointer in

left zone or

Y flashing

= Refuelling -

see page 189

107Instruments, controls

Transmission display 3

Display of gear selected for automatic

transmission 3 or current gear or m ode for

Ea sytronic 3 .

For E asy tronic 3, the display flashe s for a

few seconds if A, M or R is selected when

the engine is running but the footbrake is

not d epress ed.

InS P Service interval display 3

When InSP appears on the odometer

display, make an appointment with a

workshop for servicing as soon a s possible.

We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised

Repairer.

Service, maintenance – see page 268.

P Automatic transmission park

position

R Reverse gear

N Neutral

A Automatic mode on Easytronic

M Manual mode on Easytronic

D Automatic mode on automatic

transmission

1-5 Manual mode, current gear on

Easytronic

1-5

1-6 3

Manual m ode, selected gear on

automatic

108 Instruments, controls

Information display

Triple Information Display

Display of time, outside temperature and

date/Infotainment system 3 (w hen it is on).

When the ignition is off, the time, date and

outside tem perature can be presente d for

15 second s b y brie fly pressing one of the

two buttons below the display.

Display F in the display indicates a fa ult.

Hav e the cause eliminated by a workshop.

Board Inform ation Display 3

Display of time, outside temperature and

date/Infotainment system 3 (when it is on).

Display F in the display indica tes a fault.

Have the cause eliminated by a workshop.

Grap hical Informat ion Disp lay 3,

C olour Informa tion Display 3

Display of time, outside temperature, date/

Infotainment system 3 (when it is on) and

Electronic Climate Control 3.

The Graphical Information Display

presents the information in monochrome.

The Colour Information Display presents

the information in colour.

12:01 17,0°C

FM 3 90,6MHz

REG AS RDS TP

11:25} 21.5°C

Range

RDS [ TP]

257miles

Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36

BC 1 All values

BC 2

257.0 miles

Timer

Ø40mph

7.0 ga l .

Ø 31.0 miles/ gal.

109Instruments, controls

The type of information and how it is

displayed depends on the equipment

of the vehicle and the I nfotainment

system 3, trip comp uter 3 and Electronic

Clim ate Control 3 settings.

Some information appears on the displa y

in an abbreviated form.

For Infotainment system - see Infotainment

system instructions.

For Electronic Climate Control 3 -

see page 156.

Display F in the display indicates a fa ult.

Hav e the cause eliminated by a workshop.

Outside temperature

A fall in temperature is indicated

immediately and a rise in temperature

after a tim e delay.

If outside temperature drops to 3 °C, the

sy mbol : illuminates in the Triple

Information Display or the Board

Information Display 3 as a warning for icy

road surfaces. : remains illuminated until

temperatures reach a t least 5 °C.

In vehicles with Graphical Information

Display 3 or Colour Information Display 3,

an icy road surface warning message

app ears on the display. No m essag e

is displayed if the temperature is less

than -5 °C.

8:56 -5,5°C

07.04.2004

9 Wa rnin g

Caution: The road surface may already

be icy even though the display indicates

a few degrees ab ove 0 °C.

Slippery road

-2,5°C

110 Instruments, controls

Triple Information Display

Set d ate and ti me

Infotainment system off: press Ö and ;

below the display as follows:

Correcting time 3

Some RDS transmitters do not send a

correct time signal. If the incorrect time is

continually displayed, deactivate

automatic time synchronisation 3 - see

next column, and set the time m anually.

The automatic setting is indicated by } in

the display.

Deactivating/activating automatic time

synchronisation: Infotainment system off,

press Ö and ; below the display:

Press Ö for approx. 2 seconds:

Day flashes

;:Set day

Ö:Month flashes

;:Set month

Ö:Year flashes

;:Set year

Ö:Hours flash

;:Set hours

Ö: Minutes flash

;: Set minutes

Ö: Clock is started.

8:56 5,5°C

07.04.2004

Hold down Ö for approx. 2 sec., clock

display is now in setting mode,

Press Ö twice (until year flashes).

Press Ö and hold down for approx.

3seconds until } flashes in d isplay 3 and

text "RDS TIME" appears (years flash

during this time),

Press ;; display shows:

RDS TIME 0 = Off

Press ;; display shows:

RDS TIME 1 = On

Press Ö three times.

111Instruments, controls

Board Information Display 3,

selecting functions

Functions and settings of some

equipment 3 can be accessed via the

Board Information Displa y.

This is done using the menus and the

buttons/four-way button on the

Infotainment system 3 or the left-hand

adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel.

The resp ective menu op tions are then

shown in the following lines on the display.

If check control warning messages 3 are

displayed, the display is blocked to other

displays. Confirm the warning message. If

there are several warning messages,

confirm one after the other.

To select w ith four-wa y button:

Select options via the menus and with the

buttons/four-way button on the

Infotainme nt sy ste m 3.

To selec t using the left adjuster w heel 3

on the steering wheel

Scroll upw ards

Previous menu item.

Scroll downwards

Next menu item.

Press

Selec tion of highlighted item, confirmation

of commands.

System settings - see page 112.

Trip computer 3 – see page 114.

11:25} 21.5°C

Range

257miles

112 Instruments, controls

Board Information Display 3,

System settings

Press the Sett ings button of the

Infotainment system. Menu item Audio or

System will appear.

Press the lower button of the four-way

button to reach menu item System . After

pressing the right-hand part of the four-

way button, the first function of the System

menu is shown.

Some information appears on the displa y

in an abbreviated form.

The functions are displayed in the following

order:

z Time synchronisation,

z Time, setting hours,

z Time, setting minutes,

z Date, setting day,

z Date, setting month,

z Date, setting year,

z Ignition logic,

z Language selection,

z Se tting units of me as ure .

Correc ting ti me 3

Som e RDS transmitters do not send a

correct time signal. If the incorrect time is

continually displayed, deactivate

automatic time synchronisation 3 and set

the time manually - see next page.

11:25} 21.5°C

System

11:25} 21.5°C

Clock Sync.On

113Instruments, controls

The automatic setting is indicated by } in

the display.

To correct time with the help of R DS, select

the menu item for time synchronisation

from the Settings menu.

Make the desired setting.

Setti ng date and time

Select the menu item for time and date

setting from the Settings menu.

Make the desired setting.

The setting is executed upon exit from the

menu item.

Ig ni tion logic 3

Adjustment - see Infotainment system

instructions.

Language selection

You can select the display language for

some func tions .

Select the menu item for language from the

Settings menu and make the desired

setting.

Setting units of measure

You can select which units of measure are

to be used.

Select the menu item for units of measure

from the Settings menu and make the

desired setting.

11:25} 21.5°C

English

11:25} 21.5°C

Unit Europe-SI

114 Instruments, controls

Board Information Display 3,

trip computer 3

The trip computer provides information on

driving data, which is continually recorded

and evaluated electronically.

Access trip computer vehicle data by

pressing the BC button on the Infotainment

system or the left adjuster wheel 3 on the

steering wheel.

Some information appears on the displa y

in an abbreviated form.

Once an audio function has been selected,

the subsequent rows of the trip computer

function are displayed.

The functions are displa yed in the following

order:

z Instantaneous consumption,

z Average consumption,

z Effective consumption,

z Av erage speed,

z Distance travelled,

z Range,

z Stop watch.

Instantaneous consumption

Display changes depending on speed:

Average consumption

Average consumption display.

Measurement may be reset to zero at any

time and restarted - see "Resetting the trip

computer information".

Effective consumption

Fuel consumption display.

Measurement may be reset to zero at any

time and restarted - see "Resetting the trip

computer information".

Av era ge sp ee d

Average speed display.

Measurement may be reset to zero at any

time and restarted - see "Resetting the trip

computer information".

Stoppages in the journey with the ignition

off are not included in the c alcula tions.

Distanc e travelled

Distance travelled display.

Measurement may be reset to zero at any

time and restarted - see "Resetting the trip

computer information".

Display in gal/h below 8 mph (13 km/h)

Display in mpg above 8 mph (13 km/h)

11:25} 21.5°C

Inst. Consumpt.

29.6miles/gal.

115Instruments, controls

Range

Range is calculated from current fuel tank

content and instantaneous consumption.

The display shows average values.

After refuelling, the vehicle updates the

range automatically after a brief delay.

If less than 30 miles (50 km) can be driven

with the fuel remaining in the tank, the

warning "Range" appears on the display.

If less than 20 miles (30 km) can be driven

with the fuel remaining in the tank, the

warning "Refuel!" 3 appears on the

display.

Acknowledge the menu item as described

on page 111.

Resetting the trip c omputer inform ation

The follow ing trip computer information

can be reset (reset to zero and

measurements/calculations restarted):

z Average consumption,

z Effective consumption,

z Average speed,

z Distance travelled.

Select the desired trip computer

information.

Reset using the left wheel on the steering

wheel or the right/left button of the four-

way button:

z Press for more than 2 seconds:

Current value.

z Press for more than 4 seconds:

All values.

St op wa tch

Operation with the four-way button:

z Press right button: Start/Stop.

z Press left button for more than

2seconds: Reset.

Operating using the left adjuster wheel 3

on the ste ering wheel:

z Press: Start/Stop.

Interrup tion of power supply

If the power supply has been interrupted or

if the battery voltage has dropped too low,

the values stored in the trip computer will

be lost.

11:25} 21.5°C

Range

257miles

11:25} 21.5°C

Stop Watch

01:22:32h

116 Instruments, controls

Graphical Information Display 3

or Colour Information Display 3 ,

selecting functions

The functions and settings of some

equipment 3 can be accessed via the

Graphical Information Display or the

Colour Information Display.

Functions are selected and executed in the

menu on the display using the four-way

button, the multi-function knob 3 on the

Infotainment system or the left wheel 3 on

the stee ring wheel.

If check control warning messages 3 are

displayed, the display is blocked to other

displays. Confirm the warning message. If

there are several warning messages,

confirm one after the other.

To select w ith four-wa y button:

Select menu items via menus and with the

buttons/four-way button of the

Infotainme nt sy ste m.

To selec t using the mult i-function k nob :

Turn

Highlighting of menu options or

commands, selection of function ranges,

Press

Selec tion of highlighted option,

confirmation of commands.

To exit a menu, turn the m ulti-function

knob left or right to Return or Main and

select.

FM [T P] C Din

ᕃ

90.6

MHz

19,5° 19:36

117Instruments, controls

To select using the left adjuster wheel 3

on the steering wheel

Scroll upwards

Previous menu item.

Scroll downwards

Next menu item.

Press

Selection of highlighted item, confirmation

of comma nds.

Function ranges

For each functional area there is a main

page (Main), which is selected at the

top edge of the display (not with

Infotainment system CD 30 without the

hands-free mobile phone system):

z Audio,

z Navigation 3,

z Telephone 3 ,

z Trip computer 3.

For audio, navigation 3 and telephone

functions 3 - see Infotainment system

instructions.

System settings

The settings are accessed via the Setting s

menu.

Press the Main button 3 (not found on all

Infotainment systems) on the Infotainment

system (call up main display).

Press the Settings button of the

Infotainment system. No menu may be

selected with Infotainment System CD 30.

The Settings menu is displayed.

FM [T P] C Din

ᕃ

90.6

MHz

19,5° 19:36

7 Settings 19,5° 19:36

Time, Date 19:36

Language

Units 10 . 07 . 2004

Contrast

Day / Night

6 Ign. logic

118 Instruments, controls

Setti ng the date and time 3

Select menu item Time, Date from the

Setti ng s menu.

The menu for Time, Date is displayed.

Select the menu items required:

Make the desired setting.

Correcting time 3

For systems with GPS receiver

, time and

date are automatically set upon receipt of

a GPS satellite signal. If the displayed time

does not correspond to local time, time can

be manually corrected in 30-minute

increments or automatically corrected via

receipt of an RDS time signal

Some RDS transmitters do not send correct

time signals. If the incorrect time is

displayed often, deactivate automatic

time synchronisation 3 and set the time

manually.

To correct tim e with the help of RDS, select

menu item Sy nchron. clock autom atica l.

from the Time, Da te menu.

The box in front of Synchron. clock

automat ical. will be ticked; see

Fig. 17340 T.

Language selection

You can select the display language for

some functions.

Select menu item Language from the

Sett ings menu.

The available languages are displayed.

7 Time, Date 19,5° 19:36

Time 19:36

Date 10 . 07 . 2004

6 Synchron. clock automatical.

GPS = Glo ba l Pos itioning System,

Satellite system for world-wide positioning.

RDS = Radio Data Sys tem.

7 Settings 19,5° 19:36

Time, Date

Language English

Units Ger man

Contrast Español

Day / Night Nederlands

6 Ign. logic Français

119Instruments, controls

Select the desired language.

Selections are indicated by a 6 in front of

the menu item .

In systems with voice output 3, w hen the

language setting of the display is changed

the system will ask whether the

announcement language should also be

changed – see Infotainment system

instructions.

Setting units of measure

You can select which units of measure are

to be used.

Select menu item Unitsfrom the

Settings menu.

The available units are displayed.

Select the desired unit.

Selections are indicated by a o in front of

the menu item.

Ad just ing co ntra st 3

(Graphical Inform ation Displ ay)

Select menu item Cont rast from the

Sett ings menu.

The menu for Contr ast is displayed.

Confirm the required setting.

7 13 Languages 19,5° 19:36

X English

German

Español

Nederlands

Français

Italiano

7 Settings 19,5° 19:36

Time, Date

Language

~ Europe-SI

Units

| Japan

Contrast

| Great Britain

Day / Night

| USA

6 Ign. logic

7 Contrast 19,5° 19:36

120 Instruments, controls

Setti ng displa y mod e 3

The display can be adjusted to suit the light

conditions, black or coloured text on a light

background or white or coloured text on a

dark background.

Select menu item Day / Night from the

Setti ng s menu.

The options are displayed.

Autom atic: adapted based on vehicle

lighting.

Alw ays day design: black or coloured text

on light background.

Alw ays night design: white or coloured

text on dark background.

Selections are indicated by a o in front of

the menu item .

Ig ni tion logic 3

Adjustment - see Infotainment system

instructions.

Graphical Information Display 3

or Colour Information Display 3,

trip computer 3

The trip computers provide information on

driving data, which is continually recorded

and evaluated electronically.

The trip computer main page (Main)

provides information about rang e,

averag e fuel consumption 3 and

instantaneous consumption.

To display other trip computer data,

press the BC button on the Infotainment

sy ste m 3, select the trip computer menu

on the display or press the left adjuster

wheel 3 on the steering whee l.

Range

Range is calculated from current fuel tank

content and instantaneous consumption.

The display shows average values.

After refuelling, the vehicle updates the

range automatically after a brief delay.

Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36

BC 1 All values

BC 2

257.0 miles

Timer

Ø40mph

Tyres

7.0 ga l .

Ø 31.0 miles/ gal.

Ra ng e

257

miles

Aver . Co ns ump.

31.0

miles/gal.

Inst. consumpt.

29.6

miles/gal.

19,5° 23° 5

5 5

5 Ec o x 19:36

121Instruments, controls

If less than 30 miles (50 km) can be driven

with the fuel remaining in the tank, the

warning "Range" appears on the display.

If less than 20 miles (30 km) can be driven

with the fuel remaining in the tank, the

warning "Please refuel!" 3 appears on the

display. At that point "Please refuel!" 3 will

also be displayed on the trip comp uter

main page (Main) instead of "Range".

Acknowledge the menu item as described

on page 116.

Instantaneous consumption

Display changes depending on speed:

Distance travelled

Distance travelled display.

Measurement may be reset to zero at any

time and restarted - see "Resetting the trip

computer information".

Average speed

Av erage speed display.

Measurement may be reset to zero at any

time and restarted - see "Resetting the trip

computer information".

Stoppages in the journey with the ignition

off are not included in the calculations.

Effective consumption

Fuel consumption display.

Measurement may be reset to zero at any

time and restarted - see "Resetting the trip

computer information".

Average consumption

Average consumption display.

Measurement may be reset to zero at any

time and restarted - see "Resetting the trip

computer information".

Reset ting the tr ip comp uter informat ion

The following trip com puter information

can be reset (restart measurements):

z Distance travelled,

z Average spee d,

z Effective consumption,

z Average consumption.

Select BC 1 or BC 2 from the trip computer

menu.

Display in gal/h below 8 mph (13 km/h)

Display in mpg above 8 mph (13 km/h)

Range

29miles

Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36

BC 1 All values

BC 2

257.0 miles

Timer

Ø40mph

Tyres

7.0 ga l .

Ø 31.0 miles/ gal.

122 Instruments, controls

The information from both trip computers

can be reset separately, making it possible

to evaluate data over different time

periods.

Select the desired trip computer

information.

The v alue for the selected function will b e

reset and recalculated.

To reset all information of a trip computer,

select menu item All v alues.

If trip computer information has been

selected, "- - -" is displayed after a reset.

The recalculated values are displayed a fter

a brief delay.

Interrup tion of power supply

If the power supply has been interrupted or

if the battery voltage has dropped too low,

the values stored in the trip computer will

be lost.

Ü Reset BC 1 19,5° 19:36

All values

257.0 m iles

Ø40mph

7.0 gal.

Ø 31.0 m iles/gal.

Ü Reset BC 1 19,5° 19:36

All values

257.0 m iles

Ø40mph

7.0 gal.

Ø 31.0 m iles/gal.

123Instruments, controls

Stop watch

Select menu item Timer from the Board

Com puter menu.

The Timer menu is displayed.

To start, select menu item St art.

To reset, select menu item Reset.

The desired stop watch display can be

se lecte d from the Options menu 3:

Dr iving Time excl. S tops

The time the vehicle is in m otion is

recorded. Stationary tim e is not included.

Dr iving Time incl. S tops

The time the vehicle is in m otion is

recorded . The tim e the vehicle is sta tionary

with the key in the starter switch is

included.

Tr ave l T ime

Measurement of the time from manual

activation via Start to manual deactivation

via Reset.

Display of current tyre pressure 3

Select menu item Tyres from the Board

Computer menu.

The current pressure of each tyre is

displayed.

Further information – see page 204.

Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36

BC 1

BC 2

00:00:00

Timer

Tyres Start

Reset

Options

Ü Board Computer

BC 1

BC 2

Timer

Tyres

124 Instruments, controls

Check control 3

Check control monitors several fluid levels,

the tyre pressure 3, the remote control

batteries, Vauxhall alarm system 3 and the

main vehicle lighting systems, including the

cables and fuses. When towing, the

caravan/trailer lighting system is also

monitored.

Once the ignition has been switched on, all

check control functions are automatically

verified.

Warning messages appear on the display.

If the re are seve ra l warning m essa ges, the y

are displayed one after the other.

Some information appears on the displa y

in an abbreviated form.

Examples of warning messages for the

Graphical Information Display 3 and

Colour Information Display 3 are shown.

On the Board Information Display,

messages appear in an abbreviated form.

Acknowledge warning messages as

described on pages 111, 116.

Unacknowledged warning messages can

be re-displayed later.

Warning messages:

Remote Control

Battery

check

Remote control battery voltage is too low –

see p age 29.

Brakelig ht switch

check

Fault. Brake light not illuminating w hen

braking occurs. H ave cause of fault

remedied by a workshop immediately.

Safeguard

check

Fault. System fault in Vauxhall alarm

system. Have the cause of the fault

rectified straight away by a workshop.

Coolant level

check

125Instruments, controls

If there is a fault in the vehicle lighting

system, the respective location of the fault

is displayed as text, e.g.:

Brakelight

check right

If brake light is defective, the relevant tail

light takes over the brake light function.

In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring

system 3, if tyre pressure is too low, the

display indicates which tyre to check, e.g.:

Tyre pressure

check rear

right

(v alu e in bar)

Check tyre pressure at next opportunity

using suitable gauge. Tyre pressure

monitoring system 3 – see page 204.

Checking tyre pressure – see page 299.

In vehicles with tyre pressure control

sy ste m 3, if there is major loss of pressure

in a tyre, the display indicates the tyre at

fa ult, e.g .:

Attention!

Rear left tyre

pressure loss

(value in bar)

Stop immediately and check tyre and tyre

pressure. For tyre pressure monitoring

sy ste m 3 – see page 204.

Wa she r

Fluid Lev el

check

Fluid level in windscreen wash system too

low. Topping up wash fluid – see page 279.

Rear window wash system and headlight

wash system 3 are deactivated if wash

fluid level is low.

Coolant level

check

Fluid level in engine cooling system is low.

Check coolant level immed iately –

see page 274.

Interrup tion of power supply

Stored warning messages appear on the

display one after the other.

126 Instruments, controls

Warning buzzers

When starting the engine or whilst

driv ing:

z If seat belt is not fastened 3.

z When driving with a door open or the

luggage compartment ajar.

z Once you have reached a certain speed

if the handbrake is applied 3.

z If a specified maximum speed is

exce ed ed 3.

z In the case of Easytronic 3 if A, M or R is

selected while the engine is running and

the driver’s door is opened but the

footbrake is not depressed.

W hen t he v ehi cle is park ed an d th e

driver’s door is opened:

z When the key is in the starter switch 3 .

z With parking lights or dipped beam

switched on.

z In the case of Easytronic 3, if the

handbrake is not applied and no gear is

engaged when the engine is off.

Windscreen wiper

To activate, gently push stalk upwards.

The stalk always moves bac k to the

starting position. To select next higher or

lower stage: move stalk slightly.

Push stalk past resistance point and hold:

the wind screen wiper stages are run

through; an acoustic signal sounds at

position §.

Adjustable timed interval wipe $:

Press the stalk down from position §:

Single swipe.

§ =Off

$ = Adjustable timed interval wipe

% =Slow

& =Fast

Adjuster wheel right = short intervals

Adjuster wheel left = long intervals

127Instruments, controls

Autom atic w iping with ra in sensor 3:

To activate, gently push stalk upwards.

The rain sensor detects the amount of

water on the windscreen a nd automatically

controls the windscreen wiper. Adjust the

sensitivity of the system using the adjuster

wheel:

Keep sensor area of rain sensor clean by

operating the windscreen wash system.

Wi nd sc ree n wa sh s y st em an d headl igh t

wash system 3

To activate, pull stalk towards steering

wheel.

The wiper is switched on for severa l wipe

operations. A single after-wipe occurs at

speeds of up to 80 mph (130 km/h).

The headlight wash system 3 is ready for

op eration when the headlights are

switched on. W ash fluid is s praye d onto the

headlights once. Then the headlig ht wash

sy ste m is disa bled for 2 m inutes.

On vehicles fitted with ra in sensor 3, keep

the sensor area clean by operating the

wash system regularly.

Rear window wiper 3 and rear window

wash systems 3

Push stalk forwards to switch on.

The rear window w iper swipes in timed

interval mode.

The tailgate w ip er switches on

automatically when the windscreen wiper

is switched on and reverse gear is

engaged.

Push stalk forwards again to switch off.

The rear window wash system will remain

on for as long as the stalk is held in the

forward position.

The rear window wash system is

deactivated when the fluid level is low.

§ =Off

$ = Automatic wiping with rain sensor

Adjuster wheel right = High sensitivity

Adjuster wheel left = Low sensitivity

128 Lighting

Lighting

Exterior lights

Turn light switch:

In positions 8 and 9, the tail lights and

number plate lights are also on.

Control indica tor 8 – see page 100.

If the ignition is switched off with the

dipped beam or main beam on, the

parking lights illuminate 3.

Model variants with daytime running

lights 3: Parking lights are on when the

ignition is switched on and the light switch

is set to 7 or AUTO. Dipped beam is on

when the engine is running.

The daytime running lights switch off when

the ignition is switched off.

Follow the regulations of the country in

which you are driving when using daytime

running lights and front fog lights 3.

The rear lights of the Estate automatically

switch themselves off after 10 minutes if

the luggage compartment is open and the

vehicle is stationary.

Driving abroad – see page 136.

Exterior lights ........... ......... ................... 128

Main beam, headlight flash ......... ...... 129

Automatic dipped b eam activation 3 129

Turn signal lights ........................... ...... 130

Front fog lights > 3.............. ........ ...... 130

Fog tail light r .............................. ...... 131

Reversing lights............. ............. .......... 131

Haza rd warning lights........... .............. 131

Headlight range adjustment ? ......... . 131

Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 3 .. 132

Door-to-door lighting 3 ...................... 133

Parking lights ................ ....................... 134

Instrument illumination k,

information display illumination ...... 134

Courtesy lig ht ....... ................................ 134

Battery discharge p rotection.............. 136

Light covers................................ .......... 136

Headlights w hen driving abroad ....... 136

7 =Off

8 = Parking lights

9 = Dipped or main beam

129Lighting

Main beam, headlight flash

To switch from dipped to main b eam, pre ss

stalk forwards.

To switch to dipped beam, p ush stalk

forwards again or pull towards steering

wheel.

To activate the headlight flash, pull stalk

tow ards ste ering whee l. Ma in beam is

engaged for the duration of activation.

The blue co ntrol ind ic ator C is illuminated

when main beam or headlight flash is on.

Automatic dipped beam

activation 3

Light switch to AUTO: Dip ped beam

switches on or off automatically when the

engine is running based on outside light

conditions.

The exterior lights are turned off by

removing the ignition key.

For reasons of safety, the light switch

should always rem ain in the AUTO

position.

In poor visibility such as fog, turn the light

switch to 9.

130 Lighting

Turn signal lights

To activate, press stalk up or down.

After operation, the turn signal stalk

returns to its starting position.

If the stalk is moved past the resistance

point, the turn signal light remains on.

When the steering wheel moves back

towards the straight-ahead position, the

turn signal light is automatically

deactivated.

Tap signal: Move stalk to resistance point

and release to activate three flashes from

the turn signals when c ha nging lanes or the

like.

Move the stalk to the resistance point and

hold for the turn signals to flash longer.

Switch the turn signal off manually by

moving the stalk slightly.

Front fog lights > 3

The front fog lights can only be switched on

when both the ignition and lights are on.

Stalk up = R ight

Stalk down = Left

On = Press >, > illuminates in

instrument cluster

Off = Press > aga in or switch off

ignition or light.

131Lighting

Fog tail light r

The fog tail light can only be switched on

when the ig nition is on and dipp ed beam or

parking lights are on or if the light switch is

in the AUTO 3 position and dipped beam

is active.

The fog tail light on the vehicle is

deactivated when towing a caravan/

trailer.

Rev ers in g li ghts

Illuminate when reverse gear is engaged

and ignition is switched on.

Hazard warning lights

To activate, press button ¨, to deactivate

press button ¨ again.

To aid location of the pushbutton, the red

surface is illuminated when the ignition is

switched on. When the button is pressed,

its control indicator flashes in time with the

hazard warning lights.

The hazard warning lights switch on

automatic ally when the airbags are

trigg ered, and the central locking unlocks

all doors. Switch off hazard warning lights

with button ¨ .

Headlight range adjustment ?

Manual headlight range adjustment 3

With dipped beam switched on, adjust

headlight range in four steps to suit vehicle

load. Turn wheel against resistance and

click it to the required position.

Correct adjustment of the headlight range

reduces dazzle for other road users.

Automatic level control system 3 -

see page 204.

On = Press >, > illuminates in

instrument cluster

Off = Press > again or switch off

ignition or light.

132 Lighting

Vehicles without automatic level control

system

Vehicles with automatic level control

system 3

Autom atic headlight ra ng e adjustment 3

On vehicles with Xenon headlights, the

range of the headlights is adjusted

automatically based on vehicle load.

0 = Front seats occupied

1 = All se ats occupied

2 = All seats occupied and luggage

compartment load

3 = Driver’s seat occupied and luggage

compartment load

0 = Front seats occupied

1 = All se ats occupied

1 = All seats occupied and luggage

compartment load

2 = Driver’s seat occupied and luggage

compartment load

Adaptive Forward Lighting

(AFL) 3

On vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights, AFL

improves illumination of:

z Curves (curve lighting),

z Intersections and tight turns

(turn lighting).

Curve lig hting

The Xenon light beam pivots based on

steering wheel position and speed (from

approx. 6 mph / 10 km/h).

The headlig hts shine at an angle of up

to 15° to the right or left of the direction of

travel.

Turn lig hting

An additional light illuminates at certain

steering wheel settings (after approx. 90°),

turn signal settings and speeds (up to

approx. 25 mph / 40 km/h).

The light shines approx. 90° to the left or

right of the vehicle and approx. 30 m etres

to the front.

Mot or way lighti ng

At higher speeds and continuous straight

ahead travel, the dipped beam

automatically raises slightly, thereby

increasing headlight range.

133Lighting

Cont rol indica tor B

Flashing: Fault in syste m. The sy ste m is not

ready for operation.

If the curve lighting swivelling device fails,

the relevant dipped bea m is switched off.

The corresponding fog light is

automatically switched on for reasons of

safety.

Contact a workshop.

Flashing of control indicator B for approx.

4 seconds after switching on the ignition

rem inds you that the headlights have been

adjusted - see "Head lig hts when driving

abroad" on page 136.

Door-to-door lighting 3

The dipped beam a nd the reversing lights

illuminate for approx. 30 seconds after the

driver has exited the vehicle and closed his

door.

To activ ate

1. Switch off ignition.

2. Re move ignition ke y.

3. Open driv er’s door.

4. Pull turn signal stalk towards steering

wheel.

5. Close driver’s door.

If the driver’s door is left open, the lights will

go out after two minutes.

The light is switched off immediately b y

inserting the key into the ignition or pulling

the turn signal stalk again with the driver’s

door open.

134 Lighting

Parking lights

The front parking lig ht and tail light of one

side of the vehicle can be activated when

parking:

1. Set light switch to 7 or AUTO 3 .

2. Ignition off.

3. Move turn signal stalk all the way up

(right parking light) or down (left parking

lig ht ).

An acoustic signal sounds and control

indicator O illuminates briefly in the

instrument cluster to indicate activation.

Remove the ignition key before leaving the

vehic le.

To switch it off, sw itch on the ignition or

move the turn signal stalk in the opposite

direction.

Instrument illumination k,

information display illumination

Brightness can be adjusted when the

exterior lights are on:

Pre ss to re lease kn ob k and then turn it

clockwise or anticlockwise and hold until

the desired brightness is obtained.

Display mode 3 – see page 120.

Courtesy light

Front courtesy l ight

Illuminates automatically when the vehicle

is unlocked with the remote control, when a

door is opened or when the key is removed

from the starter switch after the ignition is

switched off.

Extinguishes a utomatica lly with d elay after

the doors are closed or immediately when

the ignition is switched on or the doors are

locked.

Front courtesy l ight

Manual operation from inside with doors

closed:

On = Press button c

Off = Press button c again

135Lighting

Front reading lights 3

Left and right reading lights are

individually operable. With ignition on:

Courtesy lig hts and rear read ing light s 3

Centre sw itc h position: The re ar courtesy

light illuminates together with the front one

when a door is opened.

The rear reading lights on the left and right

can be switched on separately. With

ignition on:

Entry lighting 3

After unlocking the vehicle, the instrument

and switch illumination as well as the

courtesy lights illuminate for a few seconds.

Illuminated mirror in the sunvisors 3

The lig hting switches on when the cove r is

opened.

Glov e compar tment lig hting

Glove compartment is illuminated when lid

is open and ignition on.

Cigarette lighter and ashtra y

ill uminati on 3

Illuminates when ignition is switched on.

Luggag e compartment light ing 3

Illuminates when the luggage

compartment/tailga te is opened.

Autom atica lly reg ul ated centre console

lig hting 3

Spotlight in housing of interior m irror.

Daylight-dependent, automatically

regulated centre console lighting with

ignition switched on.

On = Press button a.

Off = Press button a again

On = Switch position I

Off = Switch position 0

136 Lighting

Battery discharge protection

To prevent the battery from becoming

discharged, the courtesy light, reading

lights, luggage compartment lighting a nd

glove compartment lighting switch off

automatically 5 minutes after the ignition is

switched off.

Light covers

The inside of the light covers may become

misted up for a short period during

unfavourable weather conditions, heavy

rain or after washing the vehicle. The

misting disappears automatically after a

short time, but can be speeded up by

switching the lights on.

Headlights when driving abroad

The asymmetrical dipped beam increases

the field of v ision on the p assenger sid e of

the lane.

This causes glare for oncoming traffic if the

vehicle is driven in countries where traffic

drives on the opposite side of the road.

Do as follows to prevent glare:

Vehicles with halogen - headlight system

or Xenon headlight system without

Adapt ive Forward Lig ht ing (AFL) 3

Have the workshop c onvert the headlights.

Vehicles with Adap tive Forward Light ing

(AFL) 3

1. Open fusebox cover in engine

compartment - see page 250.

2. Insert any fuse (max i-fus e) 3 in slot 37.

Fuse assignment – see page 251.

3. Close fusebox.

4. Switch on ignition.

Then the AFL control indicator B flashes

for 4 seconds whenever the ignition is

switched on.

Control indicator B - see pages 104, 133.

137Infotainment system

Infotainment sy stem

Radio reception 3

Vehicle radio reception differs from

domestic radio reception:

As the vehicle antenna is relatively near the

ground, the broadcasting companies

cannot guarantee the same quality of

reception a s obtained with a d om estic

radio using an overhead antenna.

z Changes in distance from the

transmitter,

z multi-path reception due to reflection

and

z shadowing

may cause hissing, noise, distortion or loss

of reception altogether.

Infotainment system 3

The Infotainment system is operated as

described in the operating instructions.

Remote control on steering

wheel 3

The functions of the Infotainment system 3

and the information display can be

operated with the adjuster wheels and

buttons on the steering wheel.

Further information – see pages 111, 116

and the relevant operating instructions.

Radio reception 3.................. .............. 137

Infotainment system 3 ........................ 137

Remote control on steering wheel 3.. 137

Twin Audio 3 ....... ............. ................... 138

AUX input 3 ............................... ......... . 138

Electronic data acquisition at toll

sy ste ms 3.. ........................................ . 138

Mobile telephones and radio

equipment 3............................ .......... 139

138 Infotainment system

Twin Audio 3

Twin Audio provides rear seat occupa nts

with the opportunity to listen to a different

audio source than the one selected by the

driver on the Infotainment system 3.

Only an audio source that is not currently

active on the Infotainment system can be

controlled using Twin Audio.

Two he adphone connections are availab le,

with separate volume controls.

Further information is available in the

Infotainment system operating

instructions.

AUX inpu t 3

The AUX input is in the stowage

compartment in the centre console.

An external audio source such as a

porta ble CD player can be connected via

the AUX input using a 3.5 mm jack.

Keep AUX input clean and dry at all times.

Further information is available in the

Infotainme nt sy ste m ope ra ting

instructions.

Electronic data acquisition at toll

systems 3

In vehicles with heat-reflecting

windscreen

3 attach chipcard 3 for

electronic da ta record ing and fee payment

in black area of windscreen on left or right-

hand side behind the interior mirror -

see arrows in illustration. Attaching the

chipcard outside this area may cause data

record ing malfunctions.

Solar Reflect.

139Infotainment system

Mobile telephones and radio

equipment 3

The Vauxhall installation instructions and

the operating guidelines provid ed by the

telephone manufacturer must be observed

when fitting and operating a m obile

telephone. Failure to d o so could invalidate

the vehicle’s operating perm it (EU Directive

95/54/EG).

Recommended prerequisites for fault-free

operation:

z Professionally installed exterior antenna

to ob ta in the ma x i mu m range po ss ible.

z Maximum transmission power 10 Watt.

z Installation of the telephone in a suitab le

spot (see information on page 89).

Obtain advice on pred eterm ined

installation locations for the external

antenna and equipment holder and ways

of using devices with transmission power of

more than 10 Watts. We recommend that

you consult your Vauxhall Authorised

Repairer, who will have brackets and

various installation kits available as

accessories and w ill install them in

accordance with regulations.

A hands-free attachment without an

external antenna in mobile phone

standards GSM 900/1800/1900 and UMTS

must only be operated if the ma ximum

transmission power of the mobile phone

does not exceed 2 Watts w ith GSM 900 and

1 Watt in other cases. The operating

regulations stipulated by the manufa cturer

of the telephone and the hands-free

attachment must be complied with.

For reasons of safety, we recommend that

you do not use the phone whilst driving.

Even use of a hands-free set can be a

distraction whilst driving. Be sure to

observe any country-specific regulations.

9 Wa rnin g

Mobile phones and radio equipment may

cause malfunctions in the vehicle

electronics if they are op erated in the

vehicle without the external antenna

unless the above-mentioned regulations

are complied with.

Mobile phones that do not com ply with

the above-mentioned mobile phone

standard and radio equipment must only

be operated using an antenna that is

attached to the exterior of the vehicle.

140 Climate control

Climate control

Heating and ventilation system,

air conditioning system 3

Ventilation, heating and cooling 3 are

combined into one unit that is designed to

provide comfort regardless of the season,

weather or outside temperature.

When cooling 3 is activated, the air is

cooled and dried.

The heating unit heats the air a s required in

all operating modes depending on the

position of the temperature rotary knob.

The air supply can be adjusted to suit

requirements by means of the fan.

Vehicles without an air conditioning system

do not have buttons for cooling n,

air recirculation 4 or demisting and

defrosting V.

Air conditioning system 3 – see page 148.

Heating and ventilation system, air

conditioning system 3 ...................... 140

Automatic air conditioning system 3 141

Electronic Climate Control 3 ......... ...... 141

Air vents .. ........ ..................................... 142

Cooled glove compartment 3 ...... ...... 143

Heated rear window, heated exterior

mirrors ... ........ ............................... ...... 143

Heated front seats 3 ..................... ...... 144

Heated rear seats 3 ......... ......... .......... 144

Driver’s seat with climate control 3... 144

Heating and ventila tion system ... ...... 145

Air conditioning system 3 ......... ......... . 148

Automatic air conditioning system 3 150

Electronic Climate Control 3 ......... ...... 156

Auxiliary heating/ventilation 3 .......... 163

Air intake ..... ............. ............................ 166

Air outlet.......... .............. ....................... 166

Pollen filter .. ........................................ . 166

Note ......... ....................................... ...... 166

Maintenance ... ..................................... 167

141Climate control

Automatic air conditioning

system 3

Provides a comfortable interior regardless

of the weather, outside temperature or

season.

When an interior temperature is set with

the temperature control, the temperature

and amount of inflowing air are

automatically regulated. A uniform,

comfortable climate in the ve hic le is

thereby automatically obtained based on

outside climate conditions.

Automatic air conditioning system 3 –

see page 150.

Electronic Climate Control 3

Offers the greatest comfort in the vehicle

interior regardless of the conditions

outs ide.

To ensure a uniform and comfortable

climate in the vehicle, the temperature of

inflowing air, air-flow rate and air

distribution are a utomatically adapted

based on the climate conditions outside

the vehicle and the current temperature of

the vehicle interior.

The set values ap pear on the information

display.

Electronic Climate Control 3 –

see page 156.

142 Climate control

Air vents

Pleasant ventilation to the head area

controlled by the position of the

tem perature rotary knob.

To increase the air supply, set the fan to a

higher speed and set the air distribution

rotary knob to M.

Centre and side air vents (1)

To open air vent: Turn vertical adjuster

wheel up.

Adjust the direction of airflow by turning

the horizontal and vertical adjuster wheels.

To close the air vents, turn the adjustment

wheel fully downwards.

Windsc reen defroster nozzles (2)

Air distribution rotary knob to l or J: Air

flows onto windscreen and door windows.

Addit ional air vents

Additional air vents can be found beneath

the windscreen and the door windows, and

also in the footwell.

Rear air vents 3

To open air vent: Turn vertical adjuster

wheel all the way up.

Adjust quantity of air by rotating the

control wheel.

The airflow can be directed as desired by

tilting and swivelling the slats.

To close the air vents turn the adjustment

wheel fully downward s.

If the rear seats are unoccupied close the

rear nozzles to increase the air supply at

the front.

143Climate control

Cooled glove compartmen t 3

Cooled air is fed into the glove

compartment through a nozzle.

If glove compartm ent cooling is not

needed, turn the wheel downwards.

Heated rear wind ow,

heated exterior mirrors

With the ignition on, the rear window and

exterior mirror heating is switched on by

pressing button Ü:

LED in the button Ü illuminated:

Rear w indow and exterior mirror heating

turned on.

LED in the button Ü extinguished:

Rear w indow and exterior mirror heating

turned off.

Heating takes place with the engine

running and is switched off automatically

after approximately 15 minutes.

The heated rear window automatically

switches on if the diesel particle filter 3

is being cleaned.

144 Climate control

Heated front seats 3

Two knurled wheels beneath the centre air

vent for the left and right-hand seats.

Turn relevant wheel to set required heating

level.

Control indicator above adjustment wheel.

We do not recommend prolonged use of

the highest level for people with sensitive

skin.

To switch off, set wheel to 0.

Seat heating is operational when the

ignition is on.

Heated rear sea ts 3

Two buttons at rear of centre console in

front of the rear seats.

When the ignition is switched on, the

heating of the corresponding seat is

activated by pressing the button ß.

LED in the button ß on: Seat heating on.

LED in the button ß off: Seat heating off.

The outboard rear seats are heated.

Driver’s seat with climate

control 3

Knurled wheel at driver’s side below centre

air vents.

Move knurled wheel to required ventilation

or heating setting as per requirements.

Control indicator ab ove adjustment wheel.

We do not recomm end prolonged use of

the highest heating level for people with

sensitive skin.

To switch off, set wheel to 0.

Function only available with ignition

switched on.

145Climate control

Heatin g and ventilation system

Air d istribution

Setting with the left rotary knob.

Open the air vents when the rotary knob is

set to L or M.

Te m per atu re

Setting with the central rotary knob.

Airflow

Setting with the right rotary knob.

Four fan speeds:

The rate of airflow is determined by the

fan. The fan should therefore also be

switched on during a journey.

L To head area via adjustable air

vents, to footwell

M To head area via adjustable air

vents

l To windscreen and front door

windows

J To windscreen, front door windows

and footwell

K To footwell

Red area = Warm

Blue area = Cold

x Off

1-4 Selected fan sp eed

146 Climate control

Vent ilation

z For maximum ventilation in head area:

Set air distribution rotary knob to M,

op en all v en ts.

z For ventilation to footwell: Set air

distribution rotary knob to K.

z For simultaneous ventilation to the head

area and the footwell: set air distrib ution

rotary knob to L.

z Set the temperature to the desired

se tting.

z Switch fan on, adjust fan setting as

desired.

Heating

The amount of heat is dependent on the

coolant temperature and is thus not fully

attained until the engine is warm.

For rapid warming of the p assenger

compartment:

z Set air distribution rotary knob to desired

position, preferab ly position J -

see page 145.

z Turn the temperature rotary knob

clockwise as far as it will go (warm).

z Set the fan to speed 3.

z Open air vents.

Vehicles with Quickheat 3:

Depending on the outside temperature

and engine temperature, the passenger

compartment can be heated more quickly

by means of supplementary electrical

heating.

The auxiliary electric heater switches itself

on a uto ma tica lly .

The comfort and general well-being of the

vehicle occupants are to a large extent

dependent on a suitable ventilation a nd

heating setting.

To obtain temperature stratification in the

vehicle with a pleasant "cool head and

warm feet" effect, move the rotary air

distribution rotary knob to K or J, move

the temperature rotary knob to the central

position and open the centre air vents.

147Climate control

Heating the foot well

z Set air distribution rotary knob to K .

z Set the temperature rotary knob to the

re d zo n e .

z Switch on fan.

Window demisting and d efrosting

Miste d or icy windows, such as in dam p

weather, from wet clothes or when outside

temperatures are low:

z Move air distribution rotary knob to l.

z For simultaneous warming of the

footwell, set air distribution rotary knob

to J.

z Turn the temp erature rotary knob

clockwise as far as it will go (warm).

z Set the fan rotary knob to 3 or 4.

z Activate heated rear window Ü.

z Open side air vents as required and

direct them towards the door windows.

9 Warning

Disregard of the instructions could lead

to misting or icing of the windows and

subsequent accidents due to impaired

visibility.

148 Climate control

Air conditioning system 3

As a supplement to the heating and

ventilation system, the air conditioning

system cools and dehumidifies (dries)

inflowing air.

If cooling or dehumidification is not

desired, switch off cooling in order to save

fuel.

Cooling switches off autom atically at low

outside temperatures.

Cooling n

Operation only with engine running and

fa n switch e d o ff:

Control indicator in the button.

Air rec irculati on system 4

The air recirculation button 4 is used to

set the ventilation system in air

recirc ulation mode (control indica tor in

the button).

If fu me s or un pleasa nt od ours pe ne trate

from outside: temporarily switch on air

recirculation system 4.

On = Press n

Off = Press n a gain

149Climate control

The switched -on a ir re circulation syste m

reduces air replacement. The humidity

increases and the windows may mist up.

The quality of the interior air deteriorates

over time, which may cause drowsiness.

Comfort sett ing

z Set cooling n as desired.

z Air recirculation system 4 off.

z Set air distribution rotary knob to M or

z Set temperature rotary knob as desired.

z Sw itch on fan at desired speed

z Open air vents as required .

Temperature rotary knob in centre of

adjustment range: warmer air will flow into

the footwell and cooler air into the upper

zone, with warm er air coming from the side

air vents and cooler air from the centre air

vents.

Ma xim um cooling

Open windows and sunroof 3 briefly so

that warm air can escape rapidly.

z Cooling n on.

z Set air distribution rotary knob to M.

z Turn the temp erature rotary knob

anticlockwise as far as it will go (cold).

z Set fa n rotary knob to 4.

z Open all air vents.

The system will switch automatically to air

recirculation mode.

150 Climate control

Window demisting a nd defrosting

Misted or icy windows, such as in damp

weather, from wet clothes or when outside

tem peratures are low:

z Cooling n on, the air conditioning

compressor automatically switches itself

off at low outside tempera tures (icing).

z Press button V: The fan w ill

automatically switch to 4, air distribution

directed on to the windscreen.

z Turn the temperature rotary knob

clockwise.

z Open side air vents as required and

direct them towards door windows.

z Sw itch on heated rear window Ü.

To switch off, press button V again; the

air conditioning w ill operate at the settings

selected previously.

Automatic air conditioning

system 3

Provides a uniformly comfortable interior

regardless of the weather, outside

temperature or season.

To ensure a constant and comfortable

climate in the vehicle, the temperature of

the inflowing air and the air-flow rate are

changed automatically based on climate

conditions outside the vehicle.

Temperature changes due to external

influences, such as direct sunlight, are

automatically compensated.

9 Wa rning

Failure to follow the instructions could

lead to m isted or icy windows and

accidents stemming from impaired

visibility.

151Climate control

Autom atic m ode

Basic setting for maximum comfort:

z Set fan rotary knob to A.

z Set air distribution rotary knob to desired

position – see next column.

z Use rotary knob to set temperature to

22 °C (a higher or lower tem perature can

be set as desired).

z Air conditioning compressor activation –

see pa ge 152.

z All front air vents open. If desired, the

rear air vents also 3.

Deactivation of the air conditioning

compressor ca n reduce the level of comfort

and safety – see page 152.

Air distribution

Setting with the left rotary knob.

Intermediate settings are possible.

Open the air vents when the air distribution

rotary knob is set to L or M.

Te mpe rat ur e p res et

Setting with the centre rotary knob.

Set the rotary knob to a value between

17 °C and 27 °C. Intermediate settings are

possible.

The selected tem perature is m ainta ine d.

For reasons of comfort, temperature can

only be changed in small increments.

There is no temperature control for settings

below 17 °C (all the way left) or above

27 °C (all the way right). The air

conditioning system works at maximum

cooling or heating.

L To head area via adjustable air

vents, to footwell

M To head area via adjustable air

vents

l To windscreen and front door

windows

J To windscreen, front door windows

and footwell

K To footwell

152 Climate control

Airflow

Setting with the right rotary knob.

The fan sp ee d regulates the rate of airflow

that is needed to maintain the preselected

tem perature.

Select automatic mode for the highest level

of comfort.

When the fan is off, the air conditioning

compressor is also off.

To activate/dea ctivate air c ond itioning

compressor (cooling) n

Operation only with engine running and

fa n switch e d o ff:

Control indicator in the button.

When the cooling (air conditioning

compressor) is active, the air is cooled and

dehumidified. If cooling or

dehumidification is not desired, switch off

cooling in order to save fuel.

Cooling switches off automatically at low

outside temperatures.

1 - 4 Manual fan speed setting,

intermediate settings are possible

A Automatic fan speed control

x Fan off

On = Press n

Off = Press n again

153Climate control

Manual air recirculation mode

The air recirculation system minimises the

entry of outside air and the air in the

passenger compartment is circulated.

Press button 4 , control indica tor in

button.

The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air

recirculation mode. The quality of the

passenger compa rtment air deteriorates

which may cause the vehicle occupants to

feel drowsy. In operation without cooling,

the air humidity increases, so the windows

may mist up. Consequently, manual air

recirculation should only be run for short

periods of time.

To deactivate manual air recirculation:

Press button 4 ag ain. The control

indicator in the button extinguishes.

Ventilati on

z For m aximum ventilation in head area:

set air distribution rotary knob to M and

open all a ir vents.

z For ventilation to footwell: Set air

distribution rotary knob to K .

z For simultaneous ventilation to the head

area and the footwell: set air distribution

rotary knob to L .

z Set desired temperature.

z Set fa n rotary knob to A. The fan can

also be manually set: Set the rotary knob

to position 1 - 4. Intermediate settings

are also possible.

154 Climate control

Heating

The amount of heat is dependent on the

coolant temperature and is thus not fully

attained until the engine is w arm.

For rapid warming of the passenger

compartment:

z Set the air distribution rotary knob to the

desired position – see page 145.

z Set the centre rotary knob to the desired

temperature. We recommend a value of

about 22 °C.

z Set fan rotary knob to A. The fan can

also be manually set: Set the rotary knob

to po sition 1 - 4. Intermediate settings

are also possible.

Vehicles with Quickheat 3:

Depending on the outside temperature

and engine temperature, the passenger

compartment can be heated more quickly

by means of supplementary electrical

heating.

The auxiliary electric heater switches itself

on a uto ma tica lly .

The comfort and general well-b eing of the

vehicle occupants are to a large extent

dependent on a suitable ventilation and

heating setting.

To obtain temperature stratification in the

vehicle with a pleasant "cool head and

warm feet" effect, move the rotary air

distribution rotary knob to K or J, m ove

the rotary temperature rotary knob to

approx. 22° and open the centre air vents.

Ma ximum cooling for very hot interior

Open windows and sunroof 3 briefly so

that warm air can escape rapidly.

z Cooling n on.

z Set air distribution rotary knob to M.

z Set the temperature rotary knob to the

desired temperature.

z Set fa n rotary knob to A.

z Open all air vents.

155Climate control

The automatic air conditioning system

provides maximum cooling down to the set

value.

At settings below 17 °C (rotary knob all the

way to the left), the system continually runs

with maximum cooling. When the air

conditioning compressor is running, air

recirculation is automatically switched on.

Dem isting and defr osting the window s

Miste d or icy windows, such as in dam p

weather, from wet clothes or when outside

temperatures are low:

z Cooling n on - the AC compressor

deactivates automatically when outside

te mperatures are low (icing).

z Press button V: In fan rota ry knob

position A, the fan automatically

switches to the highest speed and air is

directed to the windscreen.

z Set temperature to maximum heating,

i.e. turn the centre rotary knob all the

way to th e right (28 °C ).

z Switch on heated rear window Ü.

To switch off, press button V again; the

automatic air cond itioning system will

operate at the settings selected previously.

9 Warning

Failure to follow the instructions could

lead to misted or icy windows and

accide nts ste mming from impa ire d

visibility.

156 Climate control

Electronic Climate Control 3

Provides the greatest amount of comfort in

the interior regardless of the weather,

outside temperature or season.

To ensure constant and comfortable

climate in the v ehicle, the tempe ra ture of

the inflowing air, the air-flow rate and the

air distribution are changed automatically

according to climatic conditions outside

the vehicle.

The air is automatically regulated in

accordance with the settings personally

selected for the driver’ s a nd front

pas senger’s side s.

Tem perature cha ng es due to exte rna l

influences, such as direct sunlight, are

automatically compensated.

Data is shown on the informa tion display.

Setting modifications are briefly shown in

the information display, superim posed

over the currently displayed menu.

The display can vary according to the type

of presentation – see page 108.

Electronic Climate Control settings are

stored in the vehicle key when the vehicle is

locked - see "Storing custom vehicle

settings in the vehicle key" - see page 28.

Different settings are stored for each

remote control. Use of a remote control will

activate the settings associated with it.

Manual settings e.g. operating without

cooling and a ir distrib ution c an be selected

using the menu - see page 158.

When cooling (air conditioning

compressor) is active, air is cooled and

dehumidified.

The pollen filter removes dust, soot, pollen

and spores from the inflowing outside air.

The automatic air recirculation system 3

has an air quality sensor 3 to detect

harmful ambient gases, in which case it will

switch automatically to air recirculation.

When set to automatic mode, Electronic

Clim ate C ontrol p rov id es the optima l

settings for almost all conditions. If

necessary, Electronic Climate Control

settings can be modified manually.

The Electronic Climate Control is only

operational when the engine is running.

Cooling (air conditioning compressor)

switches off automatically at low outside

temperatures.

FM [ T P] C Din

ᕃ

90.6

MHz

157Climate control

Autom atic m ode

Basic setting for maximum comfort:

z Pre ss AUTO button.

z Open all front air vents. If desired, the

rear air vents also 3.

z Air conditioning compressor activation –

see pa ge 160.

z Individually set temperature for the

driver’s and front passenger’s side to

22 °C using the outer knobs.

The temperature can be set higher or lower

as desired.

Different temperatures can be set for the

driver’s and front passenger’s sides.

Switching off the air conditioning

compressor (Eco app ears on the display)

can have a detrimental effect on comfort

and safety - see page 160.

All air vents (except the rear air vents 3 )

are controlled automa tically in automatic

mode. The front air vents should therefore

always be open.

Automatic air recircul ation system 3

The ventilation system is set to air

recirc ulation mode and interior air is

recirculated.

The automatic air recirculation system has

an air qua lity sensor to detect harmful

gases in the outside air, in which case it will

switch automatically to air recirculation.

At low outside temperatures and with the

cooling (air conditioning compressor)

switched off, automatic air recirculation

operation w ill be disabled. This prevents

the wind ow s from misting up. Switch

manually to air recirculation as necessary.

Activating/deactivating automatic air

recirc ulation system – see page 161.

Manual air recirculation mode –

see page 162.

158 Climate control

Temperature preset

Using the outer knobs, temperatures can

be individ ually set to values between 16 °C

and 28 °C.

For reasons of comfort, temperature can

only be changed in small increments.

Vehicles with Q uic kheat 3 :

Depending on the outside temperature

and engine temperature, the passenger

compartment can be heated more quickly

by mea ns of supplementary electrical

heating.

The auxiliary electric heater switches itself

on automatically.

If a temperature below 16 °C is set,

Lo appears on the display: the Electronic

Climate Control system runs constantly at

maximum cooling power. The temperature

is not regulated.

If a temperature above 28 °C is set,

Hi appea rs on the display: the Electronic

Climate Control runs constantly at

max imum heating power. The temp erature

is not regulated.

Temperature settings are stored when the

ignition is switched off.

Common temperature setting

Press the knob for the driver’s side. The

temperature for both the driver’s and front

passenger’s side can be set together using

the knob on the driver’s side.

Individual temperature settings

Press the knob for the front passenger’s

side. Temperatures can be set

independently of each other using the

knobs on the driver’s and front passenger’s

side s.

The temperature on both the driver’s and

front passenger’ s side are shown in the

display.

For reasons of comfort, the temperatures

cannot d iffer by m ore than 2 °C.

Manual settings

Under certain circumstances (e.g. iced or

misted windows), the functions of the

Electronic Climate Control can be modified

manually.

Electronic Climate Control system settings

can be changed via the centre knob, the

buttons and the menus shown on the

display.

Press the centre knob to call up the menu.

The menu for manual Electronic Climate

Control system settings appears on the

display.

FM [TP] C Din

ᕃ

90.6

MHz

Climate

Air distribut.

Autom. blower

Auto. recirc

159Climate control

The individual menu items are highlighted

by rot a tin g th e ce nt re kn ob and s e le cted

by pressing it. Selecting certain menus by

pressing the knob will open a submenu.

To exit a m enu, turn the centre knob left or

right to Return or Main and select.

Manual settings are stored when the

ignition is switched off.

Window demisting and d efrosting

Miste d or icy windows, such as in dam p

weather, from wet clothes or when outside

temperatures are low:

Press button V, control indicator in

button.

Temperature and a ir distribution settings

are m ade autom atically, the fan runs at a

high speed (fan speed is indicated on the

display) and the windows are quickly

cleared of moisture and ice.

The airflow can be increased or decreased

by turning the central knob.

To return to automatic mode: press

button V or AUTO.

Heated rear window - see page 143.

Auxiliary heating 3 - see page 163.

Air distribut.

9 Warning

Failure to follow the instructions could

lead to misted or icy windows and

accide nts ste mming from impa ire d

visibility.

FM [TP] C Din

ᕃ

90.6

MHz

160 Climate control

Acti vati ng and d eac tiva ting air

conditioning compressor

If no cooling or dehumidification is

req uired, switch the air conditioning

co mpr e ss o r o f f ( max im um e ne r gy sav ing s):

Highlight menu item AC from the manual

settings menu and select by pressing the

knob. Ecoappears on the display.

Inflowing air is neither cooled nor

dehumidified. This restricts the level of

comfort provided by the Electronic Climate

Control system . This may cause the

wind ow s to m ist up, for exa mple.

To activate cooling: Select m enu item AC

from the manual settings menu and press

to activate cooling.

Air distribut ion

Select menu item Air d istribut. from the

manual settings menu.

Make the desired settings in the Air

distribut. menu:

Return to a utomatic air distribution:

deactivate relevant setting or press

button AUTO.

Climate

Air distribut.

AC Air conditioning

Autom. blower on / off

 Auto. recirc

Up Air distribution towards

windscreen and front door

windows

Midd le Air distribution to vehicle

occupants via adjustable air

vents at front

Down Air distribution towards footwell

Air distribut.

161Climate control

Airflow

Turn the centre rotary knob clockwise or

anticlockwise (if no menu for manual

settings is displayed). The selected fan

level is indicated by x and numbers in the

display.

At speed 0 both the fan and cooling (air

conditioning compressor) are switched off.

To return to automatic mode: Press AUTO

button.

Fan c ont rol in autom atic mode 3

Fan regulation in automatic mode can be

modified.

Select menu item Automatic blower from

the manual settings menu and select the

desired fan control.

Depending on the setting, the maximum

airflow, and thereby the noise level, will

increase.

Switching autom atic air recirculation 3 on

or off

The automatic air recirculation system has

an air qua lity sensor to detect harmful

gases in the outside air, in which case it will

switch automatically to air recirculation.

Select menu item Auto. r eci rc from the

manual settings menu and switch it on or

off by pressing.

Switch to manual air recirculation as

necessary.

FM [TP] C Din

ᕃ

90.6

MHz

Automatic blower

Strong

Normal

Weak

Climate

Air distribut.

Autom. blower

Auto. recirc

Automatic

recirculation

air control at

bad outside air

162 Climate control

Manual air recirculation mode

The air recirculation system minimises the

entry of outside air and the air in the

passenger compartment is circulated.

Press button 4 , control indica tor in

button.

The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air

recirculation mode. The quality of the

passenger compartment air deteriorates

which may cause the vehicle occupants to

feel drowsy. In operation without c ooling,

the air humidity increases, so the windows

may mis t up. C onseq ue ntly , m anu al air

recirculation should only be run for short

periods of time.

To deactivate manual air recirculation:

Press button 4 again. The control

indicator in the button extinguishes.

Air conditioning with the eng ine not

running

When the vehicle is stopped and the

ignition is off, the heat or cooling power still

in the system can be used to condition the

passenger compartment, for example

when stop ped at a level crossing.

Pre ss AUTO button with the ignition off.

Residual air conditioning on will appear

briefly in the display.

The air conditioning will operate for a

limited period of time.

If necessary, the auxiliary heating 3 also

automatically switches on. Observe notes

on page 163.

To cancel air conditioning, press the AUTO

button.

Residual air conditioning on

163Climate control

Auxiliary heating/ventilation 3

If the engine is switched off, the interior is

heated or ventilated depending on the

values that have been set and the interior

tem perature.

The regulation is in accordance with the

most recent temp erature settings in the

Electronic Climate Control system –

see page 158. When the system is switched

on, the temperature setting can be varied

using the outer rotary knobs.

The air is directed to the windscreen and

the front door windows if the V button is

pressed before switching the ignition off.

Direct a ctivation

For immediate activation with the ignition

on, select menu item Par king heater and

then m enu item On from the manual

settings menu.

When the system is activated, the control

indicator in the AUTO button will

illuminate.

The system switches itself off automatically

after a maximum of 60 minutes, depending

on the values that have been set and the

interior temperature.

For early deactivation, press the AUTO

button or select menu item Pa rking heater

and then menu item On once again.

Climate

Air distribut.

Autom. blower

Auto. recirc

Parking heater

9 Warning

Do not switch auxiliary heater on in filling

stations or closed spaces – risk of fire or

injury.

Parking heater

Sta rt 1

Sta rt 2

Sta rt 3

Setting

164 Climate control

Sw itching on a t a pr ogramm ed time

Three programmed times can be stored for

switching on.

For safety reasons only one programmed

time for switching on can be active at any

one time. After the heating cycle has been

completed, the next required time for

switching on must be activated afresh.

To store a programm ed time for activation,

select menu item Parking heater from the

manual settings menu.

After menu item Pa rking heater the

current status will be shown.

To set a time, select menu item Setting.

Then select menu item Sta rt 1, Sta rt 2

or Start 3 and set the desired time.

Select the required time for programmed

switching on.

When the system is activated, the control

indicator in the AUTO button will

illuminate.

The system switches itself off automatically

after a maximum of 60 minutes depending

on the values that have been set and the

interior temperature.

To cancel air conditioning, press the AUTO

button.

To perform settings, the Parking heater

menu can be called up within 2 hours of

switching the ignition off by pressing on the

central rotary knob.

Par king heater

Sta rt 1

Sta rt 2

Sta rt 3

Setting

Parking heater

Start 1

Start 2

Start 3

Setting

Setti ng

Start 1

Start 2

Start 3

165Climate control

Remote control

The sy ste m c an also be switched on and off

directly using the remote control:

Whilst the control indicator is illuminated,

no further signal can be sent.

When the system is activated, the control

indicator in the AUTO button will

illuminate.

The remote control has a range of approx.

600 m. The range can be reduced by

obstructions between the sender and

receiver (e .g. walls) and by low powe r in the

battery.

The system switches itself off automatically

after a maximum of 60 minutes depending

on the values that have been set and the

interior temperature.

The auxiliary heating can be switched off

at any time by pressing the button §.

Deactivating an activated switch-on time:

1. Press button §.

2. Dela y of at least 3 seconds.

3. Press button § again.

If required, up to three additional remote

contro l u nits c an be prog ramme d. W e

recommend that you consult your Vauxhall

Authorised Repairer.

C ha nging the remote cont rol batt ery

Replace the battery immediately if the

range of the remote control starts to

become reduced.

Insert a pointed object into the opening in

the und erside of the remote control and flip

open the cover. Replace batteries

observing installation position. For battery

type – see page 307.

Always exchange all batteries at the same

time.

Make sure that you dispose of old batteries

in accordance with environmental

protection regulations.

On = Press button b, the control

indicator in the remote

control will illuminate.

Off = Press button §, the control

indicator in the remote

control will illuminate

166 Climate control

Air intake

The air intakes in front of the windscreen on

the far right and left sides of the engine

compartment must be kept clear to allow

air intake. Remove any leaves, dirt or snow.

Air outlet

Do not cover the air outlets when storing

items in the luggage compartment storage

compartments.

Pollen filter

The pollen filter cleans dust, soot, pollen

and spores from the air entering from

outside. The active carbon layer 3

eliminates m ost odours and harmful

ambie nt g ase s from the air.

Have the pollen filter replaced by a

workshop at the replacement intervals

specified in the Service Booklet.

Note

If the windsc reen is misted due to damp

weather, temporarily set the system as

described under "Window demisting and

defrosting" - see pages 147, 150, 159.

The cooling system 3 operates most

effectively with the windows and sunroof 3

closed. If the passenger compartment has

heated up considerably a fter a long period

in direct sunlight, briefly open the windows

and sunroof 3 so th at the h ot air can

escape quickly.

167Climate control

When cooling 3 (air conditioning

compressor) is switched on, condensation

forms, which is expelled from the underside

of the v ehicle.

At least one air vent must be open while

cooling 3 (air conditioning compressor) is

on in order to prevent the evaporator from

icing up due to lack of air movement.

Cooling switches off autom atically at low

outside temperatures.

When the auxiliary heating/auxiliary

ventilation 3 is switched on, the Vauxhall

alarm system monitoring of the vehicle

interior 3 is deactivated.

Auxiliary heating 3 consumes fuel (approx.

0.3 litres per heating process on average).

When the auxiliary heating 3 is switched

on, there may briefly be some smoke and

noise.

The auxiliary heating 3 only switches itself

on at outside temperatures of less than

approx. 20 °C and a t coolant temperatures

of less than approx. 80 °C.

In order to improve heating power and

ensure that the engine operating

temperature is reached quickly, auxiliary

heating 3 also switches on automatically

when driving if the outside temperature is

less than approx. 8 °C. This occurs

irrespective of stored auxiliary heating

switch-on times. Auxiliary heating switches

itself off automatically when the engine is

switched off, while the combustion air fan

continues running for approx. 2 minutes

(humming noise).

Maintenance

In order to ensure consistently good

operation, the air conditioning

compressor 3 must be switched on for

several minutes once per month

irrespective of the weather or time of year.

If the vehicle has an Electronic Climate

Control system, this is done automatically

during travel. Operation with cooling (air

conditioning compressor) is not possible

when outside temperatures are low. Every

6 m onths, the auxiliary heating 3 should be

operated for a few minutes at a preset

temperature above 22 °C.

On faults, contact a workshop.

168 Drivin g and op era tio n

Driving and operation

Easytronic 3

The automatic Easytronic transmission

permits manual (Manual mode) or

autom atic gearshifting (Automa tic m ode ),

both with automatic clutch control.

Transmission display

Shows the mode or current gear.

Ea sytronic 3 ............. .............. .............. 168

Automatic transmission 3 ........ .......... 176

Driving hints ......... ......... ....................... 184

Saving fuel, protecting the

environment ............................ ......... . 186

Fuels, refuelling ............. ............. .......... 188

Ca talytic converter, exhaust g ases.... 190

Drive Control System s ............... .......... 196

Brake system... ..................................... 208

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS u)........ 210

Wheels, tyres ... ..................................... 211

Roof racks 3 ............................... ......... . 218

Towing eq uipm ent 3 ........................... 219

Towing eq uipm ent with re movable

coupling ball bar 3 , Saloon /

Hatch 3 ..... ........................................ . 219

Towing equipment with pivoting

coupling ball bar 3 ............. ........ ...... 222

Ca ravan/trailer tow ing . ............. .......... 223

9 Warning

Disregard of these instructions m ay lead

to injuries or endanger life.

169Driving and operation

Starting the engine

Depress footbrake when starting the

engine. The engine can only be started

with the footbrake depressed. "N" appears

on the transmission display. If the

footbrake is not depressed the control

indicator j illuminates in the instrument

cluster, and "N" flashes in the transmission

display - the engine cannot be started.

Also the vehicle cannot be started if all

brake lights have fa iled.

It is not necessary to select the neutral

position before starting. If no gear is

engaged, the transmission automatically

shifts into neutral position (N) before

starting the engine. This can lead to a

slight delay when starting.

E asytronic op era tion v ia the se lector lever

Always move the selector lever in the

appropriate direction as far as it will go.

Upon release, it automatically returns to

the centre position. Pay heed to the

gear/mode indicator in the tra nsmission

display.

Move selector lev er toward s N

Neutral.

170 Drivin g and op era tio n

Sta rting-off

Depress the footbrake, release the

handbrake, move the selector lever to A,

+ or -. Easytronic is in Automatic mode and

first gear is engaged (second gear if the

Winter programme is active). "A" appears

on the transmission display.

The v ehicle begins to "creep" when the

footbrake is released.

It is also possible to start-off without

depressing the footbrake if the accelerator

pedal is operated directly after moving

the selector lever. If there is no immediate

acceleration or the footbrake is not

depressed, no gear is engaged and "A"

flashes. After a few seconds, the display

reve rts to "N". Re pe at p reviously d escribed

starting procedure.

In Automatic mode, selection of other

gears is automatic irrespective of d riving

conditions.

Move sel ect or lever towa rds A

Switch between Automatic and Manual

mode.

Manual gearshifting is possible in Manual

mode. The currently engaged gear

appears on the display.

If the engine speed is too low the Easytronic

will automatically shift to a lower gear even

in Manual mode. This prevents the engine

from stalling.

Move selector lev er toward s + or -

If a higher gear is selected when the

running speed is too low, or a lower gear

when the speed is too high, no shift is

effected. This prevents the engine from

running at too low or too high revs.

Gears can be skipped by moving the

selector lever repeatedly at short intervals.

Shift to a higher gear

Shift to a lower gear

171Driving and operation

If the vehicle is in Automatic mode, on

movement of the selector lever to + or -

Easytronic shifts to Manual m ode and

changes up or d ow n. The transmission

display shows the currently selected gear.

Move selector lever tow ards R

Reverse gear. Engage only when vehicle is

stationary.

Depress the footbrake, release the

handbrake and move the selector lever to

R. Rev erse gea r is eng aged. "R" ap pears on

the transmission display.

The v ehicle begins to "creep" when the

footbrake is released.

It is also possible to start-off in reverse

without depressing the footbrake if the

accelerator pedal is opera ted directly after

moving the selector lever. If there is no

immediate acceleration or the footbrake is

not depressed, no gear is engaged and "R"

flashes. After a few seconds, the display

reve rts to "N". Re pe at p reviously d escribed

starting procedure.

Electronical ly cont rolled driv ing

pr og rammes

z By m eans of delayed gear changing

(higher engine speeds) following a cold

start, the operating temperature

programme in Automatic mode quickly

and automatically brings the catalytic

converter to the temperature required

for optimum pollutant reduction.

z Adaptive programmes automatically

adapt gearshifting in Automatic mode

to suit the driving conditions, such as if

the vehicle is towing a caravan/trailer,

has a high payload, or is being driven on

inclines.

z Winter programme: Press button T –

see next page.

172 Drivin g and op era tio n

Winter progr amme T

In the event of difficulties starting-off on

slip pery roads, press button T ("A" and T

appear in the transmission display).

Easytronic switches to Automatic mode

and the vehicle sets off in second gear.

The Winter p rogram me is switched off by:

z Pressing button T again.

z Turning off the ignition.

In order to protect the Easytronic the

Winter programme autom atically switches

itself off at extremely high clutch

tem peratures.

If the v ehicle is switched to Manua l mode

while the Winter prog ramme is active, the

Winter prog ramme is interrupted. The

Winter programme resumes upon return to

Automatic mode.

Kickdown

Depress accelerator past resistance point:

transmission shifts to a lower gear

depending on engine speed. Full engine

power is available for acceleration.

During kickdown no manual gearshifting is

possible.

173Driving and operation

When the engine speed a pproaches its

upper limit, the transmission shifts to a

higher gear during kickdown even in

Manual mode.

Without kickdown this automatic shift is

not effected in Manual mode.

Engine braki ng

Automatic mode:

When driv ing downhill, Easytronic d oes not

shift into higher gears until a fairly high

engine speed has been reached. When

braking, Easytronic shifts down in good

time.

Manual mode:

To utilise the engine braking effect, select a

lower gear in g ood time when driving

downhill.

"Rocking" t he vehic le

If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle

to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole,

move the selector lever between R and A

(or + or -) in a repeat pattern while app lying

light pressure to the accelerator pedal. Do

not rac e the engine and avoid sudden

acceleration.

This applies only to the exceptional

circumstances mentioned a bove.

Manoeuvring the vehicle

To manoeuvre the vehicle back and forth

during attempts to park or in ga rage

entrances the creeping movement can be

utilised by releasing the footbrake.

Never actuate accelerator and brake

pedals simultaneously.

To prevent damage, Easytronic

disengag es the "creep function" a t

extremely high automatic clutch

temperatures.

174 Drivin g and op era tio n

Stopping the vehicle

In Automatic or Manual mode, when the

vehicle has stopped first gear (with Winter

mode engaged, second gear) is engaged

automatically and the clutch released. In R

reverse remains engaged.

When the engine is running, a gear is

engaged and the footbrake is not

depressed, a warning buzzer sounds when

the driv er’s door is opene d and the gea r

shown in the transmission display flashes

at a rapid rate. If the handbrake is not

applied, the vehicle creeps. Move the

selector lever to N and apply the

handbrake.

When stop ping on gradients, apply the

handbrake or depress the brake pedal. To

prevent overheating of the clutch, do not

increase engine speed to ensure smooth

idling when in gear.

In order to prevent damage to the

Easytronic the clutch is automatically

engaged at extremely high clutch

tem peratures.

Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy

period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level

crossings.

Vehicle storag e

Before leaving the vehicle:

z Apply handbrake,

z Remove ignition key.

The most recently engaged gear (indicator

in transmission display) remains engaged.

With N , no gear is engaged.

When the ignition is switched off the

Easytronic no longer responds to

movement of the selector lever.

Lock the vehicle. Otherwise the battery

may become discharged if the vehicle is

parked for long periods.

If the handbrake has not been applied, the

control indicator R flashes for a few

second s after the ignition is switched off.

With the engine off and the handbrake not

applied, when the driver’s door is opene d a

warning buzzer sounds and the control

indicator R flashes; switch on ignition,

engage gear, switch off ignition and apply

ha ndb ra ke.

Fault

Control indicator A illuminates in the

event of a fault in the Easytronic system. In

the event of serious faults, "F" also appears

on the transmission display.

It is possible to continue driving if only

control indicator A illuminates. Manual

mode can then no longer be selected.

If "F" also appears on the transmission

display, continued driving is not possible.

Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a

workshop. The self-diagnosis integrated

into the system allows rapid fault

identification.

175Driving and operation

Interrup tion of power supply

The clutch is not disengaged if the vehicle

battery is discharged and a gear has been

selected. The vehicle cannot move.

If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using

jump leads – see page 230.

If the cause of the power failure is not a

discharged battery, contact a workshop. If

the vehicle must be removed from flowing

tra ffic, release the clutch as follows:

1. Apply handbrake and switch off ignition.

2. Opening and propp ing up the bonnet -

see page 228.

3. Clean Easytronic around the cap

(see Fig. 17925 J) so that no d irt c an get

into the opening when the cap is

removed.

4. Rotate cap to slacken and remove by

lifting upwards – see illustration.

5. Turn the a djusting screw clockwise using

a flat-head screwdriver (vehicle tools 3 –

see page 238) until clear resistance can

be felt. The clutch has now been

disengaged.

Do not turn beyond the resistance, since

this can damage the Easytronic.

6. Fit cleaned cap ag ain. The cap must be

in full contact w ith the housing.

Towing the vehicle and starting the engine

is not permitted when the clutch has been

released in this way, although the vehicle

can be moved a short distance.

Contact a workshop immediately.

176 Drivin g and op era tio n

Automatic transmission 3

The automatic transmission allows

automatic shifting (Autom atic mode) or

manual shifting (Manual mode) to take

place.

The engine can only be started with the

selector lever in P or N. When starting in N,

depress the footbrake or apply the

handbrake. After the engine has started,

depress the footbrake before engaging a

gear. Do not accelerate while selecting a

gear. Once a gear is engaged and the

footb rake is rele ased, the vehicle "creeps".

Never depress the footbrake and the

accelerator pedal simultaneously. The

selected gear is shown in the transmission

display - see end column.

Selecting D puts the transmission in

Automatic mode.

If the selector lever is m oved to the left from

the D position, Manual mode is activated.

Gear changes can then be made manually

by moving the selector lever towards + or -.

Transmission display

Display of selector lever setting, gear and

mode.

9 Warning

Disregard of these instructions m ay lead

to injuries or endanger life.

P Pa rk po sition

R Reverse gear

N Neutral

D Automatic mode

1-6 Manual mode showing the gear

se lecte d

177Driving and operation

Selector l ever setti ng s P, R, N and D

(Automatic mode)

The selector lever can only be moved out of

position P or N w ith the ig nition switched on

and the footbrake depressed (selector

lever lock). In selector lever position N the

selector lever lock is activated after a delay

and only if the vehicle is stationary.

In positions P or N, the control indicator j

illuminates red in the selector lever

indicator, the selector lever is blocked -

see Fig. S 12547.

To engage P or R , press button on se lector

lever.

The engine can only b e started with lever in

position P or N . W hen position N is selected,

depress footbrake or apply handbrake

before starting.

Do not accelerate during the selection

procedure.

If the transmission fluid temperature is less

than -25 °C, the selector lever cannot be

moved until the fluid temperature reaches

-25 °C with the engine running (P or N

flashes in the transmission display for as

long as the selector lever is locked).

P Park position, front wheels blocked.

Only select with vehicle stationary

and handbrake app lied. "P" appears

on the transmission display.

R Reverse gear. Only select when

vehicle is stationary. "R" appears on

the transmission display.

N Neutral or idling position. "N"

appears on the transmission display.

D Drive position for norma l driving in 1st

to highest gear. "D" appears on the

transm ission display .

178 Drivin g and op era tio n

Acti veSelect (Manual m ode)

Shift the selector lev er from D first to the left

and then forwards or backwards.

If a higher gear is selected at too low a

speed or a lower gear selected at too high

a speed, there is no change. This avoids

revs that are too low or too high.

If the engine speed is too slow, the

tra nsmission a utomatica lly shifts to a lower

gear, but not if the gear was selected

below a certain speed.

If a higher gear is selected below a certain

speed a downshift does not ta ke place.

When engine speed is high, there is no

automatic shift to a higher gear.

For reasons of safety, kickdown also

functions in Manual mode – see page 180.

The selected g ear is shown in the

tra nsmission display – see page 176.

Electronical ly cont rolled driv ing

pr og rammes

z With adaptive programmes, shifting into

other gears is handled automatically

based on the driving style, e.g.:

+ Shift to a higher gear

- Shift to a lower gear

– Economical driving style: at slower

engine speeds.

– Adaptation to special driving

conditions still takes place, such as:

driving up a nd down hills, towing a

caravan/trailer, and with a heavy

load.

179Driving and operation

z Automatic neutral shift function

automatically sets the transmission to N

to reduce fuel consumption, e.g. at

traffic lights.

The automatic neutral shift function is

activated when the following occurs

simultaneously:

As soon as the footbrake is released and

the accelerator pedal is depressed, the

vehicle starts off in the usual manner.

z After a cold start, the operating

te mperature programme ensures that

the correct gear (increased engine

speed) is selected to quickly bring the

catalytic converter to the temperature

required for optimum pollutant

reduction.

z If the Continuous Damping Control is set

to SPORT mode 3, the shift times are

reduced and gear changes occur a t

hig her engine sp ee ds (not when cruise

control is active). The control indicator 1

also illuminates in the transmission

display - see page 176.

Continuous Damping Control, SPORT

mode 3 - see page 198.

z Winter programme: Press button T.

Control indicator T appears on the

tra nsmission display - see next page and

page 176.

– The selector lever is in Autom atic or

Manual mode.

– The footbrake is depressed.

– The vehicle is stationary.

– The accelerator pedal is not

actuated.

– The transmission fluid temperature

is above 0 °C.

180 Drivin g and op era tio n

Winter progr amme T

Press button T if you are having problems

starting-off on a slippery road surface.

To activate

The Winter programme can be switched in

Automatic mode (T illuminates in the

transmission display - see page 176). The

vehicle shifts to 4th gear.

To deactivate

The Winter programme is switched off by:

z pressing button T again,

z switching off the ignition,

z switching to Manual mode.

To protect against dam age, the starting-

off aid automatically cuts out at very high

transmission fluid temperatures.

Kickdown

Depress accelerator past resistance point:

transmission shifts to a lower gear

depending on engine speed. Full engine

power is available for acceleration.

For safety re asons, k ickdown is available in

both Automatic mode and Manual mode.

181Driving and operation

Engine braki ng

The automatic transmission automatically

selects the driving programm e with

optimal engine braking effect.

As needed, lower gears can also be

selected in M anual mode to increase

engine braking effect. 1st gear has the

greatest braking effect.

"Rocking" t he vehic le

If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle

to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole,

move the selector lever from D to R in a

repeat pattern while sim ultaneously

applying light pressure to the accelerator

pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid

sudden acceleration.

This applies only to the exceptional

circumstances mentioned a bove.

Manoeuvring the vehicle

To manoeuvre the vehicle back and forth

during attempts to park or in ga rage

entrances, the vehicle’s creeping

movement can be utilised by releasing the

footbrake.

Never actuate accelerator and brake

pedals simultaneously.

182 Drivin g and op era tio n

Stopping the vehicle

The selector lever can be left in the chosen

gear with the engine running.

When stop ping on gradients apply

handbrake or depress brake pedal. To

prevent overheating of the transmission,

do not increase engine revolutions to

ensure smooth idling while standing if a

gear has been selected.

Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy

period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level

crossings.

Before leaving the vehicle, apply

handbrake, then place selector lever in

position P and remove ignition key.

The ignition key can only be removed when

the selector lever is in position P.

If the selector lever is not in the P position

when the ig nition is sw itched off, control

indicator j in the selec tor lever indicator

strip flashes – see page 177, Fig. S 12547.

Shift the selector lever to P.

If the ignition key is not removed, the

battery may be discharged if the vehicle is

then left to stand for a lengthy period of

time.

Fault

In the event of a fault in the automatic

transmission, control indicator A

illuminates. The transmission no longer

shifts automatically. Driving can be

continued.

In Manual mode, 2nd gear and the highest

gear can be engaged. For some faults, only

the highest gear is available.

Only the highest gear is available in D in

Automatic mode.

183Driving and operation

Illumination of control indicator A can

also indicate a fault in the engine

electronics – see page 192.

For diesel engines

Z19DTL, Z19DT,

Z 19 DTH illum ination of control

indicator A could also indicate that the

diesel fuel filter must be drained of water -

see page 274.

Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a

workshop.

Interruption of p ower supply

If the vehicle battery is flat, the selector

lever cannot be moved out of position P

or N.

If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using

jump leads – see page 230.

If the cause is not a discharged battery,

unlock selector lever:

1. Apply handbrake.

2. Remove the ashtray – see page 94.

3. Pull out ashtray socket upwards.

4. Press the yellow catch downwards with a

screwdriver and move the selector lever

out of P.

5. Refit ashtray socket in centre console

and latch into position.

6. Refit ashtray.

Selec ting P or N again effects locking

again. Have the cause of the interruption

of power supply rectified by a workshop.

Sales designation – see page 28 4, 285.

184 Drivin g and op era tio n

Driving hints

The first 600 miles (1000 km)

Drive your vehicle at various speeds. Do

not use full throttle. Never allow the engine

to labour at low revs.

Make good use of all gears. Depress the

accelerator pedal a maximum of around

three quarters of the available pedal travel

in all gears.

Do not drive faster than three quarters of

maximum speed.

Do not brake unnecessarily hard for the

first 125 miles (200 km).

Never coast with engine not running

Many units will not function in this situation

(e. g. brak e serv o unit, elec tro-hydraulic

power steering). Driving in this manner is a

danger to yourself and others.

Brake servo unit

When the engine is not running, the brake

servo unit is no longer effective once the

footbrake has been depressed once or

twice. Braking effect is not reduced, but

significantly greater force is required for

braking.

Electro-hydraulic power assisted steering

If the power-assisted steering fails when

being towed with the engine switched off,

the vehicle can still be steered, but

considera bly more force is required.

Driving in mountainous terrain or with a

caravan/trailer

The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its

cooling p ow er is therefore independent of

the engine speed.

Since a considerable amount of heat is

generated at high engine speeds and less

at slower speeds, do not shift d ow n when

climbing hills whilst the vehicle is still coping

with the gradient in the higher g ear.

Diesel engines: On rising gradients of 10%

or more, do not drive faster tha n 20 mph

(30 km/h) in 1st gear or 30 mph (50km/h)

in 2n d g ear; with auto ma tic

transmission 3, do not exceed 25 mph

(4 0 km/h) in po sition 1.

Dr iving with a roof load

Do not exceed the permissible roof load –

see pages 218, 293. For reasons of safety,

distribute the load evenly and secure it

properly w ith retaining straps. Adjust the

tyre pressure to the load conditions. Do not

drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h). Check

and retighten the straps frequently.

Observe country-specific regulations.

Sw itching off the engi ne

When you switch off, fans in the engine

compa rtment may continue running for a

time to cool the engine.

If the engine temperature is very high, e.g.

after driving in mountainous terrain: allow

the engine to idle for approxim ately two

minutes in order to prevent heat

accumulation.

Vehicles with turbocharged engine 3

After running at high eng ine speeds or high

engine loads, operate the engine briefly

at a low load or run in neutral for approx.

30 se conds before switching off in order

to protect the turbocharger.

Sa ve energy – m ore miles / kilom et res

Please observe the running-in hints on the

previous page and the tips for energy

saving on the following pages.

Good, technically correc t and economical

driving ensures maximum d urability and

performance for your vehicle.

185Driving and operation

Overrun

The fuel supply is automatically shut off

during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is

being driven down long gradients or when

braking. To enable the overrun cut-off to

take effect, do not accelerate during

overrun and, if in manual transmission

mode, do not depress clutch pedal. To

prevent damage to the catalytic converter,

overrun cut-off is temporarily deactivated

when the catalytic converter temperature

is high.

Vehicles with turbocharged engine 3

Flow -g enerate d noises may be aud ible if

the accelerator is released quickly on

account of airflow in the turbocharger.

Engine speed

Drive in a low engine speed range for each

gear as much as possible.

Warming up

Allow the engine to warm up w hilst driving.

Do not w arm it up by letting it run at idling

speed. Do not apply full throttle until the

engine has reached operating

tem perature.

After a cold start, the automatic

transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 in

Automatic mode shifts into higher gears at

higher rpm. This allows the catalytic

converter to quickly reach the temperature

required for optimum pollutant reduction.

Correct gear selection

Transmission in neutral and without

revving in the lower gears. Stop-and-g o

tra ffic and driving at a speed too hig h for

the selected gear or transmission ratio

increases wear and fuel consumption.

Change dow n

When decreasing speed, shift down into

the next lowest gear. Do not slip the clutch

with a high-revving engine. This is

especially important when hill climbing.

Clutch operation

Always depress the clutch pedal hard to

the floor to prevent shifting difficulties and

tra nsmission damage.

When driving do not use the pedal as a

footrest; this will cause substantial clutch

wear.

Cooling fan

The cooling fan is controlled via a

therm oswitch and therefore only runs if

necessary.

The cooling fan automatically switches on

when the diesel particle filter 3 is being

cleaned depending on the engine.

Pedals

Do not place any objects in the footwell

which could slip under the pedals and

inhibit the pedal travel.

To ensure the pedal travel is uninhibited,

there must be no mats in the area of the

pedals.

Battery care

When driving slowly or when the vehicle is

stationary, e.g. in slow urban traffic, stop-

and-go traffic or traffic jams, turn off all

unnecessary electrical loads where

possible (e.g. heated rear window, heated

seats 3 ).

Depress clutch pedal when sta rting in order

to relieve the strain on the starter and the

battery.

186 Drivin g and op era tio n

Saving fuel, protecting the

environment

Trend-set ting technology

In the development and manufacture of

your vehicle, environment-friendly and in

the main recyclable materials were used.

The production methods used to make

your vehicle are likewise environmentally-

compatible.

Recycling of production wastes keeps the

circulation of material closed. Reduction of

energy and water requirements also helps

to conserve natural resources.

A highly advanced design means that your

vehicle can be easily disassembled at the

end of its working life, and the individual

materials separated for subsequent re -use.

Materials such as asbestos and cadmium

are not used . The refrigerant in the air

conditioning system 3 is CFC-free.

New painting techniques employ water as

a solvent.

End-of-life vehicle recovery

For detailed information on Va uxhall’s

on-going commitment to achieving an

environmentally susta inab le future,

including; design for recycling, take back of

End-of-Life Vehicle’s (ELVs) and the

recycling of ELVs, view

www.vauxhall.co.uk/recycling for details.

Energy and environm ent-c onsci ous

drivi ng

z High noise levels and exhaust em issions

are often a result of driving without due

attention to saving energy and

protecting the environment.

z You should therefore drive with energy in

mind "more miles / kilometres – less fuel".

Reduce the noise level and exhaust

emissions by adopting an environment-

conscious driving style. This is extremely

worthwhile and improves the quality of

life.

Fuel consumption depends to a great

extent on your own personal driving

style. The following hints are intended to

help you consume fuel at a rate that is as

close as possible to the specified levels –

see page 287.

Check your vehicle’s fuel consumption

every time you refuel. This facilitates

early detection of any irregularities

causing increased fuel consumption.

Warming up

z Full throttle and warming up at idle

speed increase wear, fuel consumption,

ex haust em ission, the am ount of

pollutant in the exhaust and the amount

of noise.

z Drive off as soon as possible after

starting.

Uniform speed

z Hectic driving significantly increases fuel

consumption, the exhaust emissions, the

proportion of pollutant in the exhaust

gas and the noise level.

z Do not accelerate and brake

unnecessarily. Drive at uniform speed,

watching the road.

Avoid freq uent starting-off and stopping

e.g. at traffic lights, in short distance

tra ffic and in queues of traffic by m eans

of clever planning. Select road s with

good traffic flow.

Idling

z The engine also consumes fuel when

idling.

z If you have to wait for more than one

minute, it is worthwhile switching off the

engine. Five minutes of idling

corresponds to approximately 0.6 miles

(1 km) of driving.

187Driving and operation

Overrun

z The fuel supply is automatically shut off

during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is

being driven down long gradients or

when braking – see page 185.

z To enable the overrun cut-off to come

into action and save fuel, do not

accelerate or d epress clutch pedal

during overrun.

Corr ect gear sel ec tion

z High revs increase engine w ear and fuel

consumption.

z Do not race your engine. Avoid driving at

high engine speeds.

Making use of the tachometer helps to

save fuel. Drive in a low engine speed

range for each gear as much as possible

with uniform engine speeds. Drive as

often as possible in top gear, select the

next higher gear as soon as possible,

and only change down when the engine

is no longer running perfectly smoothly.

High speed

z The higher the speed, the higher the

consumption and the noise level. At top

speed, you consume a great deal of fuel

and produce excessive noise and

exhaust emissions.

z Slightly releasing the accelerator pedal

results in distinct fuel savings with no

major loss of speed.

Drive at no more than around three

quarters of maximum speed and you will

use up to 50% less fuel, without losing a

great deal of time.

Tyre pressure

z Inadequate tyre pressure, leading to

higher road resistance, costs money in

two ways: for more fuel and increased

tyre wear.

z Regular checks (every 14 d ays) pay off.

Ele ctri cal loa ds

z The power consumption of electrical

equipment increases fuel consumption.

z Sw itch off all auxiliary electrical loads

(e.g. air conditioning 3, heated rear

window) when not needed.

Ro of rack s, sk i-ho lde rs

z Due to air resistance, a roof load

can increase fuel consumption by

approx. 3.5 gal./1000 miles (1 l/100km).

z Remove them if they are not being used.

Repair and m aintenance

z Improper repairs or adjustment and

maintenance work can increase fuel

consumption. Do not carry out work on

the engine yourself.

You may out of ignorance infringe

environmental law s b y not disposing of

materials properly.

Appropriate parts might not be recycled.

Contact with some of the materials

involved may pose a health hazard.

z We recommend that repair and

maintenance be entrusted to your

Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

Extr eme driving conditions

z Going up steep slopes, cornering, driving

on poor roads a nd winter driving all

increase fuel consumption.

Fuel consumption increases dramatically

in urba n tra ffic a nd at winter

temperatures, especially on short trips

when the e ngine operating te mperature

is not reached.

z Follow the hints given above to keep

consumption to a minimum under such

conditions.

188 Drivin g and op era tio n

Fuels, refuelling

Fuel consumption

Fuel consumption is determined under

specific driving conditions – see page 287.

Special equipment increases the weight of

the vehicle. As a result, they can increase

fuel consumption and reduce the specified

maximum speed.

For the first few thousand miles /

kilometres, friction between the engine and

transmission components is higher. This

increases fuel consumption.

Fuel for petrol engines

Normal c om mercial high-quality fuels with

a maximum ethanol content of 5% in

accordance with DIN EN 228 are suitable

(for catalytic converter see page 190, for

octane numbers - see pages 284, 285). The

quality thereof has considerable effect on

the performance, running and service life

of the engine. The additives mixed with the

fuel are extremely important. For this

rea son you must only refuel with high-

quality fuels containing additives.

Fuels with ethanol content greater than 5%

do not comply with DIN EN 228 and must

not be used unless the vehicle has been

specifically developed and approved for

these fue ls.

Fuel with too low an octane number can

cause pinking. Vauxhall cannot be held

liable for resulting damage.

Petrol with a higher octane number can

always be used.

The use of 91 octane fuel is not permitted

in vehicles with the Z 22 YH

engine or the

Vectra VXR.

The ignition timing adjusts automatically

to the grade of fuel used (octane

numb er) – se e pa ges 284, 285.

Use of petrol with an octane rating of 95

will ensure economica l driving.

Fuel with 95 RON will result in less power

and torque with the Vectra VXR.

Fuel for diesel engines

Diesel engines must be operated only on

commerc ia lly available diesel fuel me eting

the specifications of DIN EN 590.

Since January 2004, some oil companies

have mixed their diesel fuel with up to 5%

Bio fuel (FAME = Fatty Acid Methyl Esters)

like RME (Rape-Oil Methyl Ester). This is in

accordance with the current DIN EN 590

and does not harm the fuel/injection

sy ste m. The characteris tic s of a diesel fue l

mixed up with 5% Bio fuel (FAME) do not

differ from conventional d iesel fuel and do

not influence the vehicle’s driveability.

Important: Diesel fuel mixed with 5% FAME

according to DIN EN 590 must not be

confused with 100% Bio Diesel, which is not

to be used in Vauxhall engines.

The flow and filterability of diesel fuel are

temperature-dependent.

Diesel fuels with improved low temperature

properties are the refore a vailable on the

market during the winter months. Make

sure that you fill the tank with winter fuel

before the start of the cold weather

season.

Additive s can be used with diesel fuels with

winter properties that are guaranteed by

the manufacturer and when using diesel

fuel filters that are heated depending on

the outside temperature.

Diesel fuels must not be diluted with fuels

that are intended for petrol engines.

Fuel filler cap

When replacing the fuel filler cap, be sure

to use a genuine fuel filler cap for your

model to ensure full functionality. Diesel-

engined vehicles have special fuel filler

caps.

Sales designation – see page 284, 285.

189Driving and operation

Refuel ling

The tank disp lay updates more quickly if

the ignition is switched off during

refuelling.

Fuel filler neck at right rear side of vehicle.

The tank flap is locked together with the

doors – see page 30.

Open the tank flap.

Unscrew the fuel filler cap, remove and

suspend from the tank flap.

The fuel tank has a limiting system which

prevents overfilling of the tank.

Correct filling depends to a large extent on

proper operation of the fuel dispensing

pump:

1. Fully insert the pump nozzle and switch it

on.

2. After a n automatic shut-off, the nominal

capacity of the fuel tank is reached by

means of two metered top-ups. Insert

fuel dispensing p ump as fa r as it w ill g o.

To close, position the fuel filler cap a nd

rotate past the resistance until the cap

audibly clicks over the retainer.

Close fuel tank flap.

Wipe off a ny ov erflowing fuel immediately.

9 Wa rning

Care must b e tak en when ha ndling fue l.

Before refuelling, turn off engine and also

shut off external heaters with combustion

chambers (identified by stickers on tank

flap ). Switch off mobile phones.

9 Warning

Fuel is flammable and explosive. When

handling fuel or in the immediate vicinity,

avoid na ked flames or sparks. Do not

smoke. This also applies where the

presenc e of fuel is revealed b y its

characte ristic smell. If fuel odours occur in

the vehicle, have a workshop elim inate

the fault immediately.

190 Drivin g and op era tio n

Catalytic converter, exhaust

gases

Ca talytic conv erter for petrol engines

Leaded fuel will damage the catalytic

converte r and parts of the elec tronic

system, rendering them inoperative.

Use of high-quality fuels other than those

specified on page 188 (e.g. LRP

) could

damage the catalytic converter.

Damage to the catalytic converter or the

vehicle may result if the following points

are not observed:

z On ignition faults, uneven running after

cold start, a clear drop-off in engine

power or other unusual operating

symptoms which could indicate a fault in

the ignition system, contact a workshop

immediately. Continue driving if

necessary for a short time at low speed

and low revs.

Irregular engine running and a loss of

engine power when the Electronic

Stability Program me (ESP®

Pl us

3) comes

into action are the result of operating

conditions and are therefore of no

significance – see page 196.

z If unburned fuel enters the catalytic

converter, this may result in overheating

and irreparable damage to the catalytic

converter.

You should therefore avoid

unnecessarily long use of the starter

when starting-off, running the tank dry

(an irregular fuel supply will lead to

overheating) and starting the engine by

pushing or towing.

LRP = Lead Replacement Petrol.

191Driving and operation

z If the control indicator Z for exhaust

gases fla shes, slow down until the

flashing stops and the control indicator

illuminates. Contact a workshop for

assistance immediately. Control

in dica to r Z for exhaust gases –

see page 192.

Cata lytic converter for d iesel engines

Damage to the catalytic converter or the

vehicle may result if the following points

are not observed:

z On uneven running, a clear drop-off in

engine power or othe r unusual operating

symptoms, contact a workshop

immediately. Continue driving if

necessary for a short time at low speed

and low revs.

Irregular engine running and a loss of

engine power when the Electronic

Stability Program me (ESP®

Pl us

3) comes

into action are the result of operating

conditions and are therefore of no

significance – see page 196.

C ontrolling exhaust emission

Some of the damaging substances

in the exhaust such as ca rbon

monoxide (CO), hydrocarbons (HC)

and nitrous oxides (NO

) are reduced

to a minim um by making s tru ctural

changes – mainly in the injection system

and the ignition system in conjunction

with the catalytic converter.

192 Drivin g and op era tio n

Control indicator Z for exhaust

Illuminates when the ignition is switched on

and during the start attempt. Extinguishes

shortly after the engine starts running.

Illuminated with the engine running

indicates a fault in the exhaust gas

cleaning system . The permitted em issions

may be exceeded . Contact a workshop

immediately.

Flashing with the engine running indicates

a fault which could lead to catalytic

converter damage. You may continue

driving without damage if you back off

until flas hing stops an d the contro l

indicator illuminates. Contact a workshop

immediately.

Control indicator A for engine elec tronics

Illuminates for a few seconds after the

ignition is switched on.

If it illuminates when the engine is running,

there is a fault in engine or transmission

electronics. The electronic system switches

to an emergency running programme. Fuel

consumption may be increased and the

driveability of the vehicle may be impaired.

193Driving and operation

In some c ases, faults can be eliminated by

switching off the engine and restarting. If

the control indicator illuminates again

when the engine is running, contact a

workshop to eliminate the ca use of the

fault.

If it illuminates briefly, but does not recur, it

is of no significance.

If A illuminates, this may also mean water

in the diesel fuel filter in the engines

Z19DTL, Z19DT and Z19DTH. Where

ne cessary, have the fuel filter insp ecte d by

a workshop for any residual water.

If it flashes after the ignition is switched on,

there is a fault in the immobiliser system.

The engine cannot be started.

See page 27.

Exhaust gases

During the first drive sm oke m ay de ve lop

because of wax and oil evaporating on the

exhaust system. Park the vehicle in the

open for a while after the first drive and

avoid inhaling the fumes.

Sales designation – see page 284, 285.

9 Wa rnin g

Engine exhaust gases contain poisonous

carbon monoxide, w hich is colourle ss and

odourless and could be fatal if inhaled.

If exhaust gases penetrate the vehicle

interior, open a window and contact a

workshop.

Avoid driving with an open luggage

compartment. Otherwise, exhaust gases

could penetra te the interior.

194 Drivin g and op era tio n

Diesel p artic le fi lter 3

The d iesel pa rticle filter system remove s

polluting soot particles out of the engine

exhaust gases. The system includes a self-

cleaning function that operates

automatically whilst driving. The filter is

cleaned by burning the trapped soot

particles at a high temperature. There ma y

be an increase in fuel consumption,

exhaust smell, and engine cooling fan

operation 3 during the self-cleaning

operation.

The self-cleaning function cannot operate

automatically during certa in driving

situations where the engine does not reach

its normal operating temperature. An

example of this would be driving only short

distances in cold weather. If the filter needs

cleaning and recent driving situations did

not allow the function to automatically

op erate, then the control indicator ! will

flash. If this occurs, then you may continue

to drive the vehicle normally. The vehicle

will not be damaged and does not require

se rvice.

The self-cleaning function will

automatically operate whilst driving after

the engine has reached its normal

operating temperature. The control

indicator ! will continue to flash until the

self-cleaning op eration is complete. This

ma y take up to 20 minutes of driving. The

time will be shorter at higher vehicle

speeds. If the vehicle is not moving for

more than a few minutes, then the self-

cleaning function will not operate.

Operation will continue when driving

re sume s.

195Driving and operation

We recommend that you do not turn the

ignition off until the self-cleaning opera tion

is complete. If you must turn the ignition off

before the operation is complete, then the

operation will a utomatically resume when

driving the next time and after the engine

has reached its normal operating

tem perature.

The control indicator ! extinguishes as

soon as the self-cleaning operation is

complete.

Maintena nce

Have all maintenance work carried out at

the intervals specified. We recommend

that you entrust this w ork to your Vauxhall

Authorised Repairer, who has proper

equipment and trained personnel

available. Electronic testing systems permit

rapid diagnosis and remedy of faults. This

way you can be certain that all

components of the vehicle’s electrical,

injection and ignition systems operate

correctly, that your vehicle has a low level

of pollutant emission and that the catalytic

converter system will have a long service

life.

You are thereby making an important

contribution towards keeping the air clean

and compliance with emissions legislation.

Checking and adjustment of the fuel-

injection and ignition systems is part of the

scope of inspection. For this reason you

should have all maintenance work carried

out at the intervals specified in your Service

Booklet.

196 Drivin g and op era tio n

Drive Control Systems

Interac tive Driving System (IDS+) 3

The IDS + combines the sensors a nd control

units of the Electronic Stability Prog ramme

(ESP®

Plus

), the Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) and Continuous Damping Control

(CDC). This provides both excellent driving

dynam ics and greater safety.

Electronic Stab ility Program me

(E SP ®

Pl us

) 3

ESP®

Plus

improves driving stability when

necessary in any driving situation

regardless of the type of road surface or

tyre grip. It also prevents the drive wheels

from spinning.

The system monitors vehicle movements.

As soon as the vehicle starts to swerve

(understeers/oversteers) engine output is

reduced (the sound of the engine cha nges)

and individual wheels are specifically

braked. This considerab ly improves the

driving stability of the vehicle on snow and

ice and on wet or slippery road surfa ces.

ESP®

Pl us

is ready for operation as soon as

the ignition is switched on and c ontrol

indicator v ex ting uishes .

Control indicator v flashes when ESP®

Plus

is in action.

The vehicle is now in a critical situation;

ESP®

Pl us

allows you to keep control of the

vehicle and reminds you to match your

speed to the road conditions.

9 Wa rnin g

Do not let this special safety feature

tempt you into taking risks when driving.

Traffic safety can only be achieved by

adopting a responsible driving style.

197Driving and operation

Control indicator v

Illuminates for a few seconds when the

ignition is switched on. The system is now

ready for operation.

Flashing during driving:

This shows the system has come into

action. The engine output may be reduced

(the sound of the engine changes) and the

vehicle may be braked automatically to a

small degree.

Illum inates whilst driving:

The system is switched off or a fault has

occurred. The vehicle can continue to be

driven. However, driving stability may

worsen depending on the nature of the

road surface.

Switch on ESP®

Plus

again, or have the

cause of the fault rectified by a workshop.

The system’s integrated self-diagnostics

allows faults to be quickly remedied.

Switching off 3

ESP®

Pl us

can be deactivated by pressing

button v 3.

Deactivation is only possible up to a speed

of 40 mph (60 km/h) and is indicated by

illumination of control indicator v in the

instrument cluster.

Pressing the v button again or turning on

the ignition switches ESP®

Plus

on again.

198 Drivin g and op era tio n

Continuous Damping Control 3 (CDC)

Normal mode

CDC automatically adapts vehicle

damping to the current driving situation

and road conditions.

The system continually monitors wheel and

vehicle movements and immediately

modifies the damping of e ach shock

absorber. Chassis calibration is optimally

adapted to the driving situation and road

conditions.

Continuous Damping Control is always in

normal mode with the ignition is switched

on. If desired, the system can be switched

to SPORT mode.

In SPORT mode, the damping c ontrol is

adapted to a sportier driving style, among

other things. This adaptation results in a

"harder" suspension setting.

SPORT mode

When driving in SPORT mode, the

damping, steering 3 (no t for en gin e s

Z28NEL/NET)

, throttle application and -

for automatic transmissions 3 - the shifting

points are changed.

Damping and steering 3 become more

direct and provide better contact with the

road surface. The engine reacts more

quickly to accelerator movements.

With automatic transmission 3 the shift

tim es are reduced and gear changes occur

at higher engine speeds (not when cruise

control 3 is a ctive).

Activating SPORT m ode

Press the SPORT button. The LED in the

button illuminates.

In vehicles with automatic transmission 3

the control indicator 1 also illuminates in

the transmission display.

If the Winter programme 3 has been

switched on (vehicles with automatic

transmission 3) SPORT mode

cannot be activated.

Winter programm e - see page 180.

Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.

199Driving and operation

Deactivating SPORT mode

Briefly press the SPORT button again. The

LED in the button extinguishes. The

Continuous Damping Control system

resumes Normal mode.

SPORT mode is switched off by switching

off the ignition or switching off the Winter

programme 3 (vehicles with automatic

transmission 3).

Winter programme - see page 180.

Control indica tor u for Continuous

Damping Control or SPORT mode fault

Illum inate s for a few se cond s a fte r the

ignition is switched on. If the control

indicator does not go out, or if it illuminates

whilst driving, there is a fault in the

Continuous Damping Control system or

SPORT mode. The system is not ready for

operation. Have the cause of the fault

rectified by a workshop.

The system’s integrated self-diagnostics

allows faults to b e quickly remedied.

200 Drivin g and op era tio n

Cruise control 3

Cruise control can store and maintain

speeds of approx. 20 to 125 mph

(30 to 200 km/h). Deviation from the saved

speed is possible on uphill or downhill

inclines.

For safety reasons the cruise control

cannot be activated until the footbrake

has been depressed once.

Cruise control is operated with

buttons m , g, and § on the turn

signal stalk.

Do not use the cruise control if it is not

advisable to maintain a constant speed

(e.g. in situations presenting a danger to

yourself and other road users, in heavy

traffic or on winding, slippery or greasy

roads).

With automatic transmission 3, only use

cruise control in D or in Automatic mode

with Easytronic 3.

When the cruise control is active, reaction

tim es ma y b e increased due to the d ifferent

position of the feet.

Control indicator m

Illuminates for a few seconds when the

ignition is switched on. The system is now

ready for operation.

When driving, control indicator m will

illuminate as soon as the system is switched

on.

9 Warning

Even with cruise control activated, the

driver has full responsibility for

maintaining an appropriate speed.

Disregard of these instructions could lead

to injury or danger to life.

201Driving and operation

To activate

Briefly press button m: the curre nt spee d is

stored and maintained. The accelerator

pedal can be released.

Vehicle speed can be increased by

depressing the accelerator pedal. When

the accelerator pedal is released, the

previously stored speed is resum ed.

Increase

W ith cruise control activ e, hold down

button m or briefly press it repeatedly:

speed is increased continuously or in steps

of 1.2 mph (2 km/h) without using the

accelerator pedal.

When button m is released the current

speed is stored and maintained.

Decelerate

With cruise control active, hold down

button g or briefly press it repeatedly:

speed is reduced continuously or in steps

of 1.2 mph (2 km/h).

Whe n button g is released the current

speed is stored and maintained.

To deactivate

Briefly press button §: C ruis e contro l is

switched off, control indicator m

extinguishes and the vehicle slowly

decelerates. To continue driving, depress

the accelerator pedal in the usual manner.

For reasons of safety, cruise control

deactivates under certain d riving

conditions.

For example:

z if the vehicle’s speed drops below

approx. 20 mp h (30 km/h), or

z if the brake pedal is depressed, or

z if the clutch pedal is depressed, or

z if the selector lever of automatic

transmission 3 or Eas ytronic 3 is in N.

Resuming the stored speed

Briefly press button g at a speed above

20 mph (30 km/h): the speed selected

before the cruise control w as switched off is

resumed.

The stored speed value is deleted when the

ignition is switched on.

202 Drivin g and op era tio n

Parking distance sensors 3

The parking distance sensors mak e reve rse

parking easier by measuring the distance

between the vehicle and an obstacle, and

giving a n acoustic signal in the passenger

compartment.

The sy ste m re giste rs dis tance b y me ans of

four sensors in each of the front and rear

bumpers.

To activate

With the ignition switched on, the front and

rear parking distance sensors are

automatically activated when reverse gear

is engag ed.

The parking distance sensors can also be

activated at speeds of less than 15 mph

(25 km/h) b y pressing the r button on

the instrument panel.

An illuminated LED a nd an acoustic signal

indicate that it is ready for operation.

203Driving and operation

If the vehicle approaches an obstacle to

the front or rea r, a series of signals is

audible in the vehicle interior. The interval

be tween the signals become s shorter a s

the d istance is reduced. If the distance is

less than 30 cm, the signal will b e

continuous.

To deactivate

To deactivate the system, press button r

again, the LED in the button w ill go dark.

The system switches itself off automatically

when the forwards speed exceeds approx.

15 mph (25 km/h).

Control indica tor r

Illuminates:

Fault in system. The system is not

op erational. Have cause of fault remed ied

by a workshop. The system’s integrated

self diagnostics allows faults to be quickly

re me died.

Flashes:

The fault is due to sensors obstructed with

snow or ice . The se nsors must be

undamaged a nd free of dirt, snow and ic e.

Interference due to external sources of

ultra sound (e.g. pneumatic drills, rota ry

machines). Once the source of interference

is removed, the system will operate

normally.

Caravan/trailer towing equipment 3,

caravan/trailer towing

The system automatically detects if a

towbar is properly fitted to the vehicle.

When towing, inserting the caravan/trailer

plug in the socket automatically switches

off the parking distance sensors for the

rear.

Fitting rear load racks 3

Rear load racks, e.g. bicycle racks, fitted

near the sensors could disrupt the system.

9 Wa rning

Under certain circumstances, various

reflective surfaces on objects or clothing

as well as external noise sources may

cause the system to fail to detect

obstacles. For this reason, care must be

taken when reversing even if the parking

distance sensors are operational. This is

of partic ular importa nce when in the

vicinity of pedestrians.

204 Drivin g and op era tio n

Autom atic l evel control 3

Automatic level control makes it possible to

keep the height of the vehicle constant

when subjected to different loads in the

rear (e.g. when towing a caravan/trailer).

This significantly improves driving

conditions.

The vehicle is automatically raised at the

rear, increasing the spring travel and

ground clearance.

The automatic level control system is

activated after approx. 2 miles (3 km),

depending on the vehicle loading and the

nature of the road surface.

Headlight range adjustment –

see p age 131.

Do not use full load in the event of faults.

Have the cause of the fault rectified

straight awa y by a workshop.

Tyre pressure monitoring system 3

The tyre pressure monitoring system

continuously monitors the pressure of all

four tyres while the vehicle is being driven.

A pressure sensor is integrated in each

whe el. O nce each minute, the pressure of

each tyre is sent to a control unit for

comparison. if the system detects one or

more pressure differences, control

indicator w illuminates or flashes red. In

vehicles with check control 3, the exact

pressure of the tyre in question appears on

the information display.

In vehicles with Graphical Information

Display 3 or Colour Information Display 3

and trip c om puter 3, current tyre pressures

can be shown in the information display.

For the system to be operational, all wheels

must be equipped with pressure sensors

and all tyres must be inflated to the

prescribed pressure. The tyre pressure

monitoring system automatically detects

if the vehicle is being d riven with a load of

up to 3 persons or a full load.

205Driving and operation

Once the ignition is switched on, the system

is operational and w ill continuously

monitor the tyre pressures at speeds of

approx. 20 mph (30 km/h) and above.

Tyre pressure – see pages 213, 299.

Display of current tyre pressure 3

Select menu item Tyresfrom the Board

Comp uter menu.

The current pressure of each tyre is

displayed.

Control indicator w in red as w arning

message

Illumination in red whilst driving indicates

deviating tyre pressure.

Indicator illuminates red:

Minor tyre pressure difference; slow down.

Check tyre pressure at next opportunity

with a suitable gauge and correct if

necessary.

Indicator flashes red:

Considerable pressure difference or direct

loss of pressure. Stop imm ediately and

check tyre and tyre pressure. Fit spare

wheel if necessary - see pages 236, 238.

9 Wa rning

The tyre pressure monitoring system does

not replace manual checks with a

suitable gauge.

Check tyre pressure s a t least ev ery

14 days and prior to any long journey;

the tyres should be checked when cold.

Don’t forget to check the spare 3.

Ü Board Computer

BC 1

BC 2

Timer

Tyres

206 Drivin g and op era tio n

Warning messages in the

Graphical Information Display 3 or

Colour Information Display 3

In the model variant with check control 3

differing tyre pressures whilst driving are

indicated by messages on the information

display. The message appears in

abbreviated form depending on the model

variant.

For exa mple, the following messages c an

be displayed:

A graphic 3 indica ting the lef t re a r t yre is

shown together with the current tyre

pressure: Slight pressure deviation. Reduce

speed. Check pressure at next op portunity

with appropriate gauge and correct if

necessary.

On the Colour Information Display this

report will app ear in yellow.

A diagram 3 appears at the same time,

marking the front left tyre and showing the

current tyre pressure: Considerable

pressure difference or direct loss of

pressure. Exit flow of traffic as soon

as possible without obstructing other

vehicles, stop and check tyre and tyre

pressure. Fit spare wheel if necessary -

see pages 236, 238.

On the Colour Information Display this

report will appear in red.

Acknowledgem ent of warnings –

see page 116.

Navi active

Tyre pressure

Check rear

left tyre

(value in bar)

Navi active

Attention!

Fron t left tyre

pressure loss

(value in bar)

207Driving and operation

Control indicator w in yellow as fault

message

If control indicator w illuminates yellow

whilst driving, there is a fault in the tyre

pressure m onitoring system. Fitting a wheel

without a pressure sensor (e.g. the spare

wheel 3) w ill also generate a fault in the

system. Have the cause of the fault

rem edied by a workshop. The system’s

integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to

be quickly remedied.

General information

The tyre pressure monitoring system is not

ready for operation if the em erge nc y/spare

wheel is used and is not fitted with a

pressure sensor; the control indica tor w

illuminates yellow. The tyre pressure

monitoring system remains operational for

the other three wheels.

If you use a complete set of wheels which

are not fitted with sensors for the tyre

pressure monitoring system, e.g. four

winter tyres or aftermarket tyres of a

different size, no fault message will be

displayed. The tyre pressure monitoring

sy ste m is not ready for operation.

Sensors for the tyre pressure monitoring

system can be retro-fitted by a workshop

up on re qu es t.

W hen m anually ch ec kin g tyre pre ss ure with

a pressure gauge, screw the adapter onto

the valve. Tyre pressure – see page 213.

Every time a tyre is changed, the valve

inserts and tyre pressure monitoring

system sealing rings must be replaced

by a workshop.

The use of commercially available liquid

filled run-flat systems or repair kits can

impair the function of the system.

Vauxhall-approved systems can be used.

Radio transmitters (e.g. radio headphones,

walkie-talkies) operated in the area could

cause inte rference in the ty re pre ssure

monitoring sy ste m.

208 Drivin g and op era tio n

Brake system

The effectiveness of the brakes is an

important factor for traffic safety.

To improve effectiveness, do not brake

unnecessarily hard for the first 125 miles

(200 km) after new brake pads have been

fitted.

Brake pad wear must not exceed a

specified limit. Regular maintenance as

detailed in the Service Booklet is therefore

of the utmost importance for traffic safety.

Have worn brake pa ds replaced by a

workshop.

Pads that have been tested and approved

guarantee optimum bra ke performance.

Brake assist

If the brake pedal is slammed on, the

vehicle is automatically braked with

maximum brake force amplification in

order to achieve the shortest possible

braking distance when full-on braking

occurs (braking assist).

Maintain steady pressure on the brake

pedal for a s long as full-on braking is to

continue. When the brake pedal is

released, the maximum brake force

amplification is taken away.

Adapt ive brake light

During full-on braking, all three brake

lights flash for the duration of ABS control.

Footbrake

The footbrake comprises two independent

brake circuits.

If one brake circuit faults, the vehicle can

still be braked with the other brake circuit.

However the braking effect will occur at a

lower pedal position and considerably

more forc e is required. The braking

distance is longer. Contact a workshop

before continuing to drive.

To ensure that full pedal travel – can be

utilised, particularly if there is a fault in one

of the brake circuits, there must be no mats

in the pedal area - see page 185.

When the engine is not running, the

assistance of the brake servo unit

disappears once the brake pedal has been

depressed once or twice. Braking effect is

not red uced, but braking requires

significantly gre ater force . This is especially

important to bear in mind w hen towing.

209Driving and operation

Check the brake lights before starting out

on a journey. On v ehicles with check

control 3 the brake lights are check ed

automatically – see page 124.

Shortly after starting each journey the

effectiveness of the bra ke syste m should

be tested at low speed and without

inconveniencing other tra ffic, especially if

the bra kes are wet, e.g. afte r the vehicle

has been washed.

The b ra ke fluid level should be check ed

regularly. If the brake fluid level is too low

and the handbrake is not ap plied, control

indicator R in the instrument cluster

illuminates – see page 99.

Handbra ke

Alw ays app ly the handbrake firmly without

actuating the release button; to do this fold

up the armrest 3. Apply as fully as possible

on uphill or downhill inclines.

The mechanic al handbrake acts on the

brakes on the rear wheels. It engages

automatic ally when applied.

To release the handbrake pull the lever up

slightly, press the ratchet knob, and fully

lower the lever.

To reduce the operating forces of the

handbrake, depress the footbrake at the

sam e time .

Brake system control indicator R

The control indicator illuminates when the

ignition is switched on if the handbrake is

applied or if the brake or clutch fluid level is

too low. Brake fluid – see page 276.

9 Wa rnin g

If the control indicator illuminates when

the handbrake is released, stop driving

immediately. Contact a workshop.

210 Drivin g and op era tio n

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS u)

ABS continually monitors the brake system

and prevents the wheels from locking

regardless of the type of road surface or

tyre grip.

It starts to regulate the braking p ressure as

soon as a w heel shows a tendency to lock.

The v ehicle remains ste era ble, even in the

event of very heavy braking, for instance

on bends or when sw erving to avoid an

obstacle. Even in the case of full-on

braking, the ABS makes it possible to drive

round an obsta cle without releasing the

brakes.

ABS control is made apparent through a

pulse in the brake pedal and the noise of

the regulation process.

Control indicator u for ABS

It illum inates for a few seconds after the

ignition is turned on. The system is ready

for operation when the control indicator

extinguishes.

If the control indicator does not go out

after a few seconds, or if it illuminates

whilst driving, there is a fault in the ABS.

The brake system remains operational

without ABS regulation.

Self-check

Each time the ignition is turned on and the

engine started, after moving away from a

speed of around 2 mph (3 km/h) the system

performs a self-check which may be

audible.

Fault

You can continue driving, provided you

drive with care and anticipation.

Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a

workshop. The self-diagnosis integrated

into the system allows rapid fault

identification.

9 Wa rning

For optimum braking, keep the brake

pedal fully depressed throughout the

braking process, despite the fact that the

pedal is pulsating. Do not reduce the

pressure on the pedal.

Do not let this special safety feature

tempt you into taking risks when driving.

Traffic safety can only be achieved by

adopting a responsible driving style.

9 Wa rnin g

If there is a fault in ABS, the wheels may

be subject to locking due to braking that

is heavier than normal. The advantages

of ABS are no longer operational.

211Driving and operation

Wheels, tyres

See page 297 for suitable tyres and

restrictions.

Tyres fitted in the factory are adapted to

the chassis and provide optimum driving

comfort and safety.

Changing tyre/wheel type

Before changing to other tyres or wheels,

note the necessary changes.

If tyres of a different size than those fitted

at the factory are used, the electronic

speedometer may require reprogramming

to ensure that the correct speed is

displayed.

Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring

system 3

If you ha ve winter tyre s or a fte rmarke t

tyres of a different size fitted, sensors for

the tyre pressure monitoring system can be

retro-fitted by a workshop upon request.

Otherwise the system will not display tyre

pressure deviations.

Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 –

see page 204.

9 Warning

Use of unsuitable tyres or wheels may

lead to accidents and render the vehicle

unroadworthy.

212 Drivin g and op era tio n

Fitting new tyres

Fit tyres in pairs or in sets, which is even

better. Ensure that tyres on one axle are:

z the s ame si ze ,

z the same design,

z the same make,

z and have the same tread pattern.

Fit directional tyres such that they roll in the

direction of travel. The rolling d irection is

indicated by a symbol (e.g. an arrow) on

the sidewall.

Tyres fitted opposing the rolling direction

(e.g. when a tyre is changed) should be

refitted as soon as possible. This is the only

way to obtain full benefit from the design

properties of the tyre.

Some brands of tyres have a beaded edge

for a lloy wheels to protect against

damage. If wheel trim is used on steel

wheels with beaded-edge tyres, the

following procedure must be followed:

z Use wheel trims and tyres tha t are

approved by Vauxhall for the vehicle in

question a nd therefore meet all the

requirements pertaining to the

respective wheel/tyre combination.

z If the wheel trims and tyres used are not

Vauxhall-approved, the tyres must not

have a beaded edg e.

9 Wa rnin g

Use of unsuitable tyres or wheel trims

could lead to sudden loss of air and

thereby accidents.

213Driving and operation

Tyre pr essure

Check tyre pressures, including the spare

wheel, at least every 14 days and prior to

any long journey; the tyres should be

checked when cold. Don’t forget to check

the spare.

Use the valve cap key to make unscrewing

the valve caps easier. The ke y is located on

the inside of the tank flap.

In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring

sy ste m 3 there is an ad apter in the valve

cap key. Screw adapter to valve before

attaching tyre pressure gauge -

see p age 204.

Tyre pressure - see page 299.

Do not reduce tyre pressure when the tyres

are wa rm. Otherwise the pressure may

drop below the perm issible minimum when

the tyres cool down.

After having checked the tyre pressures,

tighten the valve caps using the valve cap

key.

Incorrect tyre pressures will impair sa fety,

vehicle handling, comfort and fuel

economy and will increase tyre wear.

If the pressure is too low , this can result in

considerable tyre warm-up and internal

damage, lead ing to tread separation and

even to tyre blow-out at high speeds.

Hidden tyre dama ge is not eliminated by

adjusting the tyre pressure.

9 Wa rnin g

Incorrect ty re pressure could lead to a flat

tyre.

214 Drivin g and op era tio n

Tyre condition, wheel condition

Drive over edges slowly and at a right

angle if p ossible. Driving ov er sha rp edges

can lead to hidden tyre damage and wheel

damage which is only noticed later on.

When pa rk ing, ensure that the tyres a re not

pressed against the edge of the kerb .

Check tyres regularly for damage

(p enetrated foreign bodies, punctures,

cuts, cracks, bulges in side walls). Check

wheels for damage. If dam age or unusual

wear is found, contact a workshop.

Tread depth

Check tread depth regularly.

If w ear in the front is greater than that in

the rear, move the rear wheels to the front

axle and vice versa.

Correct tyre pressure.

For reasons of safety, tyres should be

re placed when their tre ad depth has worn

down to 2 to 3 mm (winter tyres: 4 mm).

9 Warning

Dama ge may lead to tyre blow-out.

215Driving and operation

The legally permissible minimum tread

depth (1.6 mm) has been reached when

the tread has worn down as far as one of

the wear indicators (TWI

). A number of

wear indicators are spaced at equal

intervals around the tyre within the tread.

Their position is indicated by markings on

the tyre sidewall.

General information

z The danger of aquaplaning is greater if

the tyres are worn.

z Tyres age, even if they are used only very

little or not at all. A spare wheel which

has not been used for six years should be

used with care.

z Never fit used tyres the previous history

and use of which you do not know.

z So as not to im pair brake cooling, use

only wheel trims approved for use on

your vehicle.

Tyre designations

Meanings:

e.g. 19 5/6 5 R 15 91 H

Speed code letters:

TW I = Tread Wear Indicato r.

195 =Tyre width in mm

65 = Cross-section ratio

(tyre height to width) in %

R = Belt type: Radial

15 = Whe el d ia mete r in inch

91 = Load index e.g. 91 corresponds

to 618 kg

H = Speed code letter

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 150 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

216 Drivin g and op era tio n

Winter tyres 3

For notes on fitting new tyres –

see page 212.

See page 299 for restrictions.

Winter tyre s im prove safe ty at

tem peratures below 7 °C and should

therefore be fitted on all the wheels.

The d esign of summ er tyres mea ns they

have limited qualities for winter driving.

If the m aximum p ermissible spee d for the

winter tyres is less than that of the vehicle,

a notice indicating the maximum

permissible speed for the tyres must be

affixed within the driver’s field of vision

If you use the spare wheel when it is fitted

with a summer tyre, the vehicle’s

driveability may be affected, especially on

slippery road surfaces. Obtain a

replacement for the faulty tyre as soon as

possible, and have the w heel balanced

and fitted to the vehicle.

Wheel trims 3

If the wheel trims and tyres used are not

Vauxhall-approved, ma ke sure that the

tyres do not have a beaded edge -

see page 212.

Va ries fr om cou nt ry to co unt ry on a ccou nt o f

nation al regulations.

217Driving and operation

Tyre chains 3

Restrictions and further information –

see page 299.

Tyre chains are only permitted on the drive

wheels (front axle). They must be fitted to

the tyres symmetrically in order to achieve

a concentric fit.

Always use fine mesh chains that add no

more than 10 mm to the tyre tread and the

inboard sides (including chain lock).

Wheel trim on steel w heels could com e into

contact with parts of the chain and be

damaged. R emove the wheel trim –

see p age 239.

Tyre chains may only be used a t speeds up

to 30 mph (50 km/h)

and, when travelling

on roads that are free of snow, they may be

used for brief periods only since they are

subject to rapid wear on a hard road and

may snap.

Temporary wheel 3

Tyre chains must not be used on the

temporary spare wheel. If you need to use

tyre chains after suffering a flat front tyre,

fit the temporary spare on the rear axle

and transfer one of the rear wheels to the

front axle.

For notes on the temporary spare wheel –

see page 237.

Wheel changing – see page 238.

Correct tyre pressure.

Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 –

see page 204.

Va ries fr om cou nt ry to co unt ry on a ccou nt o f

nation al regulations.

218 Drivin g and op era tio n

Roo f racks 3

For safety reasons and to avoid roof

damage, we recommend using the

Vauxhall roof rack system approved for

your vehicle.

Fasten the roof rack following the

instructions that accompany the system.

Driving hints – see page 184.

Version wit hout roof rail ing

Fold covers of installation openings

up wards.

Attach roof rack at appropriate points -

see enclosed roof luggage rack system

instructions.

Versi on with roof ra iling 3

Attach roof rack to roof railing at points

shown in illustration - see enclosed roof

luggage rack system instructions.

9 Wa rning

Disreg ard of these notes ca n lead to

injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle

pass enge rs must b e informed

accordingly.

219Driving and operation

Towing equipment 3

Only use a caravan/trailer towing device

approved for the vehicle. Have a towing

device fitted by workshop, who will inform

you of any possible caravan/trailer load

increases. They will have the instructions

for fitting the device and any necessary

changes to the vehicle concerning cooling,

heat shields or other devices.

For installation dimensions of the

caravan/trailer towing equipment –

see pages 311, 312.

Towing equipment with

removable coupling ball bar 3,

Saloon / Hatch 3

Stowa ge of coupling b all bar

The coupling ball bar is stored in a bag

strapped to the spa re wheel.

Fitti ng the coupling b all b ar

Compress the sealing plugs at the ends

and pull out of the opening for the coupling

ball bar. Stow the sealing plugs in the

luggage compa rtm ent. Disengage socket

and fold down 3.

9 Wa rning

Disreg ard of these notes ca n lead to

injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle

pass enge rs must b e informed

accordingly.

9 Wa rning

The coupling ball bar is to be removed

when not towing.

220 Drivin g and op era tio n

Checking the tensioning of the coupling

ball bar:

z Red marking on turn knob points

towards green m arking on coupling ba ll

bar.

z Gap of approx. 6 millimetres between

rotary knob and coupling ball bar.

z Key is in lock.

Otherwise, the coupling ball bar must be

tensioned before it is inserted into the

coupling housing:

z Open coupling ball bar,

z Pull turn knob out and then turn it

clockwise as far as it will go –

see illustration.

Inserting the coupling ball bar

Insert the tensioned coupling ball bar in the

coupling housing and push firmly upwards

until you hear the coupling ball bar

engaging.

The turn knob snaps back into its home

position resting a gainst the coupling ball

bar.

9 Wa rnin g

Do not touch the turn knob when

inserting the coupling ball bar – risk of

injury.

221Driving and operation

Open coupling ball bar. Remove key and

put on provided protective clip.

When the coupling b all bar is locke d the

turn knob can no longer be pulled out.

Imp or tant

Check that the coupling ball bar is correctly

installed:

z Red marking on turn knob points

towards white marking on coupling ball

bar.

z No gap between turn knob and coupling

ball bar.

z Coupling ball bar must be seated firmly

in coupling housing.

z Coupling ball bar must be locked and

key must be removed.

Eye for b reak-away stopping c able

In the case of caravans/trailers with brake,

attach the break-away stopping cable to

the e ye. Eye - se e Fig. 17721 J.

Dismounti ng the coupling b all b ar

Close coupling ball bar.

Pull the turn knob out and then turn it

clockwise as far as it will go. Pull the

coupling ball bar downwards out of the

coupling housing and stow it in the

luggage compa rtm ent – see page 219,

Fig. 17729 J.

Insert the sealing plug in the hole for the

coupling ball bar. Fold away the socket –

see page 219, Fig. 17717 J.

Do not use steam-jet cleaners or other

high-pressure cleaners to clean the

coupling ball b ar.

9 Warning

Towing is permitted only with a correctly

fitted towbar. If the towbar cannot be

fitted correctly, contact a workshop.

222 Drivin g and op era tio n

Towing equipment with pivoting

coupling ball bar 3

Folding out the c oup ling b all ba r

The release lever is in the stowage

compartment to the left in the luggage

compartment.

To open the stowage compartment, push

both latches down and open the cover.

Push the release lever down; the LED on the

lever is illuminated while the coupling ball

bar is not engaged. A warning buzzer also

sounds and the coupling ball bar pivots

down.

Swivel the coupling ball bar backwards

until it engages (see Fig. 17726 J). The LED

must go out and the warning buzzer must

cease. Otherwise, repeat the procedure.

Important

Check that the coupling ball bar is correctly

engaged:

z LED is not illuminated.

z No warning buzzer.

9 Warning

Mak e sure that no one is in the piv ot zone

of the c oupling ball bar. Risk of bodily

injury.

223Driving and operation

Carava n/trailer with break-a way cable 3

For caravans/trailers with brakes, loop

break-away cable around coupling ball

bar.

Stowi ng the coupling ball b ar

Open the stowage compartment –

see p age 222.

Push the release lever down; the LED on

the lever remains illuminated as long as

the coupling ball bar is not engaged.

A warning buzzer also sounds and the

coupling ball bar pivots down.

Pivot the coupling ball bar to the right and

up. The LED must go out and the warning

buzzer must cease, otherwise repeat the

proc edure.

Caravan/trailer towing

C arava n and tra iler loads

The permissible caravan/trailer loads are

vehicle-dependent and engine-dependent

maximum values which must not be

exceeded. The actual caravan/trailer load

is the difference between the actual gross

weight of the caravan/trailer and the

actual coupling socket load with the

caravan/trailer attached. When the

caravan/trailer load is being checked,

therefore, only the caravan/trailer wheels –

and not the joc key whee l – m ust be

standing on the weighing apparatus.

The permissible caravan/trailer loads for

your vehicle are given in the vehicle

documents. Unless otherwise stated, they

are valid for gradients up to max. 12%.

9 Wa rning

Caravan/trailer towing is permissible only

when the c oupling ba ll bar is engag ed

correctly. If the coupling ball b ar cannot

be engaged correctly, the LED does not

go out or the warning b uzz er does not go

off. Seek the assistance of a workshop.

Observe national regulations.

224 Drivin g and op era tio n

The permissible caravan/trailer load should

be fully utilised only by drivers who are

adequately experienced in towing large or

heavy caravans/trailers.

The permitted caravan/trailer load ap plies

up to the specified incline and up to an

altitude of 1000 metres above sea-level.

Since engine power decreases as altitude

increases because of the air becom ing

thinne r, there fore reducing climbing ability,

the permitted towing weight also

decreases by 10% for every 1000 metres of

additional altitude. The towing weight

does not have to be reduced when driving

on roads with slight inclines (less than 8%,

e.g. motorways).

The actual caravan/trailer load plus the

actual gross weight of the towing vehicle

must not exceed the maximum permitted

towing weight. For example, if the

permitted Gross Vehicle Weight is utilised ,

the caravan/trailer load must only be used

until the maximum permitted towing

weight is reached. The maximum

permitted towing weight is shown on the

identification plate - see page 282.

C oupling socket load

The coupling socket load is the load

exerted by the caravan/trailer on the

coupling ball. It can be varied by changing

the weight distribution when loading the

caravan/trailer.

The maximum permissible coupling socket

load (Saloon / Hatch: 78 kg, Estate: 85 kg)

is specified on the towing equipment

identification plate and in the vehicle

documents. Alw ays aim for the maximum

load, especially in the case of heavy

carav ans/tra ile rs. The coupling socket load

should never fall below 25 kg.

When measuring the coupling socket load,

make sure that the drawbar of the loaded

caravan/trailer is at the same height as it

will be when the caravan/trailer is coupled

with the towing vehicle loaded. Particularly

important for caravans/trailers with

tandem axle.

225Driving and operation

Rear axle load during tow ing

W hen the carava n/trailer is coup le d up an d

the towing vehicle is fully loaded, including

all occupants, the permissible rear axle

load (for information - see the

identification plate or vehicle

documentation) may be exceeded by 50

kg. The Gross Vehicle Weight rating must

not be exceeded in the process.

On the increased payload version 3, the

permissible rear axle load may be

exceeded by 65 kg.

If the permissible rear axle load is

exceeded, a maximum speed of 60 mph

(100 km/h) must be applied. If lower

national speed limits are prescribed for

vehicles towing caravans/trailers, these

must be observed.

Tyre pressure

Adjust the tyre pressure on the towing

vehicle to the value specified for a full load

- see page 299. Also check the pressure of

the caravan/trailer wheels and the spare

wheel.

Trai ler Stabi lity Assist 3 (TSA)

TSA monitors vehicle movements when

towing a caravan/trailer. If the system

detects lurching movements, engine power

is reduced while the vehicle a nd

caravan/trailer combination is selectively

braked until the lurching ceases.

TSA is a function of the Electronic Stability

Programme (ESP®

Plus

) - see page 196.

226 Drivin g and op era tio n

Driving chara cteristics, tow ing tip s

For caravans/trailers with brakes, attach

break-away cable to eye 3 or loop around

coupling ball bar if no eye available.

Before attaching the caravan/trailer,

lubricate the ball of the caravan/trailer

towing device. However, do not lubricate

the ball if a stabiliser, which acts on the

coupling ball, is being used to da mp

snaking.

Check caravan/trailer lighting before

starting to drive. The fog tail light on the

vehicle is deactivated when towing a

caravan/trailer.

Caravan/trailers with LED turn signals m ust

have a provision that makes it possible to

monitor standard light bulbs.

Turn signal control indicator – see page 98.

The parking distance sensors at the rear 3

are deactivated when towing a

caravan/trailer.

Handling is greatly influenced by the

loading of the caravan/trailer. Loads

should therefore be secured so that they

cannot slip and be placed in the centre of

the caravan/trailer if p ossible, i.e. above

the axle.

In the case of trailers with low driving

stability or caravans with a permitted

Gros s Ve hicle W eight of 1400 k g (Saloon /

Hatch)/1500 kg (Estate), do not exceed a

spe ed of 50 mp h (80 km/h); the use of a

friction-type sta biliser is highly

recommended.

Do not d riv e faster than 50 mph (80 k m/h)

if possible, even in countries where higher

speeds are permitted.

Make sure that you have enough room

when cornering and a void sud den

manoeuvres.

If the caravan/trailer starts to sway, drive

more slowly, do not attempt to correct the

steering and brake sharply if necessary.

If it is necessary to apply the brakes fully,

depress the brake pedal as hard as

possible.

Remember that the braking distance for

vehicles towing caravans/trailers with and

without brake is always greater than that

for vehicles not towing a caravan/trailer.

When driving downhill, the brakes are

under considerably more load when towing

a caravan/trailer. For this reason, drive in

the same gear as if driving uphill and drive

at a sim ila r spe ed .

Automatic transmission 3 or Easytronic 3

in Automatic mode will automatically

select the driving programme with the

optimum engine bra king effect.

If necessary, the gears can a lso be selected

manually.

227Driving and operation

The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its

cooling power is therefore independent of

the engine speed.

Since a considerable amount of heat is

generated at high engine speeds and less

at slower speeds, do not shift down when

climbing hills whilst the vehicle is still coping

with the gradient in the higher gear.

Diesel engines: On rising gradients of 10%

or more, do not drive faster than 20 mph

(30 km/h) in 1st gear or 30 mph (50 km/h)

in 2nd gear; with automatic

transmission 3, do not e xceed 25 mp h

(40 km/h) in position 1.

Start ing on inclines

For vehicles with manual transmission,

the most favourable engine speed when

starting-off on an incline is between 2500

and 3000 rpm for petrol engines and

between 2000 and 2200 rpm for diesel

engines. Hold engine speed constant,

engage clutch gradually (let slip), release

ha ndb ra ke and open throttle. If possible,

the engine speed should not drop during

this procedure.

For vehicles with a utomatic transmission 3

or Easytronic 3 in Automatic mode it is

sufficient to apply full throttle.

Before starting-off under extreme

conditions (high combination weight,

mountainous terrain with steep inclines),

switch off all unnecessary electrical loads

(e.g. heated rear window, air conditioning

system 3, heated seats 3).

228 Self-help, vehicle care

Self-help, vehicle care

Diesel fuel system, bleeding

Never let the tank run dry. If control

indicator Y illuminates, refuel as soon as

possible. Refuel immediately if it flashes.

Restarting after running out of fuel is

possible, but starting b ehaviour will be

delayed. Turn on the ignition three times

for 15 seconds each time. Then start the

engine for a maximum of 40 seconds. If it

does not start, repeat the process after

waiting at least 5 seconds. If the engine still

does not start, contact a workshop.

Bonnet

To open the bonnet, pull the release lever

located on the driver’s side below the

instrument panel. The bonnet will then be

unlocked and will partially open. Return

release lever to its original position.

Diesel fuel system, bleeding ..... ......... . 228

Bonnet ......... ......... ................................ 228

Starting ....................................... .......... 229

Towing ............................... ......... .......... 232

Warning triangle ¨3,

first-aid kit +3............................ ...... 234

Spare wheel 3 ................... ............. ...... 236

Jac k £ 3 and vehicle tools 3 ...... ...... 238

Changing wheels ....................... .......... 238

Tyre repair kit 3......................... ......... . 242

Electrical system .. ................................ 246

Fuses and the most important circuits

they p rotect ............................. ......... . 248

Bulb replacement ......... ....................... 252

Halogen headlight system, dipped

and main beam ................... ............. . 253

Xenon headlight system, dipped and

main beam ... ..................................... 255

Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL)

sy ste m 3 ... ........................................ . 257

Halogen headlight system, Xenon

headlight system, parking lights .... . 257

Tail lights .................................... .......... 258

Numb er plate light .. ............................ 261

Courtesy lig ht ....... ................................ 262

Vehicle care..... ..................................... 264

9 Warning

Disregard of these notes can lead to

injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle

passengers must be informed

accordingly.

229Self-help, vehicle care

There is a safety catch on the underside of

the bonnet: lift this upwards and open the

bonnet.

Dirt or snow on the bonnet may drop onto

the windscreen when the bonnet is opened

and block the air intake.

Air intake – see page 166.

To hold the bonnet open, insert the support

located at the side in the small slot on the

underside of the bonnet.

Before closing, fasten the support in its

retainer. Lower the bonnet and allow it to

fa ll into its catch.

Check tha t the bonnet is locked in position

by pulling at its front edge. If it is not

engaged, repeat the procedure.

Starting

Do not sta rt wit h quick charger

This prevents damage to electronic

components.

Do not sta rt by pushing or tow ing

Because your vehicle is fitted with a

catalytic converter, it must not be started

by pushing or towing – see page 190.

The v ehicle can only be started using jum p

leads – see following page.

230 Self-help, vehicle care

Starting the engine with jump leads 3

A vehicle with a discharged battery can be

started using jump lead s and the battery of

another vehicle.

Attempts to start the vehicle should be

made at intervals of one minute and

should not last longer than 15 seconds

z Never expose the battery to naked

flam es or sparks.

z A discharged battery can freeze at

temperatures of around 0°C. Always

thaw out a frozen batteries in a wa rm

room before attaching jump leads.

z Do not allow battery fluid to come into

contact with eyes, skin, fabrics or

painted surfaces. The fluid contains

sulphuric acid which can cause injuries

and damag e in the event of direct

contact.

z Wear eye protection and protective

clothing when handling a battery.

z Use auxiliary battery with same voltage

(12 volts). Its capacity (Ah) must not be

considerably less than that of the

discharged battery. Voltage and

capacity information c an be found on

the batteries.

z Use jump leads with insulated terminals

and a cross section of at least 16 mm

(25 mm

for diesel e ngines).

z Do not disconnect the discharged

battery from the vehicle.

z Switch off all unnecessary electrical

consumers.

z Do not lean over the ba ttery during jump

starting.

z Do not allow the terminals of one lead to

touch those of the other lead.

z Do not allow the vehicles to touch while

jump starting.

z Apply handbrake. Manual transmission

or Easytronic 3 in neutral, automatic

transmission 3 in P.

The battery is in a box at the front of the

engine compartment, on the right-hand

side as viewed from the front. To open the

box, pull the cover forwards and swing it

upwards.

9 Wa rning

Be extremely careful when starting with

jump leads. Any deviation from the

following instructions can lead to injuries

or damage caused by battery explosion

or damage to the elec trical sy ste ms of

both vehicles.

231Self-help, vehicle care

Connect the lea ds in the order shown in the

illustration:

1. Connect one end of the first jump lead to

the positive terminal 1 of the battery

providing the jump start (identified by

"+" sign on battery case or terminal).

2. Connect the other end of this lead to the

positive terminal 2 of the discharged

battery ("+" sign).

3. Connect the first end of the other jump

lead to the negative terminal 3 of the

battery providing the start ("–" sign).

4. Connect the other end of the second

ju mp l ead 4 to ground on the other

vehicle, e. g. engine block or scre w

connection in the engine suspension.

z Do not connect leads to negative

terminal of discharged battery.

z The connection point should be as far

away from the discharged battery as

possible.

z Route the leads so that they cannot

catch on rotating parts in the engine

compartm ent.

z Start the engine of the vehicle providing

the jump start.

z After 5 minutes, start the other engine.

Start attempts should be made at

intervals of 1 minute and should not last

longer than 15 seconds.

z After starting, allow both engines to idle

for approx. 3 minutes with the leads

connected.

z In order to avoid excess voltage in the

ele ctric al sy ste m, b efore re moving a

lead, switch on an electrical consumer

(e.g. light, heated rear window) in the

vehicle receiving the jump start.

z Reverse above sequence exactly when

removing leads.

232 Self-help, vehicle care

Towing

Towing your own vehicle

To open the cover concealing the towing

eye socket at the front right of the vehicle:

disengage the cover at the bottom and pull

it off downwards.

The front towing eye is located in the

compartment containing the jack and

vehicle tools underneath the spare wheel in

the luggage compartment. Jack and

vehicle tools – see page 238.

Screw in the front towing ey e anticlockwise

as far as it will go until it stops in a

horizontal position.

Attach a tow rope 3 – or better still a tow

ro d 3 – to the eye.

The front towing eye may be used only for

towing the vehicle, not for rescuing it.

Switch on ignition to release steering

colum n lock an d to p e r mit ope ra tion of

brake lights, horn and windscreen wiper.

Manual transmission or Easytronic 3 in

neutral, automatic transmission 3 in N.

Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily. Excessive

tractive force can damage the vehicle.

To preve nt the entry of e xhaust fum es from

the towing vehicle, switch on the air

recirculation 3 and close the wind ow s.

Vehicles with automatic transmission 3

should be towed facing forwards only and

must not be towed faster than 50 mph

(80 km/h) or further than 60 m iles (100 km).

If the transmission is defective, or if the

above speed or distance is to be exceeded,

the front axle must be raised off the

ground.

9 Wa rnin g

For braking and steering, significantly

hig her forces are required: brake

assista nce and steering assistance are

effective only with the engine running.

233Self-help, vehicle care

Contact a workshop.

If the autom atic clutch is released

manually after a power failure on vehicles

with Easytronic 3, towing is not permitted -

see page 175. In this case, contact a

workshop immediately.

After towing, unscrew front towing eye by

rotating clockwise and insert a nd close the

cap.

Towing service

Entrust your vehicle only to the towing

service of your choice and obtain an

estimate on towing costs before employing

any towing service. In this way you avoid

unnecessary costs and possible insurance

problems during cla im processing.

Towing another vehicle

To op en the cover c once aling the towing

eye socket at the rear right of the vehicle:

disengage the cover at the bottom and pull

it off downwards.

The rear towing eye is located in the

compartment containing the jack and

vehicle tools underneath the spare wheel in

the luggage compartment. Jack and

vehicle tools – see page 238.

Screw in the rear towing eye anticlockwise

as far as it will go until it stops in a

horizontal position.

Attach a tow rop e 3 – or better still a tow

rod 3 – to the eye.

The rear towing eye may be used only for

towing the vehicle, not for rescuing it.

Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily. Excessive

tractive force can damage the vehicle.

After towing, unscrew rear towing eye by

rotating clockwise and insert and close

the cap.

234 Self-help, vehicle care

Warning triangle ¨3,

first-aid kit +3

Saloon / Hatch

The warning triangle and first-aid kit/

cushion are stowed in the side panel trim

on the left-hand side.

To access press down bar and open the

cover.

Depending on the warning triangle version,

move locking lever upwards and therefore

clamp warning triangle in position.

When loading vehicle, always ensure that

first-aid cushion or first-aid kit is a ccessible.

235Self-help, vehicle care

Estate

The warning triangle and first-aid kit/

cushion are stowed in the side panel trim

on the left-hand side.

To op en, push both bars down and open

the flap.

When loading vehicle, always ensure that

warning triangle and first-aid cushion or

first-aid kit are accessible.

236 Self-help, vehicle care

Spare wheel 3

Some vehicles are equipped with a tyre

repair kit instead of a spare wheel.

See page 242.

Saloon / Hatch

The spare wheel is located in the luggage

compartment under the floor cover. It is

secured with a plastic wing nut.

To open the floor cover, p ull up the handle

or strap.

Estat e

The spare wheel is located in the luggage

compartment under the load floor. It is

secured with a plastic wing nut.

To open the loading floor, fold out release

lever by pushing at the marked point and

raise up the loading floor all the way.

Stowing standard size tyres in the spare

wheel well

The spare wheel well is not designed for all

sizes of permissible tyres. If a larger wheel

must be stowed in the spa re wheel well

after changing wheels, place the floor

cover on the protruding wheel.

237Self-help, vehicle care

Genera l informa tion

Depending on the model variant, the spare

whee l is in the form of an temporary

spare wheel 3. Please pay attention

to instructions concerning temporary

spare wheel in the next column and on

pages 217, 242, 299.

On vehicles with alloy wheels 3 the spare

whee l may have a steel rim.

If you use winter tyres 3, the spare wheel

may still be fitted with a summer tyre. If you

use the spare wheel the vehicle’s handling

may be altered. Obtain a replacement for

the faulty tyre as soon as possible, and

have the wheel balanced and fitted to the

vehic le.

The spare wheel may have a smaller tyre

and a smaller rim than the wheels mounted

on the vehicle

: Using the spare wheel m ay

alter vehicle handling. Have the defective

tyre replaced as soon as possible, balance

the wheel and have it mounted on the

vehic le.

Notes on temporary spare wheel 3

z Using a temporary spare wheel

may change the driving behaviour of

the vehicle, particularly if using winter

tyres 3. Replace defective tyre as quickly

as possible, ba lance wheel and fit to

vehicle.

z Fit only one temporary spare wheel.

z Do not drive faster than 50 mph

(80 km/h).

z Take curves slowly.

z Do not use the temporary spare wheel

for a lengthy period.

z Replace temporary spare wheel with full

specification wheel without delay.

z Tyre chains are not permitted on the

temporary spare wheel. If tyre chains

have to be used after a front wheel

puncture, fit temporary spare wheel to

the rear axle and fit a rear wheel to the

front axle. Check tyre pressure and

correct if necessary - see pa ge 299.

z Please follow instructions concerning

temporary spare wheel on pages 217

and 299.

Not es on di rect ional tyres 3

Directional tyres only achieve their full

performa nc e potential when mounted in

the prescribed direction of rotation. If after

a flat tyre the tyre or spare wheel is

mounted against the prescribed direction

of rotation, observe the following:

z Driving conditions may be altered.

Replac e the defe ctive tyre a s soon as

possible, balance the wheel and mount it

on the vehicle.

z Do not drive faster than 50 mph

(80 km/h).

z Drive especially carefully in w et or snowy

weather.

For further information on directional

tyres – see page 211.

Country-specific version: The spare wheel is

only to be used as a temporary spare wheel.

238 Self-help, vehicle care

Jack £ 3 and vehicle tools 3

The jac k and the vehicle tools hav e been

specially developed for your vehicle and

must only be used on that vehicle. Only use

jack for changing w heels.

Vehi cles w ith tyre rep air kit 3

The vehicle tools are stored in the luggage

compartment together with the tyre repair

kit in a compartment beneath the floor

cover.

Vehicles with spare wheel 3

The jack and ve hicle tools are loca ted in a

compartment in the luggag e

compartment, b eneath the spare wheel. To

rem ove the spare wheel - see page 236.

After use, stow away the jack and tools in

the compartm ent as shown in illustration.

Changing wheels

There may be a tyre repair kit instead of a

spare wheel – see page 242.

To ensure your safety, make the following

preparations and observe the following

inform ation when changing wheels:

z Park the vehicle on a level, firm and non-

skid surface .

z Switch on hazard warning lights, apply

ha ndbrake, automatic transmission 3 -

selector lever in P, manual transmission

or Easytronic 3 - engage 1st or reverse

gear.

z Correctly set up the warning triangle.

Warning triangle – see page 234.

239Self-help, vehicle care

z Remove spare wheel from luggage

compartment - see page 236.

z Before raising the vehicle, set the front

wheels to the straight-ahead position.

z Slacken the wheel bolts one half turn

before raising the vehicle, but do not

totally unscrew the bolts.

z Never change more than one wheel at

once .

z Block the wheel diagonally opposite the

wheel to be changed by placing w edge

blocks or equivalent in front and behind

th e whee l.

z Use the jack only to change wheels.

z If the ground on which the vehicle is

standing is soft, a solid board (max. 1 cm

thick) should be placed under the jack 3.

Using a thicker b oard c ould dam age the

jack 3 and the vehicle.

z No people or animals may be in the

vehicle when it is jacked -up.

z Never crawl under a jacked-up vehic le.

z Do not start or run the engine while the

ve hicle is on the jac k.

z Before inserting the wheel bolts when

changing wheels, lightly grease the cone

of each bolt. For this reason, carry some

conventional grease.

1. Prise off the wheel trim using the hook

included with the vehicle tools 3 . For

vehicle tools - see p age 238.

If the wheel trim has visib le w heel bolts 3,

the trim can remain on the wheel. The

retaining washers 3 on the wheel bolts

must not be removed.

240 Self-help, vehicle care

Allo y wh ee ls 3: Disengage the wheel bolt

caps with a screwdriver and remove.

Protect the wheel by inserting a soft c loth

between the screwdriver and alloy

wheel.

2. Turn wheel bolts half a turn using the

wheel bolt wrench 3, pushing the

wrench 3 on as far as possible.

3. There are plastic retainers at the front

and rea r of the vehicle underbody for

positioning the jack. The location of each

retainer is indicated by a ma rk on the

bottom edge of the vehicle.

241Self-help, vehicle care

4. Before attaching jack 3 set to required

he ight by turning the eye by hand. Fit the

ja ck 3 at the front – or rear – in such a

way that the jack head engages in the

plastic retainer beneath the vehicle.

Check that it is properly engaged.

The jack b ase must be on the ground

directly below the jacking point in a

manner that prevents it from slipping.

Attach crank to eye of threaded rod and

turn crank to raise vehicle.

If this is not the case, carefully lower the

vehicle imm ediately and reposition the

jack.

5. Unscrew wheel bolts and wipe clean with

a cloth. Then apply a light coating of

grease to the wheel bolts. Do not grease

the thread of the bolts. Do not put the

wheel bolts down in a location where

they may become soiled.

If the wheel bolts have retaining

washers 3, they must not be removed.

6. Change the wheel. Notes on spare

wheel – see page 236, notes on

temporary spare wheel – see page 237.

7. Screw in wheel bolts and tighten slightly,

inserting the wheel bolt wrench 3 as far

as possible.

8. Lower vehicle.

9. Tighten wheel bolts crosswise, putting on

wheel bolt wrench 3 as far as possible.

242 Self-help, vehicle care

10. Before refitting the wheel trim, clea n the

wheel around the retaining clips. Valve

sy mbol 3 on back of wheel trim must

point towards valve on wheel.

Align and refit wheel trim or wheel bolt

caps 3.

Alloy wheels 3: Align and refit wheel

bolt caps 3.

11.Stow away replaced wheel, tools and

warning triangle in the luggage

compartment - see page 238.

12.Check the tyre pressure of the newly

mounted wheel. Correct if necessary.

13.H ave the tightening torque of the wheel

bolts on the new wheel checked on the

vehicle using a torque wrench as soon

as possible and, if necessary, corrected.

Tightening torque – see page 299.

14.Replace the faulty tyre on the wheel

that was removed.

15.Replace temporary spare wheel 3 with

a full specification wheel without delay.

Tyre repair kit 3

Minor dam age to the tyre tread or side

wall, e.g. from foreign bodies, can be

repaired using the tyre repair kit.

Do not remove the foreign body from the

tyre.

Tyre damage exceed ing 4 mm or that is on

the rim cannot be repaired with the tyre

repair kit.

Important information – see pag e 246.

In the event of a flat tyre:

z Switch on hazard warning lights,

apply handbrake; for automatic

transmission 3, move selector lever to P;

for manual transmission or Easytronic 3,

select 1st or reverse gear.

z Correctly set up the warning triangle.

Warning triangle – see page 234.

9 Wa rnin g

Driving with tyre pressures too low or

tyres deflated can cause invisible

damage to the tyre. This damage cannot

be eliminated with a tyre repair kit. Park

the vehicle and contact a workshop.

243Self-help, vehicle care

The tyre repair kit is in a compartment in

the spare wheel well of the luggage

compartment.

1. Ta ke the pouch with the tyre repair kit

from the compartment. Carefully remove

the components from the pouch.

2. Remove the compressor.

3. Remove the electrical connection cable

and air hose from the stowage

compartm ents on the underside of the

compressor.

4. Screw the compressor air hose to the

connection on the sealant bottle.

5. Fit the sealant bottle in the retainer on

the compressor.

Set the compressor near the tyre in such

a way that the sealant bottle is upright.

6.Remove the valve cap from the defective

tyre.

244 Self-help, vehicle care

7. Screw the filler hose to the tyre valve.

8. The switch on the compressor must be

set to § .

9. Connect the compressor plug to the

accessory socket or cigarette lighter

sock et. Accessory socket – see pag e 93.

10.Switch on ignition.

To prev ent battery discharge, we

recommend that you leave the engine

running.

11. Set the rocker switch on the compressor

to I. The tyre is filled with sealant.

12.While the sealant bottle drains (approx.

30 seconds) the pressure indicator on

the compressor briefly points to 6 bar

(87 psi). Pressure then sinks again.

13.All of the sealant is pumped into the

tyre. Afterwards, the tyre is filled with

air.

14. The prescribed tyre pressure –

see pag e 299 should be reached within

10 minutes. Switch off the compressor

when the correct pressure is obtained.

If the specified tyre pressure is not

reached within 10 minutes, remove the

tyre repair kit. Move the v ehicle through

one tyre rotation, approx. 2 metres, in

either direction. Reconnect the tyre

repa ir kit and continue the filling

process for 10 minutes. If the specified

tyre pressure is still not reached, the tyre

is too badly damaged. Park the vehicle

and contact a workshop.

245Self-help, vehicle care

Drain excess tyre pressure with the

button over the pressure indicator.

Do not run the compressor for more

than 10 minutes - see "Important

information" on page 246.

15. Detach the tyre repair kit. Screw the

filler hose to the free connection on the

sealant bottle. This prevents sealant

leakage. Stow the tyre repair kit in the

luggage compartment.

16. Wipe away any sealant spill with a

cloth.

17. Dismantle the warning triangle and

stow it in the luggage compartment –

see page 234.

18. The enclosed sticker shows the

m aximum permitted speed at which the

tyre repair may be used. App ly sticker in

the driver’s field of vision.

19.Continue driving immediately to allow

the sealant to distribute evenly

throughout the tyre. Stop after approx.

6 miles / 10 km (but no more than

10 minutes) and check tyre pressure.

Screw the compressor air hose directly

onto the tyre valve (see Fig. 17256 T).

As long as the tyre pressure is more

than 1.3 bar (19 psi), it may be adjusted

to the p rescrib ed v alue. Repeat the

procedure until there is no more

pressure loss.

If the tyre p ressure has fallen below

1.3 bar (19 psi), the vehicle may no

longer be used. Contact a workshop.

20. Stow the tyre repair kit in the luggage

compartment – see pag e 242.

246 Self-help, vehicle care

Im portant

The driving characteristics of the repaired

tyre is severely affected, therefore have this

tyre replaced.

If the compressor makes abnormal noises

or heats up greatly, switch it off for at least

30 minutes.

The integrated safety valv e opens a t a

pressure of 7 bar (102 psi).

Protect the compressor from moisture and

rain.

The sealant can only be stored for approx.

4 years. After this time, the sealing

properties can no longer be guaranteed.

Heed the expiration date on the sealant

bottle.

The sealant bottle can only be used once.

Replace a used sealant bottle.

The compressor and sealant c an be used

from approx. -30 °C.

Dispose of a used tyre repair kit in

accordance with applicable legislation.

The adap ter 3 supplied may be used to

pump up other objects, such a s b alls,

airbeds, dinghies.

This is located on the underside of the

compressor. To remove, unscrew the

compressor air hose and pull out the

adapter.

When using the tyre repair kit, no consumer

may be connected to the front accessory

socket at the same time.

Electrical system

Fuses

There are three fusebox es in the vehicle:

In the passenger compartment on the far

left of the instrument panel, in the stowage

compa rtm ent on the left in the luggage

compartm ent, and at the front of the

engine compartment.

9 Wa rning

Do not d riv e faster than 50 mph

(80 km/h).

Do not use the te mporary spare whee l for

a lengthy period.

Steerability and driving behaviour may

be impaired.

9 Wa rnin g

Electronic ignition systems generate very

high voltages. Do not touch the ignition

system; high voltage can be fatal.

247Self-help, vehicle care

We recommend carrying a complete set of

fuses.

Spare fuses are kept on back of fusebox

cover in the instrument panel. For opening

cover – see next page.

Before replacing a fuse, turn off the

respective switch and the ignition.

A defective fuse (Fig. 17259 T) can be

recognised by its melted wire. A new fuse

should only be installed after the cause of

the fault has been rectified.

There is a fuse extractor on the rear of the

fusebox cover in the instrument panel for

changing fuses – see illustration above.

Only install fuses of the specified rating.

Each fuse has its rating written on it, in

addition the fuses are colour coded.

Fuse, Fuse ,

colour rating

Light brown 5 A

Dark brown 7.5 A

Red 10 A

Light blue 15 A

Yellow 20 A

White 25 A

Light green 30 A

Orange 40 A

Dark blue 60 A

248 Self-help, vehicle care

Fuses a nd the m ost importan t

circuits they protect

Fusebox in passenger compa rtment

The fusebox is on the left, on the outside of

the instrum ent pane l. O pen door.

Disengage cover by pulling firmly and

remove.

Spare fuses, fuse extra ctor – see page 246.

Some circuits may be protected by several

fuses.

No. Circuit Ra ting

1 Infotainment system, radio

transport fuse

20 A

2 Interior fan, heating, air

conditioning system

7.5 A

3 Sunroof 20 A

4 ––

5 Door module control unit 7.5 A

6 Brake light 7.5 A

7 Bodywork module control

unit

30 A

8 Front passenger’s door

module control unit

30 A

9 Central control unit 7.5 A

No. Circuit Ra ting

10 Steering column module

control unit

7.5 A

11 Diagnostics plug 7.5 A

12 Battery overload protection 10 A

13 ––

14 ––

15 Door module control unit 30 A

16 ––

17 instruments, information

display

15 A

18 ––

19 ––

20 Yaw rate sensor (ESP®

Pl us

)7.5 A

21 ––

22 Cigarette lighter 30 A

23 Interior fan, air conditioning,

Electronic Climate Control

30 A

40 A

24 ––

25 Heating, air conditioning

system

7.5 A

26 Instruments, information

display

7.5 A

249Self-help, vehicle care

Fusebox in lugga ge compa rtment

The fusebox is located on the left side of

the luggage compartment, in the stowage

compartment.

Saloon / Hatch:

Press the latch down and open the cover.

Estate:

Press both latches down and open the

cover and interior trim.

Spare fuses, fuse extra ctor – see page 246.

Some circuits may be protected by several

fuses.

No. Circuit Rati ng

1 ––

2 ––

3 Electric seat adjustment,

driver’s seat

40 A

4 Heated rear window 40 A

5 Electric seat adjustment,

front passenger’s seat

40 A

6 Electric window operation,

right rear

30 A

7 Electric window operation,

left rear

30 A

8 Seat heating, rear right 15 A

9 Horn, Vauxhall alarm

system

15 A

10 Fuel pump 20 A

No. Circuit Rating

11 Battery voltage 25 A

12 Seat heating, rear left 15 A

13 Towing equipment 20 A

14 Tailgate wiper 15 A

15 Heated seats, seat climate

control, left front

15 A

16 Seat heating, front right 15 A

17 Accessory socket 15 A

18 Tailgate locking, Estate 30 A

19 Terminal 30, Twin Audio 10 A

20 Tank flap locking 7.5 A

21 Ultrasonic sensor, Vauxhall

alarm system

5 A

22 Electrically op erated

tailgate

30 A

23 Glass breakage sensor

(Vauxhall alarm system)

7. 5 A

24 Battery voltage 25 A

25 Electronic chassis 10 A

26 Terminal 15 (starter

switch), Twin Audio

25 A

27 Seat occupancy

recognition, tyre pressure

monitoring sy ste m, rain

sensor, air conditioning

system

5 A

28 Parking distance sensors 7.5 A

29 ––

250 Self-help, vehicle care

Fusebox in engine compartment

The fusebox is in the box at the front of the

engine compartment.

To open, disengage front battery cover

and tilt upwards.

Disengage the bar at the front of the cover

of fusebox and swing it upwards.

Spare fuses, fuse extractor – see page 246.

Some circuits may be protected by several

fuses.

9 Wa rning

Switch off engine before op ening the

fusebox in the engine compartment, risk

of injury.

No. Ci rcuit Rating

1 Engine electronics,

transm ission elec tronics

20 A

2 Starter 25 A

3 Horn 20 A

4 Air conditioning system,

Electronic Climate Control

10 A

5 W ind scre en wa sh system,

front and rear

15 A

6 Diesel fuel filter heating 30 A

251Self-help, vehicle care

No. Circuit Rating

7 Central control unit, ESP®

Pl us

15 A

8 Headlights, windscreen

wash nozzles

10 A

9 Power steering, brake servo 7.5 A

10 Adaptive Forward Lighting 10 A

11 Windscreen wiper 30 A

12 Central control unit, ESP®

Pl us

7.5 A

13 Headlight wash system 30 A

14 Oxygen sensor 10 A

15 Engine control unit

The brake lights are on all the time if the fuse

is d efec t iv e an d t he igni tio n is swi tc he d on.

10 A

16 ABS 5 A

No. Circuit Ra ting

17 ––

18 ––

19 Adaptive Forward Lighting,

headlight range adjustment

15 A

20 Headlight range adjustment 5 A

21 ––

22 Windscreen wiper 30 A

23 Auxiliary heating 20 A

24 Battery voltage, terminal 30 30 A

25 Battery voltage, terminal 30 30 A

26 ––

No. Ci rcuit Rating

27 Easytronic 30 A

28 Tailgate module control unit 60 A

29 ABS 40 A

30 Tailgate module control unit 60 A

31 Vehicle interior module

control unit

60 A

32 ABS 40 A

33 Vehicle interior module

control unit

60 A

34 Tailgate module control unit 60 A

35 Cooling fan

Depending on engine.

30 A

40 A

36 Cooling fan

Brake servo

20 A

30 A

37 Adaptive Forw ard Lighting:

Slot for changing to

symmetrical dipped beam

for driving abroad -

see page 136

Insert

any

maxi-

fuse

38 ––

252 Self-help, vehicle care

Bulb replacement

Before replacing a bulb, switch ignition off

and switch relevant switch off.

Only hold new bulb at base. Do not touch

the bulb glass with bare hands, otherwise

fingerprints on the glass evaporate.

Residue builds up on the reflector

eventually resulting in a dull reflector.

Inadvertently stained bulbs may be

cleaned with a clean non-fluffy cloth, using

alcohol or white spirits.

Replacement bulb must be in accordance

with d ata on base of defective bulb. Do not

exceed wattage given on bulb base.

To change the lights on the left-hand side,

remove filler neck from windscreen wash

system fluid container to gain better

access: disengage retaining c lamp and

withdraw filler nec k by pulling upw ards.

Wash fluid may escape if the bottle is full.

As the headlight has to be removed, have

the bulb on the right changed by a

workshop.

Headlight ai ming

We recommend that headlight adjustment

be carried out by a workshop which w ill

have special equipme nt.

Manual headlight range adjustment 3

must be set to 0 when adjusting the

headlights.

9 Warning

Protect the environment. Do not allow

wash fluid to seep into the ground or

drain into the sewage system.

253Self-help, vehicle care

Halogen headlight system,

dipped and main beam

Headlights with separate systems for main

beam 1 (inner bulbs) and dipped beam 2

(outer bulbs).

Dipped beam

1. Open bonnet.

2. To change the bulb on the left, remove

filler neck from windscreen wash system

fluid container - see page 252. As the

hea dlight has to b e re moved , have the

bulb on the right chang ed by a

workshop.

3. Turn the headlight cover anticlockwise

and remove.

4. Push down bulb at bulb holder.

254 Self-help, vehicle care

5. Remove the bulb hold er with bulb from

the reflector.

6. Detach bulb from bulb mounting.

7. Insert new bulb into bulb mounting,

without touching the glass.

8. Insert new bulb so that the two lugs on

the bulb mounting engage in the

recesses in the reflector.

9. Engage the bulb holder.

10.Reposition the headlight cover and turn

it clockwise.

11.After changing the bulb on the left,

insert and engage filler neck for

win ds cree n wa sh sy st e m f lu id co ntain e r

- see page 252.

Main beam

1.Open bonnet.

2. To change the bulb on the left, remove

filler neck from windscreen wash system

fluid container - see page 252. As the

headlight has to be removed, have the

bulb on the right changed by a

workshop.

3. Turn the headlight cover anticlockwise

and rem ove.

4. Detach plug connector from bulb .

255Self-help, vehicle care

5. Press spring wire clip forwards,

disengage to the right and open.

6. Remove bulb from reflector housing.

7. When fitting a new bulb, engage the

lugs in the recesses on the reflector

without touching the glass.

8. Engage spring wire clip, plug connector

onto bulb.

9. Re position the headlight cover a nd turn

it clockwise.

10.After changing the bulb on the left,

insert and engage filler neck for

win ds cree n wa sh sy st e m f lu id co ntain e r

- see page 252.

Xenon headlight system,

dipped and main beam

Headlights with separate sy ste ms for main

beam 1 (inner bulbs) and dipped beam 2

(outer bulbs).

Dipp ed beam

9 Wa rnin g

The dipped beam works with very high

electrical voltage. Do not touch, risk of

fatal injury. Have bulbs changed by a

workshop.

256 Self-help, vehicle care

Main beam

1.Open bonnet.

2. To change the bulb on the left, remove

fille r neck from win dscr e en wa sh sys tem

fluid container - see page 252. As the

headlight has to be removed, have the

bulb on the right changed by a

workshop.

3. Turn the headlight cover anticlockwise

and remove.

4. Detach plug connector from bulb.

5. P res s sp ring w ire clip fo rwards,

disengage to the right and open.

6. Remove bulb from reflector housing.

7. When fitting a new bulb, engage the

lugs in the recesses on the reflector

without touching the glass.

8. Engage spring wire clip, plug connector

onto bulb.

9. Reposition the headlight cover and turn

it clockwise.

10. After changing the bulb on the left,

insert and engage filler neck for

windscreen wash system fluid container

- see page 252.

257Self-help, vehicle care

Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL)

system 3

Xenon headlight system for main and

dipped beam together with curve

illumination based on steering ang le.

Halogen headlight system,

Xenon headlight system,

pa rk in g li ghts

1. Open bonnet.

2. To change the bulb on the left, remove

filler neck from windscreen wash system

fluid container - see page 252. As the

hea dlight has to b e re moved , have the

bulb on the right chang ed by a

workshop.

3. Turn the headlight cover anticlockwise

and remove.

4. Remove parking light bulb holder from

reflector.

9 Wa rning

Xenon headlights operate at very high

voltage. Do not touch, risk of fatal injury.

Only have bulbs for dipped beam, main

beam, turn lighting, parking lights and

turn signal lights changed by a

workshop.

258 Self-help, vehicle care

5. Remove bulb from socket.

6. Insert new bulb, without touching the

glass.

7.Insert socket in reflector, position

headlight cover and turn clockwise.

8. After changing the bulb on the le ft, insert

and engage filler neck for windscreen

wash system fluid container -

seepage252.

Halogen headlight system,

Xenon headlight system,

front turn signal lights

Have bulbs changed by a workshop.

Side turn signal lights

Have bulbs changed by a workshop.

Front fog ligh ts 3

Have bulbs changed by a workshop.

Ta il lights

Saloon / Hatch

1. To open the stowage compa rtm ent,

press down bar and open the cover.

259Self-help, vehicle care

2. Detach plug connector from bulb

mounting.

3. Press the two retaining lugs on outer

edges of bulb mounting towards each

other and remove bulb mounting.

Lights from top to bottom:

4. Re move bulb from socket.

5. Insert new bulb without touching the

glass. Fit bulb mounting into bulb

housing. Connect plug. Close stowage

compartm ent.

Estate

1. Open the compartment on the left or

right-hand side by pressing the latch

down – see pag e 235.

2. Hold the b ulb housing from the outside,

use a wheel bolt spanner 3 to loosen the

retaining nuts and unscrew them by

ha nd . Remove the bu lb housin g to the

rear. Wheel bolt spanner 3 – see vehicle

tools on page 238.

3. Detach the cable from the bulb housing.

Turn signal light

Tail light/brake light

Tail light

Fog tail light

Reversing light

260 Self-help, vehicle care

4. Undo the three screws using a

screwdriver and detach the bulb

mounting.

5. Remove bulb from socket. Bulb s in bulb

holder:

6. Fit a new bulb without touching the

glass. R efit the b ulb mounting a nd screw

it into place. Position the bulb housing in

the vehicle body and screw it into place.

Close the compartment in the side trim.

Tailgate lights

Due to the large am ount of effort required,

bulbs should b e replaced by a workshop.

1. Use a screwdriver to prise off the plastic

plugs in the tailgate panelling to the

right and left of the tailgate lock.

1 = Brake/tail light

2 = Turn signal light

261Self-help, vehicle care

2. Undo screws in handle of inner panelling

with torx screwdriver.

3. Remove the inner panelling and clips

from the tailgate.

4. Unscrew corresponding holder:

5. Re move bulb from socket.

6. Fit a new bulb without touching the

glass. Refit the mounting in the tailgate.

7. Refit the inner panelling to the tailgate

using the clips. Tighten the screw in the

handle. Refit the plastic plugs in the

openings.

Lights in electrically operated tailgate 3

Have bulbs replaced by a workshop.

Number plate ligh t

1. Insert screwdriver vertically in bulb insert

as shown in illustration. Press to the side

and release spring.

1 =Reversing light

2 = Fog tail light

3 =Reversing light

262 Self-help, vehicle care

2. Remove bulb housing downwards,

ta king care n ot to pull on t he ca ble .

3. Lift flap and disconnect plug from bulb

socke t.

4. Rotate bulb holder to left and

disengage.

5. Re move bulb from socket.

6. Insert new bulb, without touching the

glass.

7. Insert light holder in b ulb housing and

engage by rotating clockwise.

8. Connect plug to bulb socket.

9. Insert and engage bulb housing.

Courtesy light

Front courtesy l ight, read ing light s 3

To ensure that no power is supp lied to the

lights, close the doors before removing.

1. Lever the lens out of the housing

recesses.

263Self-help, vehicle care

2. Remove bulb from socket.

3. Insert new bulb, without touching the

glass.

4. Mount lens and engage in position.

Rear courtesy lights 3,

rear reading lights 3

Have bulbs changed by a workshop.

Glove comp artm ent l ighting,

luggag e compart ment lighting,

footwell lig hting 3

To ensure that no power is supplied to the

lights, close the doors or hold the contact

switch depressed before removing.

1. Prise the light out with a screwdriver.

2. Press bulb slightly towards spring clip

and rem ove.

3. Insert new bulb, without touching the

glass.

4. Insert light in opening and engage in

position.

Instrum ent illumi na tion,

inform ation di splay illumina tion 3

Have bulbs changed by a workshop.

264 Self-help, vehicle care

Vehicle care

When caring for your vehicle, observe all

national environmental regulations,

particularly when washing it.

Regular, thorough care helps to imp rove

the appearance of your vehicle and

maintain its value over the years. It is also

a prerequisite for warranty claims for any

paint or corrosion damage. The following

pages contain tip s for vehicle care which, if

used properly, w ill help comba t the

unavoidable damaging effects of the

environment.

Vehicle ca re aids 3

Vehicle wash:

z Wash brush,

z Car Shampoo,

z Car Sponges,

z Insect Removal Sponge,

z Wheel Cleaners,

z Engine Cleaners,

z Glass Cleaners,

z Chamois Leather.

Vehicle care:

z Paintwork Cleaner,

z Paintwork Polish,

z Cream Polish,

z Metallic Paintw ork Wax,

z Hard wax,

z Touch-up pens,

z Touch-Up/Aerosol Paint,

z Wheel Pre serve r,

z Insect Remover,

z Window Cleaning Spray,

z Lock Cylinder Grease,

z Alloy Wheel Cleaner,

z Alloy Wheel Preserver,

z Rust Preventative,

z Vauxhall De-icer Spray,

z Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent,

z Silicone Oil for Rubber Seals.

Interior care:

z Interior/Upholstery Cleaner.

Washing

The paintwork of your vehicle is exposed to

environmental influences, e.g. continuous

changes in w eather conditions, industrial

waste gases and dust or thawing salts, so

wash a nd wax your vehicle regularly . When

using automatic car washes, select a

programme which includes waxing.

Bird droppings, dead insects, resin, pollen

and the like should be cleaned off

immediately, as they contain aggressive

constituents which can cause paint

damage.

Please follow the wash system

manufacturer’s instructions when using

wash systems. The windscreen wiper and

the automatic wiper with rain sensor 3 and

the rear window wiper 3 must be switched

off - see pages 11, 126. Unscrew the

antenna rod 3 and the roof rack 3,

standing on the door sill to make them

easier to reach.

If y ou wash your vehicle by hand, make

sure that the insides of the wings are also

thoroughly rinsed out.

265Self-help, vehicle care

Clean edges and folds on opened doors

and flaps as well as the areas they cover.

Thoroughly rinse off and leather-off the

vehicle. Rinse leather frequently. Use

separate leathers for pa int and window

surfaces: remnants of wax on the windows

will impair vision.

Observe national regulations.

Waxing

Wax your vehicle regularly, in particular

after it ha s b ee n washed using Car

Shampoo and at the latest when water no

longer forms beads on the paintwork,

otherwise the paintwork will dry out.

Also wax edge s and folds on opene d doors

and flaps as well as the areas they cover.

Polishing

Polishing is necessary only if the paint has

become dull or if solid deposits have

become attached to it.

Pa in two r k po lis h with s ilic on e form s a

protective film, making waxing

unnecessary.

Plastic body parts should not be treated

with wax and polish.

Use Metallic Paintwork Wax on vehic les

with a metallic-effect paint finish.

Wheels

Use a p H-neutral whee l clea ning a gent to

clean the whee ls.

Wheels are painted a nd can be treated

with the same agents as the body. For alloy

wheels we recommend use of Alloy Wheel

Preserver.

Paintwork damage

Repair minor paintwork damage such as

stone chips, scratches etc. immediately

using the Touch-up pen or Touch-Up/

Aerosol Paint before rust forms. If rust has

already formed, have a workshop

elimina te the cause. Also check the

surfaces and edges facing the road surface

on which rust may have developed for

some time unnoticed.

Exterior lights

Headlight and other protective light bezels

are made of plastic. If they require

additional cleaning after the vehicle has

been wa shed , clean them w ith Car

Shampoo. Do not use any abrasive or

caustic agents, do not use an ice scraper,

and do not clean them dry.

266 Self-help, vehicle care

Plastic and rubb er p arts

For additional cleaning of plastic and

rubber parts use Interior/Upholstery

Cleaner. Do not use any other agent, and

in particular do not use solvents or petrol.

Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners on

plastic and rubber parts.

Wheels and tyres

Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners on

wheels and tyres.

Interior and upholstery

Clean the vehicle interior, including the

instrument panel facia, using Interior/

Upholstery Cleaner.

The instrument panel should only be

cleaned using a soft damp cloth.

Clean fabric upholstery with a vacuum

cleaner and brush. To remove stains, use

Interior/U pholstery Cleaner that is suitable

for both fabrics and vinyl.

Do not use cleaning agents such as

acetone, tetrachloride, paint thinner, paint

remover, nail varnish remover, washing

powder or bleach. Petrol is also unsuitable.

Open Velcro fasteners on clothing could

damage seat upholstery. Make sure that

Velcro fasteners are closed.

Seat belts

Alw ays keep seat belts clean and dry.

Clean only with lukewarm water or Interior/

Upholstery Cleaner.

Wi nd ows

When cleaning the he ated rear w indow,

make sure that the heating element on the

inside of the window is not damaged.

Use a soft lint-free c loth or cham ois leather

in conjunction with Window Cleaning Spray

and Insect Remover.

Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent is

suitable for de-icing windows.

For mechanical removal of ice, use a

commercially available sharp-edged ice

scraper. Press the scraper firmly ag ainst

the glass so that no dirt can get under it

and scra tch the glass.

Windscreen wiper blades

Wax, such as that used in car w ashes, can

cause streaking on the windscreen when

the wiper is used.

Smearing wiper blades c an be cleaned with

a soft cloth and Vauxhall Windscreen

Wash Solvent, and replaced if necessary –

see page 277.

Locks

The locks are lubricated with a high-quality

Lock Cylinder Grease in the factory. Only

use de-icer in urgent cases, since it has a

de-greasing effect and affects the

operation of the locks. Have the locks

regreased in a workshop after using

de-icer.

Engine compa rtment

Areas of the engine compartment that are

painted in the same colour as the vehicle

must b e looked after like any other painted

surface.

It is ad visab le to wa sh the engine

compartment before and after winter and

preserve it with wax. Cover alternator and

brake fluid reservoir with plastic sheets

before washing the engine.

267Self-help, vehicle care

When washing the engine w ith a steam jet,

do not direct the jet at components of the

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS), the air

conditioning system 3, the Electronic

Climate Control system 3, the auxiliary

heater 3 or the belt drive or its

components.

Engine washing also removes subsequently

applied protective wa x. Therefore after

washing, have a workshop protect the

engine, parts of the braking system in the

engine bay, axle elements with steering,

body elements and cavities, thoroughly

with protective wax.

An engine wash can be performed in the

spring in order to remove dirt that has

adhered to the engine compartment,

which may also have a high salt content.

Check protective wax layer and make good

if necessary.

Do not u se high-pre ss ure jet clea ne rs in the

engine compartment.

Underbody

Your vehicle has a factory-applied PVC

undercoating in the wheel arches

(including the longitudinal mem bers) which

provides permanent protection and needs

no special maintenance.

The surfaces of the vehicle underbody not

covered by PVC are provided a durable

protective wax coating in critical areas.

On vehicles which are washed frequently in

automatic car washes with underbody

washing facility, the protective wax

coating may b e impaired by d irt-dissolving

additives, so check the underbody after

washing and have it waxed if necessary.

Before the start of the cold weather season,

check the PVC coating and protective wax

coating and, if necessary, have them

restored to perfect condition.

Caution - commercially available bitumen/

rubber materials can damage the PVC

coating. We recommend that you have

underbody w ork carried out by a work shop

which knows the p rescrib ed materials and

has experie nc e in the use thereof.

The underbody should be washed

following the end of the cold weather

season to remove any dirt adhering to the

underbody since this may also contain salt.

Check protective wax coating and, if

necessary, have it restored to perfect

condition.

268 Service, maintenance

Service, maintenance

In our ex perience , the most com mon cause

of all complaints is the result of

misunderstanding or lack of

communication between the customer a nd

the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

We sincerely hope you will never have

cause to complain about your vehicle.

However, if things do go wrong, the best

cours e of action for y ou to ta ke is to

contact your Vauxhall Authorised

Repairer’s Service Reception Staff and

explain the difficulty you are having. We

are confident they will do their utmost to

resolve the problem to your complete

satisfaction.

Sometimes, however, despite the best of

intentions of all concerned,

misunderstandings can occur. If your

problem has not been resolved to your

satisfaction, please make an appointment

to discuss the matter with the M anager of

the department concerned.

The majority of areas of concern can be

quickly resolved in this way.

Should you wish to pursue the matter

further, the Principal of the Vauxhall

Authorised Repairer should be made

aware of your concern. It is advisable in

cases such as this to write to him to confirm

your problem and the solutions that have

been offered.

You can be assured the Authorised

Repairer’s Principal will only be too anxious

to fully investigate your problems and

correct any errors made. After all, he has a

large investment in his business and is

proud of his reputation and

professionalism and fully realises that

satisfied customers are his key to success.

In the unlikely event that you are still not

happy with the answer your Vauxhall

Authorised Repairer has given, or the

action he proposes to correct the problem,

you may contact the Customer Care

Department

where a team of Customer

Care Consultants will spare no effort to

ensure your complete satisfaction.

Vauxhall Motors Ltd.

Customer Care,

Griffin Hous e ,

Osborne Road

LUTON,

Be ds. , LU1 3YT

Telephone: 0845 090 2044

They w ill review all the facts involved. Then

if it is felt some further action can be taken,

the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer will be

advised accordingly. In any case, your

contact will b e acknowledged confirming

Vauxhall Motors’ position in the matter.

If you are not satisfied with the outcome,

you can if you wish, seek advice from an

independent third party such as:

Autom obile Association (A.A.)

Fanum House, Basing View,

BASI NGSTOKE,

Hants., RG21 4EA

Inspection system ............. ................... 270

Genuine Vauxhall Parts and

Accessories ..................... ......... .......... 271

A note on safety .. ............................... . 271

Checking and topping up fluids ......... 271

Engine oil .................. ......... ................... 272

Diesel fuel filter ............. ............. .......... 274

Coolant ..................... ......... ................... 274

Brake fluid ..................... ............. .......... 276

Windscreen wiper .... ......... ................... 277

W ind screen and headligh t was h

sy ste ms 3.. ........................................ . 279

Battery ........................................ .......... 280

Protecting electronic components ..... 280

Vehicle decomm issioning.................... 281

Vehicle recommissioning..................... 281

Calls may be monitored and recorded for

training purpo ses.

269Service, mainten ance

Roy al Autom obile Club (R.A.C. ),

R.A.C. Motoring Services Ltd.

89-91 Pall Mall,

LONDON, SW1Y 5HS

The Customer Relations Department,

Soci ety of Motor Manufacturers and

Traders Ltd. (S.M.M. T.),

Forbes House, Halkin Street,

LONDON, SW1X 7DS

Customer Complaints Service,

Scot tish Motor Trad e A ssocia tion,

(S.M .T.A.),

3 Palmerston Place,

EDINBURGH, EH12 5AQ

The National Conciliation Service,

Retail Motor Ind ustry Fed era tion,

9 North Street,

RUBGY, CV21 2AB

If you have a p roblem w hilst abroa d:

The Service Departments of Adam Opel

GmbH and General Motors branches

everyw here will provide information and

assistance:

In Luxembourg please contact the

General Motors Service Department in

Antwerp – Belgium

Telephone: 00 32-34 50 63 29

General Motors Austria GmbH

Groß-Enzersdorfer Str. 59

1220 Vienna – Austria

Tel. 00 43-1-2 88 77 444 or

00 43-1-2 88 77 0

General Motors Belgium N.V.

Noordelaan 401 - Haven 500

2030 Antw erp – Belgium

Tel. 00 32-34 50 63 29

General Motors Southeast Europe

org. slož ka

Olbrachtova 9

140 00 Prague – Czech Republic

Tel. 00 420-2 39 004 321

General Motors Danmark

Jaegersborg Alle 4

2920 Charlottenlund – Denmark

Tel. 00 45-39 97 85 00

Vauxhall Motors Ltd.

Customer Ca re

Griffin House, Osborne Road

Luton, Bedfor dshire, LU1 3YT – Engla nd

Tel. 00 44-845 090 2044

General Motors Finland Oy

Pajuniityntie 5

00320 Helsinki – Finland

Tel. 00 358-9 817 101 47

General Motors France

1 – 9, avenue du Marais

Angle Q ua i de Bezons

95101 Argenteuil Cedex – France

Tel. 00 33-1-34 26 30 51

ADAM OP E L Gm bH

Bahnhofsplatz 1

65423 Rüsselsheim – Germany

Tel. 00 49-61 42-77 50 00 or

00 49-61 42-7 70

General Motors Hellas S.A.

56 Kifisia s Avenue & De lfon str.

Amarousion

151 25 Athens – Greece

Tel. 00 30-1-6 80 65 01

General Motors Southeast Europe Ltd.

Szabadsag utca 117

2040 Budaörs – Hungary

Tel. 00 36-23 446 100

General Motors India

Sixth Floor, Tower A

Global Business Park

Mehra uli – Gurgaon Road

Gurgaon 122 022, Haryana – India

Tel. 00 91-124 280 3333

General Motors Ireland Ltd.

Opel House, Unit 60, Heathe r Road

Sandyford, Dublin 18 – Ireland

Te l. 00 353 1-216 10 00

General Motors Italia Srl

Piazzale dell’Industria 40

00144 Rome – Italy

Tel. 00 39-06-5 46 51

General Motors Nederland B.V.

Lage Mosten 49 – 63

4822 NK Breda – Netherlands

Tel. 00 31-76-5 44 83 00

General Motors Norge AS

Kjeller-Vest 6

2027 Kjeller – Norway

Tel. 00 47-23 50 01 04

General Motors Poland Sp. z o. o.

Wołoska 5

06-675 Warsaw – Poland

Tel. 00 48-22-606 17 00

270 Service, maintenance

General Motors Portugal

Quinta da Fonte

Edificío Fernão M agalhães, Piso 2

2780-190 Paço d’Arcos – Portugal

Tel. 00 351- 21 440 75 00

General Motors Southeast Europe

org. zložka

Apollo Business Centre

Mlynské Nivy 45

821 09 Bratislava - Slovakia

Tel. 00 421-2 58 275 543

General Motors España S.L.

Paseo de la Castellana, 91

28046 Madrid – Spain

Tel. 00 34-902 25 00 25

General Motors Norden AB

Årstaängvägen 17

100 73 Stockholm – Sweden

Tel. 00 46-20 333 000

General Motors Suisse S.A.

Stelzenstraße 4

8152 Glattbrugg – Switzerland

Tel. 00 41-44 828 28 80

General Motors Türkiye Ltd. Sti.

Kemalpasa yolu üz eri

35861 Torb ali / Izmir – Turkey

Tel. 00 90-2 32 -8 53-14 53

In Albania, Bosnia-H erzegovina ,

Bulga ria, C roatia, Estonia, Latvia ,

Lithuania, Macedonia, Romania,

Serbia-Montenegro and Slovenia

please contact the

General Motors Service Department in

Budaörs – Hungary

Tel. 00 36-23 446 100

Inspection system

In orde r to guarantee econom ical and safe

vehicle operation and to m aintain the

value of your vehicle, it is of vital

importance that all maintenance work is

carried out at the proper intervals.

For vehicles with strict engine oil change

and service intervals, before servicing is

due the disp la y InS P appears on the

odometer disp lay after the ignition has

been switched on and off: Have your next

service carried out by a workshop within

one we ek or 30 0 miles (5 00 km ).

The service interval display takes account

of off-the-road periods during which the

battery is disconnected.

For vehicles with flexible oil change and

service intervals, the length of these

intervals is based on several parameters

stemming from usage.

For this reason, various engine-specific

data is continually gathered and is used to

calculate the remaining distance until the

next service.

The remaining distance can be seen in the

odometer display when the ignition is off:

Press the reset button next to the trip

odometer. InSP and the remaining distance

will be displayed.

If the rema ining d istance is less than

1000 miles (1500 km), InSP is displayed

with a remaining distance of 600 miles

(1000 km) when the ignition is switched on.

InSP is displayed for several seconds if the

remaining distance is less than 300 miles

(500 km). Have service work that is due

carried out within one week or 300 miles

(500 km ). Have this work carried out by a

Vauxhall Authorised Repairer in order to

avoid invalidation of warranty claims.

Further information on maintenance and

the inspection system can be found in the

Service Booklet, found in the glove

compartment.

Have maintenance work – and repair work

on the body and the eq uipm ent – carried

out professionally by a workshop. We

recommend using your Vauxhall

Authorised Repairer, who has excellent

knowledge of Vauxhall vehicles and has

the necessary special tools and up-to-date

Service Instructions from Vauxhall. It is

particularly advisable to use a Vauxhall

Authorised Repairer during the warranty

period in order to prevent loss of warranty.

Further information can be found in the

Service Booklet.

271Service, mainten ance

Separ ate anti-cor rosion servi ce

Have this work carried out according to the

intervals specified in the Service Booklet.

Genuine Vauxhall Parts and

Accessories

We recommend that you use "Genuine

Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" and

conversion parts approved expressly for

your vehicle type. These parts have

undergone special tests to establish their

reliability, safety and specific suitability for

Vauxhall vehicles. Despite continuous

market monitoring, we cannot assess or

guarantee these attributes for other

products, even if they have been granted

approval by the relevant authorities or in

some other form.

"Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories"

and conversion parts approved by

Vauxhall can be obtained from your

Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who can

provide expert advice on permitted

technical c hanges and ensure correct

installation.

A note on safety

To avoid injury from moving parts and

cables conducting ignition voltage, only

carry out engine compartment checks

(e.g. checking brake fluid or engine oil

level) when the ignition is switched off.

Never carry out any repairs or adjustment

and maintenance work on the vehicle

yourself. This especially applies to the

engine, chassis and safety parts. You may

unwittingly infringe the provisions of the

law and, by not performing the work

properly, endanger yourself and other

road users.

Checking and topping up fluids

To aid identification, the caps used when

topping up engine oil, coolant and wash

fluid as well as the oil dipstick handle may

be coloured yellow.

9 Warning

The cooling fan is controlled by a

thermoswitch and ca n the refore start

unexpectedly even if the ignition is

switched off. Risk of injury.

Electronic ignition systems generate very

high voltages. Do not touch the ignition

system; high voltage can be fatal.

272 Service, maintenance

Engine oil

Information on engine oils is found in the

Service Booklet.

Eng ine oil level and consum ption

Ev ery engine consumes engine oil for

tec hnical re asons. The engine oil

consumption cannot be assessed until a

fairly long distance has been driven, and

may be a bove the specified value when the

vehicle is first being driven (run-in period ).

Frequent driving at high revs increases

engine oil consumption.

In vehicles with engine oil level

monitoring 3, the engine oil level is

monitored automatically - see page 103.

It is advisable to check the oil level b efore

setting out on long journeys.

Engine oil level check , topp ing up engine

oil

The illustrations on this page show

examples of the checks for various petrol

and diesel engines. Fig. 17780 J on the next

page shows the checks for engine

Z30DT

The oil level must be checked with the

vehicle on a level surface and w ith the

engine (which must be at operating

temperature) switched off. Wait at least

5 minutes before chec king the level to

allow the normal engine oil accumulation

in the engine to drain into the oil pan.

9 Wa rning

Do not allow the engine oil to drop below

the minimum level.

9 Warning

Important: It is the owner’s responsibility

to maintain the correct level of an

appropriate quality oil in the engine.

Sales designation – see page 284, 285.

273Service, mainten ance

To check the engine oil level, insert wiped

oil dipstick into dipstick tube as far as it will

go. Top engine oil up if the level has

dropped into the range of the top-up mark

MIN.

The engine oil level must not exceed the

upper mark MAX on the dipstick. Excess

engine oil must be drained off or extracted.

If the engine oil level is above the MAX

mark there is a risk of damage to the

engine or the catalytic converter.

The amount filled must be between

the MIN and MAX marks – see page 308.

Top up with the same brand of engine oil

that was used during the previous oil

change, following the instructions in the

Service Booklet.

To close, position the cap and screw it into

place.

Capacities – see page 308.

Engine oil change, oi l filter chang e

Change oil at a workshop according to the

service interval shown on the display.

We recommend that you use genuine

engine oil filters.

9 Wa rnin g

Waste engine oil cannot be disposed of

with domestic refuse. Observe the legal

requirements for disposal of old oil and

filters to protect the environment and

your health.

274 Service, maintenance

Diesel fuel filter

On each engine oil change, have the fuel

filter checked for any water residue by a

workshop.

For engines

Z 19 DT, Z 19 DTL an d

Z 19 DTH , control indicator A illuminates

if there is water in the diesel fuel filter.

Have fuel filter checked at shorter intervals

if the vehicle is subjecte d to e xtrem e

operating conditions such as high humidity

(primarily in coastal areas), extremely high

or low outside temperatures and

substantially varying daytim e and night-

time temperatures.

Coo lant

The glycol-based coolant provides

excellent corrosion protection for the

heating and cooling systems as well

as anti-freeze protection down to approx.

-28 °C. It remains in the cooling system

throughout the year and need not be

changed.

Use of certain anti-freezes can lead to

engine dam age. We therefore rec om mend

that you use only approved anti-freezes.

Anti-freeze a nd corrosion protection

Before the start of winter, have a workshop

che ck the anti-fre eze protection. The anti-

freeze level must guarantee protection

down to approx. -28 °C. Insufficient anti-

freeze will reduce the frost protection level

and the corrosion protection. If necessary

add anti-freeze.

If c oolant loss is topped up with water,

have concentration checked and a dd anti-

freeze if necessary.

Sales designation – see page 28 4, 285.

9 Warning

Anti-freeze is a danger to health; it must

therefore be kept in the original conta iner

and out of the reach of children.

275Service, mainten ance

Coola nt level

Hardly any losses occur since the cooling

system is sealed and it is thus rarely

necessary to top up the coolant.

4-cylinder petrol and diesel engines: When

the cooling system is c old , the c oolant level

in the expansion tank should be slightly

above the KALT/COL D mark. Coolant level

can be read off from the outside of the

expansion tank.

For V6 petrol and diesel engines, the

exp ansion tank must be opened in ord er to

check coolant level. When the cooling

sy ste m is cold, the coolant should be up to

the COLD mark on the filler opening.

When the engine is at op erating

temperature, coolant level rises. It falls

again when the system cools. If it falls

below the KALT/COLD mark when the

system is cold, top up to the mark.

Top up anti-freeze. If no anti-freeze is

available, top up with clean tap water. If

tap water is unavailable, distilled water

can be used.

After filling with tap water or d istilled

water, measure the anti-freeze

concentration and add anti-freeze if

required. Have a workshop establish the

cause of the coolant loss.

Too low a coolant level can cause engine

damage.

To close, position the cap and screw it into

place.

9 Warning

Allow engine to cool down before

rem oving coolant filler cap. Remove filler

cap carefully so that pressure can escape

slowly, otherwise there is a risk of

scalding.

276 Service, maintenance

Coola nt temperat ure

If the temperature gauge enters the right-

hand (warning) zone or control indicator W

illuminates, check the coolant level

immediately.

z Coolant level too low:

Top up coolant, noting the instructions

given under "Anti-freeze and corrosion

protection" and "Coolant level". Have

the cause of the coolant loss rectified by

a workshop.

z Coolant level OK:

Have the cause of the elevated coolant

temperature rectified. Contact a

workshop.

Brake fluid

Brake fluid level

The fluid level in the reservoir must be

neither higher than the MAX mark nor

lower than the MIN mark.

Use of certain brake fluids can lead to

damage or reduced braking effect. We

therefore recommend that you use only

high performance approved b rake fluid.

Extrem e cle anliness is nee ded when

topping up, since contamination in the

brake fluid can cause brake system

malfunctions.

After correcting the brake fluid level, have

a workshop eliminate the cause of the

brake fluid loss.

9 Warning

Brake fluid is poisonous and corrosive. Do

not allow it to come into contact with

eyes, skin, fab ric or painted surfaces.

Direct contact could cause injury and

damage.

277Service, mainten ance

Brake fluid chang e

Brake fluid is hygroscopic, i.e. it absorbs

water. If the brakes become hot, such as

when driving on long downhill stretches,

vapour bubbles can occur in the water,

which can have an extremely adverse

effect on braking power (depending on the

proportion of water).

The fluid change intervals specified in the

Service Booklet must therefore be

observed.

Windscreen wiper

Clear vision is essential for safe driving.

Perform regular checks on the windscreen

wiper and headlight wash system 3 to

ensure they are operating correctly. We

recommend wiper blade repla cement at

least once a year.

If the windscreen is dirty, operate the

windscreen wash system before switching

on the windscreen wiper or setting the

wiper to automatic operation with the rain

se ns or 3. This will avoid wiper blade wear.

Do not switch on the wind screen wiper or

set the wiper to automatic operation with

the rain sensor 3 if the windscreen is iced

up as this could da mage the wiper blades

or the wipe r sy ste m.

If the wiper becomes frozen on to the glass,

we recomm end that it be released with the

aid of De-icer Spray.

Smearing wiper blades c an be cleaned with

a soft cloth and Vauxhall Windscreen

Wash Solvent.

Wiper blades whose lips have become

hardened, cracked or covered with silicone

must be replaced. This may be necessary

as a result of the effects of ice, thawing salt

or heat, or the incorrect use of cleaning

agents.

Switch off the windscreen wiper or

automatic wip er with rain sensor 3 in car

washes - see pages 11, 264.

Windscreen w ip er blad e m aintenanc e -

see page 266.

9 Wa rning

Have the brake fluid changed by a

workshop. Observe the legal

requirements for disposal of brake fluid

to protect the environment and your

he alth .

278 Service, maintenance

To ensure proper operation of the rain

sensor 3, the sensor a rea must be free from

dust, dirt and ice. The windscreen w ash

system must also be operated at regular

intervals and the sensor area must be

de-iced. Vehicles with rain sensor can be

ide ntified by the sensor area near the top

of the windscreen.

Service setting for front wind sc reen wiper

(e.g. for changing or cleaning the front

wiper bla des).

Within 8 seconds of switching off the

engine but with the key in the starter

switch, press the windscreen wiper stalk

downwards. Release the stalk as soon as

the wiper blades are vertical.

Wiper blades on the windscreen

Activating service position - see preceding

column. Lift wiper arm. Press the release

lever and detach the wiper blade.

279Service, mainten ance

Windscreen and headlight wash

systems 3

The filler neck of the windscreen wash

system and headlight wash system fluid

container 3 is at the front left of the engine

compartment next to the b attery. The fluid

level in the reservoir can be read off from

the level indicator. Do not fill above

Ca pacities – see page 308.

Fill only with clean water to prevent the

nozzles from clogging. To improve

cleaning efficiency, w e recommend that

you add a little Vauxhall Windscreen Wash

Solvent.

The windscreen wash system and

headlight wash system will not freeze in

winter:

When closing the reservoir, press the lid

firmly ov er the bea ded edge all the way

round.

Frost protection

down to

Mixture ratio of

Vauxhall

Windscreen

Wash Solvent to

Water

- 5 °C 1 : 3

- 10 °C 1 : 2

- 20 °C 1 : 1

- 30 °C 2 : 1

280 Service, maintenance

Battery

The b attery is maintenanc e-free .

Retro-fitting of electrical or electronic

accessories can discharge or add extra

load to the battery. Take advice on the

technical possibilities, e.g. use of a more

powerful battery.

Laying up the vehicle for more than

4 weeks can lead to battery discharge,

which may reduce the service life of the

battery. Disconnect battery from on-board

power supply by detaching negative

terminal.

The Vauxhall a larm system 3 sire n must be

deactivated as follows: switch the ignition

on then off, disconnect the vehicle’s

battery within 15 seconds.

Ensure that ignition is switched off before

connecting battery. Then perform the

following actions:

z Setting date and time in the information

display – see pages 110, 113, 118.

z Activate window and sunroof

electronics 3 if necessary –

see pages 47, 49.

In order to prevent the battery from

discharging, some consume rs such as the

courtesy light automatically switch off

after approx. 20 minutes.

Disconnecting/connecting the battery

from/to the electrical system

Disconnect battery from vehicle power

supply before charging: disconnect

negative cable first, then the positive

cable.

The polarity of the battery, i.e. the positive

and negative terminal connections, must

not b e switched. Always connect the

positive cable first, then the negative

cable.

Protecting electronic components

In orde r to prev ent faults in elec tronic

components in the electrical system, never

connect or disconnect battery with engine

running or ignition switched on. Never start

engine with battery disconnected, e.g.

when starting using jump leads.

To avoid damaging the vehicle, do not

make any modifications to the electrical

system, e.g. connecting ad ditional

consumers or tampering with electronic

control units (chip tuning).

9 Wa rning

Have the ba ttery changed by a

workshop. Observe the legal

requirements for disposal of old batteries

to protect the environment and your

he alth .

9 Wa rnin g

Electronic ignition systems generate very

high voltages. Do not touch the ignition

system; high voltage can be fatal.

281Service, mainten ance

Vehicle decomm issioning

Observe national regulations.

If the vehicle is to be parked for several

months, to avoid damage have the

following work performed by a workshop.

z Wash and preserve the vehicle –

seepage264.

z Check corrosion protection in engine

compartment and on underbody and

repair if necessary.

z Clean and preserv e rubbe r seals on

bonnet and doors.

z Change engine oil – see page 273.

z Check anti-freeze and corrosion

protection – see page 274.

z Check the coolant level, top up with anti-

freeze if necessary – see page 275.

z Empty windsc reen w ash system and

headlight wash system 3 .

z Increase tyre pressure to value specified

for full load – see page 299.

Vehicle storag e

z Park vehicle in dry, well ventilated place.

With manual transmission or

Easytronic 3 , engage 1st or reverse

gear. With automatic transmission 3,

selector lever in P. Use chocks or the like

to prevent the vehicle from rolling.

z Do not apply handbrake.

z Disconnect battery by disengaging

negative terminal from vehicle electrical

system – see page 280.

Vehicle recommissioning

Observe national regulations.

Perform the following work before

recommissioning the vehicle:

z Connect ba ttery – see page 280.

z Check tyre pressure and correct if

necessary – see page 299.

z Fill up w indscreen wash system and

headlight wash system 3 –

see page 279.

z Check engine oil level – see page 272.

z Check the coolant level; top up with anti-

freeze if necessary – see page 275.

z Fit the number plate if necessary.

282 Technical data

Technical data

Vehicle documents,

identification plate

The technical data is determined in

accordance with European Community

standards. We reserve the right to make

modifications. Specifications in the vehicle

docum ents always have priority over those

given in this manual.

The identification plate is affixed to the

front right door frame.

Information on identification plate:

Vehicle documents, identification

plate...... ........ ..................................... 282

Vehicle identification d ata............ ...... 283

Coolant, b rake fluid, oils .. ............. ...... 283

Engine data.......... ......... ....................... 284

Performance.... ............................... ...... 286

Fuel consumption, CO

emissions ......

288

Weights, payloa d and roof load .. ...... 293

Tyres ........ ....................................... ...... 299

Electrical system .. ................................ 307

Ca pacities ..................... ......... .............. 308

Dimensions.. ......... ................................ 310

1 Manufacturer

2 Type approval numb er

3 Vehicle I dentification Number

4 Gross Vehicle Weight rating

5 Permissib le Gros s Train Weig ht

6 Maximum permissible front axle load

7 Maximum permissible rear axle load

8 Vehicle-specific or country-specific

data

283Technical data

Vehicle identification data

The Vehicle Identification Number is

stamped on the identification plate and

beneath a cover on the floor of the vehicle

between the front door and driver’s seat.

In other model variants, the identification

plate may also be affix ed to the instrument

panel.

Engine code and engine number: stamp ed

on left-hand side of engine on crankcase.

Coolant, brake fluid, oils

Only use approved fluids.

Use of unsuitable fluids can cause serious

damage to the vehicle.

Engine oils

Information on engine oils is found in the

Service Booklet.

284 Technical data

Engine data

Sales designation

Engine identifier code

1.8

Z 18 XE

1. 8

Z 18 XER

2.0 Turbo

Z 20 NET

2.2

Z 22 SE

2.2 DIRECT

Z 22 YH

2.8 V6

Z 28 NEL

Numb er of cylinders 4 4 4 4 4 6

Piston displacement (cm

) 1796 1796 1998 2198 2198 2792

Engine power (kW)

at rpm

6000

103

6300

129

5500

108

5600

114

5600

169

5500

Torque (Nm)

at rpm

167

3800

175

3800

265

2500 to 3800

203

4000

220

3800

330

1800 to 4500

Type of fuel

Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol

Octane requirement (RON)

unle aded

or unle aded

Standard high-quality fuels, e.g. unleaded DIN EN 228; value printed in bold: recommended fuel.

2)3 )

Knock control system automatically adjusts ignition timing according to type of fuel used (octane number).

Slight reduction in engine output and to rque if 91 RON is used.

2)3)

2)4 )

If no unleaded Premium fuel is available, 91 RON can be used taking care to avoid high engine load or full load as well as for driving in m ountaino us

terrain with a caravan/trailer load or high payload.

2) 4)

–

The use of fuel that is at least 95 RON is prescribed.

91 octane fuel must not be used.

2)3 )

Max . permissible engine speed,

continuous operation (rpm) approx. 6500 6500 6200 6500 6500 6700

Engine oil consumption (l/1000 km) 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6

285Technical data

Engine data

Sales designation

Engine identifier code

2.8 V6

Z 28 NET

VXR

Z 28 N ET

1.9 CDTI

Z 19 DTL

1. 9 CDTI

Z 19 DT

1. 9 CDTI

Z 19 DTH

3. 0 C DTI

Z 30 DT

Number of cylinders 664446

Piston displacement (cm

) 2792 2792 1910 1910 1910 2958

Engine power (kW)

at rpm

184

5500

206

5500

3500

3500 to 4000

110

4000

135

4000

Torque (Nm)

at rpm

350

1800 to 4500

355

1800 to 4500

260

1700 to 2500

280

2000 to 2750

320

2000 to 2750

400

1900 to 2700

Type of fuel Petrol Petrol Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel

Octane requirement (RON)

unle aded

or unle aded

Cetane requirement (CN)

Standard high-quality fuels, e.g. unleaded DIN EN 228, Diesel DIN EN 590; D = Diesel; value printed in bold: recommended fuel.

2)3 )

–

Knock control system automatically adjusts ignition timing according to type of fuel used (octane number).

Slight reduction in engine output and to rque if 91 RON is used.

–

Slight reduction in engine output and to rque if 95 RON is used.

91 octane fuel must not be used.

–

49 (D)

A lo wer va l ue is pos sib l e wi th w i nter fu e ls.

–

49 (D )

–

49 (D )

–

49 (D )

Max . permissible engine speed,

continuous operation (rpm) approx. 6700 6700 5100 5100 5100 5000

Engine oil consumption (l/1000 km) 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6

286 Technical data

Performance

(approx. mph / km/h), Saloon / Hatch

Engine

Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.

Z 18 X E Z 18 XER Z 20 NE T Z 22 SE Z 2 2 YH Z 2 8 N EL

Maximum speed

Manual transmission

Sports transmission

Easytronic

Automatic transmission

The maximum speed indicated is achievable at kerbweight (without driver) plu s 200 kg payload. Optional equipment could reduce the specified

maximu m speed of th e vehicle.

126/203

127/205

–

130/210

129/207

–

143/230

–

134/216

–

130/210

135/218

–

130/210

155/250

–

155/250

Engine

Z 28 NET Z 28 NET VXR Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT

Maximum speed

Manual transmission

Sports transmission

Easytronic

Automatic transmission

155/250

–

155/250

The maximum speed is limited electronically.

155/250

–

155/250

116/186

–

124/200

–

135/217

–

130/210

143/230

–

140/226

287Technical data

Performance

(approx. mph / km/h), Esta te

Engine

Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.

Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL

Maximum speed

Manual transmission

Sports transmission

Easytronic

Automatic transmission

The maximum speed indicated is achievable at kerbweight (without driver) plu s 200 kg payload. Optional equipment could reduce the specified

maximu m speed of th e vehicle.

–

124/199

–

126/203

130/209

128/207

–

139/224

–

130/210

–

129/208

152/245

–

152/245

Engine

Z 28 NET Z 28 NET VXR Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT

Maximum speed

Manual transmission

Sports transmission

Easytronic

Automatic transmission

155/250

–

155/250

The maximum speed is limited electronically.

155/250

–

155/250

113/182

–

121/195

–

130/210

–

129/208

140/225

–

137/221

288 Technical data

Fuel consumption, CO

emissions

Directive 80/1268/EEC (last changed

by 2004/3/EC) has applied for the

measurement of fuel consumption

since 1996.

The directive is oriented to actual driving

practices: Urban driving is rated at

approx.

and extra-urban driving with

approx.

(urban and extra-urban

consumption). C old sta rts a nd acceleration

phases are also taken into consideration.

The specification of CO

emission is also a

constituent of the directive.

The figures given must not be taken as a

guarantee for the actual fuel consumption

of a particular vehicle.

All values are based on the EU base model

with standard equipment.

The calculation of fuel consumption as

specified by directive 2004/3/EC takes

account of the vehicle’s kerbweight,

ascertained in accordance with these

regulations. Optional extras may result in

slightly higher fuel consumption and CO

emission levels than those quoted.

To convert l/100 km into mpg, divide 282

by num ber of litres/100 km.

S aving fuel, p rotecting the e nvironm ent –

see page 186.

289Technical data

Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO

emissions (approx. g/km), Saloon 4-door (tyre width up to 225 mm)

Engine

Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.

Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 SE Z 22 YH

Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic

transmission

urban

extra-urban

total

10.4/10.7/–/–

5.5/ 5.8/–/–

7.3/ 7.6/–/–

175/ 182/–/–

10.1/ 9.9/ 9.7/–

5.5/ 5.6/ 5.4/–

7.2/ 7.2/ 7.0/–

173/173/168/–

–/12.5/–/–

–/ 6.3/–/–

–/ 8.6/–/–

–/ 206/–/–

– /11.4/–/ 13.3

– / 6.2/–/ 6.5

– / 8.1/–/ 9.0

– / 194/–/ 216

10.3/10.3/–/11.3

6. 0/ 5.9/– / 6.1

7. 6/ 7.5/– / 8.0

182/ 180/–/ 192

Engine

Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT

Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic

transmission

urban

extra-urban

total

15.4/–/–/17.1

7. 3/–/–/ 7. 3

10.3/–/–/10.9

247/–/–/ 26 2

15.4/–/–/17.1

7.3/–/–/ 7.3

10.3/–/–/10.9

247/–/–/ 262

7.4/–/–/–

4.7/–/–/–

5.7/–/–/–

154/–/–/–

7.4/–/–/–

4.7/–/–/–

5.7/–/–/–

154/–/–/–

7.4/–/–/ 9.4

4.7/–/–/ 5.3

5.7/–/–/ 6.8

154/–/–/184

9.8/–/–/10.2

5.2/–/–/ 5.3

6.9/–/–/ 7.1

186/–/–/ 192

Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO

emissions (approx. g/km), Saloon 4-door (tyre width up to 235 mm)

Engine

Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 SE Z 22 YH

Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic

transmission

urban

extra-urban

total

10.5/10.8/–/–

5.6/ 5.9/–/–

7.4/ 7.7/–/–

178/ 185/–/–

10.2/10.0/ 9.8/–

5.6/ 5.7/ 5.5/–

7.3/ 7.3/ 7.1/–

175/ 175/170/–

–/12.6/–/–

–/ 6.4/–/–

–/ 8.7/–/–

–/209/–/–

– /11.5/–/ 13.4

– / 6.3/–/ 6.6

– / 8.2/–/ 9.1

– / 197/–/ 218

10.4/10.4/–/11.4

6. 1/ 6.0/– / 6.2

7. 7/ 7.6/– / 8.1

185/ 182/–/194

Engine

Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT

Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic

transmission

urban

extra-urban

total

15.5/–/–/17.2

7. 4/–/–/ 7. 4

10.4/–/–/11.0

250/–/–/2 64

15.5/–/–/17.2

7.4/–/–/ 7.4

10.4/–/–/11.0

250/–/–/264

7.5/–/–/–

4.8/–/–/–

5.8/–/–/–

157/–/–/–

7.5/–/–/–

4.8/–/–/–

5.8/–/–/–

157/–/–/–

7.5/–/–/ 9.5

4.8/–/–/ 5.4

5.8/–/–/ 6.9

157/–/–/186

9.9/–/–/10.3

5.3/–/–/ 5.4

7.0/–/–/ 7.2

189/–/–/ 194

290 Technical data

Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO

emissions (approx. g/km), Hatch 5-door (tyre width up to 225 mm)

Engine

Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.

Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 SE

Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission

urban

extra-urban

total

10.4/10.7/–/–

5.5/ 5.8/–/–

7.3/ 7.6/–/–

175/ 182/–/ –

10.1/ 9.9/ 9.7/–

5.5/ 5.6/ 5.4/–

7.2/ 7.2/ 7.0/–

173/173/168/–

–/12.5/–/–

–/ 6.3/–/–

–/ 8.6/–/–

–/ 206/–/–

– /11.4/–/13.3

– / 6. 2/–/ 6.5

– / 8. 1/–/ 9.0

– / 194/–/ 216

Engine

Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET Z 28 NET VXR

Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission

urban

extra-urban

total

10.3/10.3/–/11.3

6.0/ 5.9/–/ 6.1

7.6/ 7.5/–/ 8.0

182/ 180/–/ 192

15.4/–/–/17.1

7.3/–/–/ 7.3

10.3/–/–/10.9

247/–/–/ 262

15.4/–/– /17. 1

7.3/–/–/ 7.3

10.3/–/– /10. 9

247/–/–/ 262

15.4/–/–/

7. 3/–/–/

10.3/–/–/

247/–/–/

Values not available at time of printing.

Engine

Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT

Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission

urban

extra-urban

total

7.4/–/–/–

4.7/–/–/–

5.7/–/–/–

154/–/–/–

7.4/–/–/–

4.7/–/–/–

5.7/–/–/–

154/–/–/–

7.4/–/–/ 9.5

4.7/–/–/ 5.4

5.7/–/–/ 6.9

154/–/–/186

9.8/–/–/10.2

5.2/–/– / 5. 3

6.9/–/– / 7. 1

186/–/–/ 192

291Technical data

Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO

emissions (approx. g/km), Hatch 5-door (tyre width up to 235 mm)

Engine

Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.

Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 SE

Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission

urban

extra-urban

total

10.5/10.8/–/–

5. 6/ 5.9/–/ –

7. 4/ 7.7/–/ –

178/ 185/–/–

10.2/10.0/ 9.8/–

5.6/ 5.7/ 5.5/–

7.3/ 7.3/ 7.1/–

175/ 175/170/–

–/12.6/–/–

–/ 6.4/–/–

–/ 8.7/–/–

–/ 209/–/–

– /11.5/–/13.4

– / 6.3/–/ 6.6

– / 8.2/–/ 9.1

– / 197/–/ 218

Engine

Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET Z 28 NET VXR

Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission

urban

extra-urban

total

10.4/10.4/–/11.4

6.1/ 6.0/–/ 6.2

7.7/ 7.6/–/ 8.1

185/ 182/–/ 194

15.5/–/–/17.2

7.4/–/– / 7. 4

10.4/–/–/11.0

250/–/–/ 264

15.5/–/–/17.2

7.4/–/–/ 7.4

10.4/–/–/11.0

250/–/–/ 264

15.4/–/–/

7.3/–/–/

10.3/–/–/

247/–/–/

Values not available at time of printing.

Engine

Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT

Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission

urban

extra-urban

total

7.5/–/–/–

4.8/–/–/–

5.8/–/–/–

157/–/–/–

7.5/–/–/–

4.8/–/–/–

5.8/–/–/–

157/–/–/–

7.5/–/–/ 9.6

4.8/–/–/ 5.5

5.8/–/–/ 7.0

157/–/–/189

9.9/–/–/10.3

5.3/–/–/ 5.4

7.0/–/–/ 7.2

189/–/–/ 194

292 Technical data

Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO

emissions (approx. g/km), Estate (tyre width up to 225 mm)

Engine

Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.

Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL

Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic

transmission

urban

extra-urban

total

–/11.0/–/–

–/ 6.1/–/–

–/ 7.9/–/–

–/ 190/–/–

10.3/10.4/10.0/–

5.9/ 6.1/ 5.7/–

7.5/ 7.7/ 7.3/–

180/ 185/ 175/–

–/12.7/–/–

–/ 6.5/–/–

–/ 8.8/–/–

–/ 211/–/–

10.6/10.6/–/11.5

6. 3/ 6.2/– / 6. 3

7. 9/ 7.8/– / 8.2

190/ 187/ –/ 19 7

15.5/–/– /17.4

7.4/–/–/ 7.6

10.4/–/– /11.2

250/–/–/ 269

Engine

Z 28 NET Z 28 NET VXR Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT

Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic

transmission

urban

extra-urban

total

15.5/–/–/17.4

7. 4/–/–/ 7. 6

10.4/–/–/11.2

250/–/–/ 269

15.5/–/–/

7. 4/–/–/

10.4/–/–/

250/–/–/

Values not available at time of printing.

7.5/–/–/–

4.8/–/–/–

5.8/–/–/–

157/–/–/–

7.5/–/–/–

4.8/–/–/–

5.8/–/–/–

157/–/–/–

7.5/–/–/ 9.6

4.8/–/–/ 5.5

5.8/–/–/ 7.0

157/–/–/189

9.8/–/–/10.3

5.2/–/–/ 5.4

6.9/–/–/ 7.2

186/–/–/ 194

Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO

emissions (approx. g/km), Estate (tyre width up to 235 mm)

Engine

Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL

Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic

transmission

urban

extra-urban

total

–/11.1/–/–

–/ 6.2/–/–

–/ 8.0/–/–

–/ 192/–/–

10.4/10.5/10.1/–

6.0/ 6.2/ 5.8/–

7.6/ 7.8/ 7.4/–

182/ 187/ 178/–

–/12.8/–/–

–/ 6.6/–/–

–/ 8.9/–/–

–/ 214/–/–

10.7/10.7/–/11.6

6. 4/ 6.3/– / 6. 4

8. 0/ 7.9/– / 8. 3

192/ 190/ –/ 199

15.6/–/– /17.5

7.5/–/–/ 7.7

10.5/–/– /11.3

252/–/–/ 271

Engine

Z 28 NET Z 28 NET VXR Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT

Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic

transmission

urban

extra-urban

total

15.6/–/–/17.5

7. 5/–/–/ 7. 7

10.5/–/–/11.3

252/–/–/ 271

15.5/–/–/

7. 4/–/–/

10.4/–/–/

250/–/–/

7.6/–/–/–

4.9/–/–/–

5.9/–/–/–

159/–/–/–

7.6/–/–/–

4.9/–/–/–

5.9/–/–/–

159/–/–/–

7.6/–/–/ 9.7

4.9/–/–/ 5.6

5.9/–/–/ 7.1

159/–/–/192

9.9/–/–/10.4

5.3/–/–/ 5.5

7.0/–/–/ 7.3

189/–/–/ 197

293Technical data

Weights, payload and roof load

The p ayload is the differe nce between the

permitted Gross Vehicle Weight (see

identification plate on page 282) and the

EC kerbweig ht.

To ca lculate the kerbweight, enter the data

for your vehicle below:

is the EC kerbweight.

Optional equipment and accessories

increase the kerbwe ight, w hich me ans that

the payload will also change slig htly.

Pay attention to weight ranges in vehicle

documents and on identification plate.

The combined total of front and rear axle

loa ds must not e xce ed the perm issible

Gross Vehicle Weight. For exam ple, if the

front axle is bearing its maximum

permissible load, the rear axle can only

bear a load that is equal to the Gross

Ve hicle Weight m inu s the front axle load.

When the caravan/trailer is coupled and

the towing vehic le fully loaded (including

all occupants), the permissible rear axle

loa d (see identification plate or v ehicle

documents) may be exceeded by 40 kg. If

the perm issible rear axle load is exceeded,

a maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h)

applies. If na tional regulations specify a

low er maximum speed for vehicles towing

a caravan/trailer, this must be observed.

See the identification plate or v ehicle

documents for permissible axle loads.

Roof load

The permissible roof load is 90 kg, and

100 kg for Estate with roof railing 3 . The

roof load is the combined weight of the

roof rack and the load.

Driving hints – see page 184.

Roof rack – see page 218.

z Kerb weight from

Ta ble 1, pages 294 to

296 + ........ ...... kg

z Additional weight of

equipment versions

from Table 2, page 297 + .............. kg

z Weight of heavy

accessories from

Ta ble 3, p age 298 + .............. kg

Total = ........ ...... kg

294 Technical data

Weights (kg): Ta ble 1, Kerbweight

, Saloon

According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90% full).

Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.

Model Engine

4-door

Manual transmission

Easytronic

Automatic transmission

Vectra with

Electronic C limat e

Cont rol 3

Z 18 XE 1395 – –

Z 18 XER 1395 1395 –

Z 20 NET 1505 – –

Z 22 SE 1460 – 1490

Z 22 YH 1460 – 1490

Z 28 NEL 1565 – 1590

Z 28 NET 1565 – 1590

Z 19 DTL 1505 – –

Z 19 DT 1505 – –

Z 19 DTH 1503 – 1523

Z 30 DT 1635 – 1660

295Technical data

Weights (kg): Table 1, Kerbweight

, H atch

According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90% full).

Sales designation – see pages 284, 285 .

Model Engine

5-door

Manua l transmis sion

Easytronic

Automatic transmission

Vectra with

Electronic Clim ate

Control 3

Z 18 XE 1393 – –

Z 18 XER 1393 1393 –

Z 20 NET 1503 – –

Z 22 SE 1475 – 1505

Z 22 YH 1475 – 1505

Z 28 NEL 1580 – 1605

Z 28 NET 1580 – 1605

Z 19 DTL 1503 – –

Z 19 DT 1503 – –

Z 19 DTH 1523 – 1548

Z 30 DT 1650 – 1675

296 Technical data

Weights (kg): Ta ble 1, Kerbweight

, Estate

According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90% full).

Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.

Model Engine

Estate

Manual transmission Easytronic Automatic transmission

Vectra with

Electronic C limat e

Cont rol 3

Z 18 XE 1475 – –

Z 18 XER 1475 1475 –

Z 20 NET 1570 – –

Z 22 YH 1523 – 1553

Z 28 NEL 1613 – 1638

Z 28 NET 1613 – 1638

Z 19 DTL 1585 – –

Z 19 DT 1585 – –

Z 19 DTH 1600 – 1613

Z 30 DT 1685 – 1710

297Technical data

Weights (kg): Table 2, Additional weight of equipment versions

Saloon / Hatch

Engine

Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.

Z 18 XE,

Z 18 XER

Z 20 NET Z 22 SE Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET

Life 16 16 16 16 16 16

Exclusiv 32 32 32 32 32 32

Design/Elite 313131313131

SRi 282828282828

Engine

Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT

Life 16 16 16 6

Ex clusiv 32 32 32 22

Design/Elite 31 31 31 21

SRi 28 28 28 26

Estate

Engine

Z 18 XE,

Z 18 XER

Z 20 NET Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT

Life 555555553

Exclusiv 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 20

Design/Elite272727272727272725

SRi 232323232323232326

298 Technical data

Weights (kg), Table 3, Heavy accessories

Saloon / Hatch

Accessories Sunroof Towing equipment

Weight 17 23

Estate

Accessories Sunroof Towing equipment

Weight 18 33

299Technical data

Tyres

Not all tyres available on the market

currently me et the structural requirem ents.

We recommend that you consult a

Vauxhall Authorised Repairer concerning

suitable tyre makes.

These tyres have und ergone spe cial tests

to establish their reliability, safety and

specific suitability for Vauxhall vehicles.

Despite co ntinuous ma rk et monitoring, we

are unable to assess these attributes for

other tyres, even if they hav e been g ra nted

approval by the relevant authorities or in

some other form.

Further information – see page 211.

Winter tyres 3

Tyres of size 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 18 and

235/35 R 19 are not to be used as winter

tyres.

Only the winter tyre s sp ecified on p age 306

may b e used on vehicles factory-fitted with

235/35 R 19 tyres.

For Vectra VXR, tyres of size 225/45 R 17 on

a Vauxhall-approved alloy wheel with

designation 7x17, ET39 as well as tyres of

size 235/40 R 18 are permissible as winter

tyres.

If winter tyres are in use, the spare wheel

may still be fitted w ith a summer tyre. Use

of the spare wheel may alter vehicle

handling. Obtain a replacement for the

fa ulty tyre as soon as possible, and have

the wheel balanced and fitted to the

vehicle.

Further information – see page 216.

Tyre chains 3

Tyre c hains may be used on the front

wheels only.

We recommend the use of fine-link tyre

chains which amount to max 10 mm on the

tread a nd tyre inner wall with chain lock

Tyre chains are not permitted on tyre sizes

115/70 R 16, 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 18,

235/40 R 18 and 235/35 R 19.

Further information – see page 217.

Wheels

Wheel bolt tightening torque: 110 Nm.

Spare wheel 3

On vehicles with alloy wheels 3 the spare

wheel may have a steel rim.

Depending on the model variant, the spare

wheel is designed to be an emergency

wheel 3: Using a spare wheel may change

th e vehicle ’s ha nd lin g. Repla ce de fective

tyres as quickly as possible, balance wheel

and fit to vehicle.

The spare wheel may be fitted with a

smaller tyre

and a sm aller rim than the

wheels fitted to the vehicle: Using the spare

wheel may change the vehicle’s handling.

Tyre pressure in psi/bar

The specified tyre pressures are valid for

cold tyres. The increased tyre pressure

resulting from extensive driving must not

be reduced. The tyre pre ssures spe cified on

the following pages apply to both summer

and winter tyres.

Always inflate the spare wheel to the tyre

pressure for full load - see tables on

following pages.

Temporary spare wheel tyre pressure 3 –

see tables on the following pages.

In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring

system 3 there is an adapter in the valve

cap key. Screw adapter to valve before

attaching tyre pressure gauge –

see page 213.

Further information – see pages 211 to 217.

Country-specific version: The spare wheel is

only to be used as a tempo ra ry sp are wh eel.

1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi.

300 Technical data

(ctd.)

Tyre pressure in psi/ba r

Saloon / Hatch Tyre pressure for

load of up to

3people

Tyre pressure

ECO

loaded with

up to 3 people

Tyre pressure for

full load

Engine

Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear

Z 18 XE,

Z 18 XER

195/65 R 15,

205/55 R 16,

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

29/2.0 32/2.2 35/2.4 38/2.6 35/2.4 42/2.9

Z 20 NET 205/55 R 16

35/2.4 35/2.4 – – 36/2.5 44/3.0

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

33/2.3 33/2.3 38/2.6 38/2.6 35/2.4 42/2.9

Z 22 S E,

Z 22 Y H

195/65 R 15,

205/55 R 16

33/2.3 33/2.3 – – 35/2.4 42/2.9

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

32/2.2 32/2.2 36/2.5 36/2.5 33/2.3 41/2.8

all T 115/70 R 16

61/4.2 61/4.2 – – 61/4.2 61/4.2

To reduce fuel co nsumption as much as possible.

Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.

Only permitted as winter tyres.

For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 237.

301Technical data

(ctd.)

Tyre pressure in psi/ba r

Saloon / Hatch Tyre pressure for

lo ad o f up t o

3people

Tyre pressure for full

load

Engine

Tyres Front Rear Front Rear

Z 28 N EL,

Z 28 N ET

215/55 R 16

35/2.4 35/2.4 38/2.6 45/3.1

215/50 R 17

225/45 R 17

225/45 R 18

38/2.6 35/2.4 41/2.8 48/3.3

215/55 R 16

36/2.5 33/2.3 39/2.7 46/3.2

215/50 R 17

225/45 R 17

225/45 R 18

39/2.7 35/2.4 42/2.9 49/3.4

Ve ctra V XR 23 5/35 R 19,

235/40 R 18

42/2.9 38/2.6 45/3.1 51/3.5

225/45 R 17

41/2.8 36/2.5 44/3.0 51/3.5

all T 115/70 R 16

61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2

Sales designation – see pages 284, 28 5.

Ver sio n wi th ma nua l t ra nsm is sio n.

Version with automatic transmission.

Only permitted as winter tyres on Vauxhall-approved alloy wheels.

For notes on the temporary spare wheel - see page 237.

302 Technical data

(ctd.)

Tyre pressure in psi/ba r

Saloon / Hatch Tyre pressure for

loa d of up to

3people

Tyre pressure

ECO

loaded w ith

up to 3 people

Tyre pressure for

full load

Engine

Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear

Z 19 DTL,

Z 19 DTH

195/65 R 15,

205/55 R 16

35/2.4 35/2 .4 – – 36/2.5 44/ 3. 0

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

33/2.3 33/2.3 38/2.6 38/2.6 35/2.4 42/2.9

Z 19 DT 195/65 R 15,

205/55 R 16

33/2.3 33/2 .3 – – 35/2.4 42/ 2. 9

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

32/2.2 32/2.2 36/2.5 36/2.5 33/2.3 41/2.8

Z 30 DT 215/55 R 1 6, 36 /2.5 33/2.3 – – 3 9/2 .7 46/3. 2

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 18

38/2.6 35/2 .4 – – 39/2.7 46/ 3. 2

225/45 R 17 39/2 .7 35/2.4 – – 41/2 .8 48/3. 3

all T 115/70 R 16

61/4.2 61/4 .2 – – 61/4.2 61/ 4. 2

To reduce fuel co nsumption as much as possible.

Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.

For notes on the temporary spare wheel - see page 237.

303Technical data

(ctd.)

Tyre pressure in psi/ba r

Estat e Tyre pressure for

loa d of up to

3people

Tyre pressure

ECO

loaded w ith

up to 3 people

Tyre pressure for

full load

Engine

Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear

Z 18 XE,

Z 18 XER

195/65 R 15,

205/55 R 16,

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

29/2.0 32/2.2 35/2.4 38/2.6 35/2.4 42/2.9

Z 20 NET 205/55 R 16

35/2.4 35/2 .4 – – 36/2.5 44/ 3. 0

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

33/2.3 33/2.3 38/2.6 38/2.6 35/2.4 42/2.9

Z 22 Y H,

Z 22 S E

195/65 R 15

205/55 R 16

33/2.3 33/2 .3 – – 35/2.4 42/ 2. 9

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

32/2.2 32/2.2 36/2.5 36/2.5 33/2.3 41/2.8

all T 115/70 R 16

61/4.2 61/4 .2 – – 61/4.2 61/ 4. 2

To reduce fuel co nsumption as much as possible.

Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.

Only permitted as winter tyres.

For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 237.

304 Technical data

(ctd.)

Tyre pressure in psi/ba r

Estat e Tyre pressure for

lo ad o f up t o

3people

Tyre pressure for full

load

Engine

Tyres Front Rear Front Rear

Z 28 N EL,

Z 28 N ET

215/55 R 16

36/2.5 33/2.3 39/2.7 46/3.2

215/50 R 17

225/45 R 17

225/45 R 18

39/2.7 35/2.4 42/2.9 49/3.4

215/55 R 16

38/2.6 35/2.4 41/2.8 48/3.3

215/50 R 17

225/45 R 18

39/2.7 35/2.4 42/2.9 49/3.4

225/45 R 17

41/2.8 36/2.5 44/3.0 51/3.5

Ve ctra V XR 23 5/35 R 19,

235/40 R 18

42/2.9 38/2.6 45/3.1 51/3.5

225/45 R 17

41/2.8 36/2.5 44/3.0 51/3.5

all T 115/70 R 16

61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2

Sales designation - see pages 284, 285 .

Ver sio n wi th ma nua l t ra nsm is sio n.

Version with automatic transmission.

Only permitted as winter tyres on Vauxhall-approved alloy wheels.

For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 237.

305Technical data

(ctd.)

Tyre pressure in psi/ba r

Estat e Tyre pressure for

loa d of up to

3people

Tyre pressure

ECO

loaded w ith

up to 3 people

Tyre pressure for

full load

Engine

Tyres Front Front Rear Rear Front Rear

Z 19 DTL,

Z 19 DTH

195/65 R 15,

205/55 R 16

35/2.4 35/2 .4 – – 36/2.5 44/ 3. 0

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

33/2.3 33/2.3 38/2.6 38/2.6 35/2.4 42/2.9

Z 19 DT 195/65 R 15,

205/55 R 16

33/2.3 33/2 .3 – – 35/2.4 42/ 2. 9

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

32/2.2 32/2.2 36/2.5 36/2.5 33/2.3 41/2.8

Z 30 DT 215/55 R 1 6 36/2.5 33/2.3 – – 39/2 .7 46/3. 2

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 18

38/2.6 35/2 .4 – – 39/2.7 46/ 3. 2

225/45 R 17 39/2 .7 35/2.4 – – 41/2 .8 48/3. 3

all T 115/70 R 16

61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2

To reduce fuel co nsumption as much as possible.

Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.

For notes on the temporary spare wheel - see page 237.

306 Technical data

(ctd.)

Tyre pressure in psi/ba r

Saloon / Hat ch, Esta te

with 19-inch wheels

Tyre pressure for

lo ad o f up t o

3people

Tyre pressure for full

load

Engine

Tyres Front Rear Front Rear

Z 18 XE,

Z 18 XER,

Z 22 S E,

Z 22 Y H

235/35 R 19 39/2.7 35/ 2.4 41/ 2.8 48 /3.3

215/55 R 16

225/45 R 17

205/50 R 17

33/2.3 33/2.3 36/2.5 44/3.0

Z 20 N ET,

Z 19 DTL,

Z 19 DTH

235/35 R 19 39/2.7 35/ 2.4 41/ 2.8 48 /3.3

215/55 R 16

225/45 R 17

33/2.3 33/2.3 36/2.5 44/3.0

205/50 R 17

39/2.7 35/2.4 41/2.8 48/3.3

Z 28 N EL,

Z 28 N ET

235/35 R 19 42/2.9 38/ 2.6 45/ 3.1 51 /3.5

215/55 R 16

225/45 R 17

41/2.8 36/2.5 44/3.0 51/3.5

205/50 R 17

42/2.9 38/2.6 45/3.1 51/3.5

Z 30 DT 235/35 R 19 42/2.9 38/ 2.6 45/3.1 51/3.5

215/55 R 16

225/45 R 17

39/2.7 36/2.5 42/2.9 49/3.4

205/50 R 17

42/2.9 38/2.6 45/3.1 51/3.5

all T 115/70 R 16

61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2

Sales designation - see pages 284, 285 .

Only permitted as winter tyres.

For notes on the temporary spare wheel - see page 237.

307Technical data

Electrical system

Battery Voltage 12 Volt

Amp hours 55 Ah / 60 Ah 3 / 66 Ah 3 / 70 Ah 3 /

72 Ah 3 / 85 Ah 3

Battery for remote control of central locking

system CR 20 32

Battery for remote control of auxiliary

heater/ventilation AAA LR 06

308 Technical data

Capacities

(approx. litres)

Engine

Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.

Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 SE Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL,

Z28 NET

Fuel tank (nominal content)

Saloon / Hatch

Estate

Engine oil with filter change

between MIN and M AX on dipstick

4.25

1.0

4.5

1.0

6.0

1.0

4.75

0.75

5.0

1.0

6.0

1.0

Windscreen wash reservoir

with headlight wash system

2.9

5.6

2.9

5.6

2.9

5.6

2.9

5.6

2.9

5.6

2.9

5.6

309Technical data

Capacities

(approx. litres)

Engine

Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.

Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT

Fuel tank (nominal content)

Saloon / Hatch

Estate

Engine oil with filter change

between MIN and M AX on dipstick

4.3

1.0

4.3

1.0

4.3

1.0

7.5

1.0

Windscreen wash reservoir

with headlight wash system

2.9

5.6

2.9

5.6

2.9

5.6

2.9

5.6

310 Technical data

Dimensions

(approx. mm)

Saloon / Hatch

Estate

Saloon / Hatch VXR

Estat e VXR

Overall length 4611 4839 4642 4870

Overall width 1798 1798 1798 1798

Width with two exterior mirrors 2036 2036 2036 2036

Overall height

At kerbweight with driver.

1460 1500 1460 1500

Length of luggage compartment floor 1047 1176 1047 1176

Luggage compartment width

maximum

between the wheel arches

1396

972

1079

1060

1396

972

1079

1060

Height of luggage compartment

opening

614

4-door Saloon 324 mm.

767 614 767

Whee lb ase 2700 2830 270 0 28 30

Turning circle diameter

In me t re s.

11.50 11.50 11.50 11.50

311Technical data

Installation dimensions of

ca ra va n/trai ler tow i ng

equipment with removable

coupling ball bar 3,

Salo on / Hatch

All dimensions refer to factory-fitted

towing equipment.

Dimension mm

A 33 4

1061

492.5

486.5

218

495

492.5

201

9 Wa rning

Only use towing equipment approved for

your vehicle. We recommend entrusting

retro-fitting of towing equipment to a

workshop.

312 Technical data

Installation dimensions of

ca ra va n/trai ler tow i ng

equipment with pivoting

coupling ball bar 3,

Estate

All dimensions refer to factory-fitted

towing equipment.

Dimension mm

A 396.5

157.5

386

630

590

491

486

480

379.5

9 Wa rning

Only use towing equipment approved for

your vehicle. We recommend entrusting

retro-fitting of towing equipment to a

workshop.

313Technical data

314 In dex

Index A

Ac cessories............... ......... ............... 77, 234

Ac cessory socket ......... ...................... 60, 93

Ad aptive brake light ..................... ........ 208

Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 132, 133

Bulb replacem ent ......... ..................... 257

Driving abroad ..... .............................. 136

Adjusting the incline

Seats ...................................... .............. . 51

Air conditioning system ........... ............. 140

Air intake...................... ......... ................. 166

Air outlet ............. ......... .......................... 166

Air qua lity sensor ..... ............. ................. 157

Air recirculation system ......... 148, 153, 161

Air vents .......... ......... .............................. 142

Airba gs....... ............................... ......... ...... 81

Ala rm.. ........ ........................................ ...... 40

Ala rm system............... ......... ................... 38

Alterna tor ..................... ......... ................... 99

Antenna ..... ......... ................................... 137

Anti-corrosion service.. .......................... 271

Anti-freeze ............................ ......... ........ 274

Anti-freeze protection................... 274, 279

Anti-knock q ua lity of fuel ..................... 188

Octane number............. ............. 284, 285

Anti-loc k Brake Sy stem (ABS).. ......... .... 210

Anti-theft alarm system...... .............. ...... 38

Anti-theft locking system .... ......... ........... 30

Anti-theft protection ........... ......... ........... 16

Aquaplaning........... ......... ...................... 215

Armrest . ........................................ ........... 57

Ashtray.. ......... .................................. 94, 135

Automatic air recirculation m od e........ 161

Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror.... 44

Automatic level control system ............ 204

Automatic transm ission........... ......... ...... 14

Automatic mode ............. .................. 177

Driving programmes ..................... .... 178

Fault .. ......... ............................... ......... 182

Interruption of p ow er supply............ 183

Kickd ow n.... ........................................ 180

Manual mode . ............................... .... 178

Selector lever.................... .... 14, 177, 178

Selector lever lock .............................. 177

Winter programme............... ............. 180

Automatic wiping ..................... ....... 12, 127

Auxiliary heating................. .................. 163

Program ming................... ......... ......... 164

Remote control ....... ......... .................. 165

315Ind ex

Battery ...................... ......... .... 185, 280, 307

Interruption of

power supply........................ 47, 175, 183

Battery discharge p rotection................ 136

Before sta rting-off ............ ......... 15, 16, 126

Belt force limiters .......... ......... .................. 73

Belt tensioners.......... ......... ....................... 73

Bleeding, d iesel fuel system.................. 228

Board Information Disp la y ... ........ ........ 108

Bonnet ......... ......... ............................... ... 228

Boot, see Luggage compartment .... 34, 65

Brake assist . ........................................ ... 208

Brake light .............................. ............. ... 208

Brake system... ........................................ . 99

Brakes

ABS.. ......... ............................... ......... ... 210

Brake assist .......... ......... ..................... 208

Brake fluid ........ ............................... ... 276

Brake lig hts.. ......... .............................. 258

Brake servo unit ............ ..................... 184

Footbrake ......... ............. ..................... 208

Handbrake ........... ......... ..................... 209

Bulb replacem ent ......... ......................... 252

Bulbs ....................................... ................ 252

Capacities ....... ......... .............................. 308

Car Pass ............................ ........ ............... 26

Carava n/trailer towing ............. ............. 184

Care ........ ............................... ......... ........ 264

Catalytic conv erter .. ......... ............. 195, 229

CDC (Continuous Da mping Control).... 198

Central lock ing system ..... ............. .......... 30

Centre console lighting ........ ......... ........ 135

Changing the battery

Remote c ontrol ........ ............ 29, 165, 307

Changing tyre/wheel typ e ....... ............. 211

Changing wheels ......... ......... ................. 238

Chassis num ber,

see Vehic le Id entification N umber . .... 283

Check control .................... ........ ....... 20, 124

Child restraint system.. ............. ............... 77

Child safety lock s...................... ......... 41, 46

Cigarette lighter .............................. 93, 135

Climate control ........ .............................. 140

Climate control system ..................... .... 156

Clutch operation................... ......... ........ 185

emissions .......... ...................... 287, 288

Cold start .............................. ......... ........ 185

Colour Information Display .................. 108

Continuous Damping C ontrol (CDC).... 198

Contra st.. ......... ....................................... 119

Control indicators... ........................... 10, 98

Adaptive Forward Lighting ..... . 104, 133

Airb ag ....................................... ......... .. 86

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS )........... 210

Belt tensioners .... ............................... .. 74

Brake sy stem...................................... 209

Engine elec tronics............ ......... ......... 192

Electronic S tability Programme ........ 196

Exhaust... ........................................ .... 192

IDS+ ............. ......... ............................... 199

Immobiliser....................... ......... ........... 27

Parking distance sensors ... 202 133, 203

Tyre pressure monitoring system ..... 207

Cool box ............................... ......... ........... 61

Coolant ...... ......... ................................... 274

Coolant level ....... ................................... 275

Coolant tempera ture display........... .... 106

Cooled glove compartm ent ................. 143

Cooling ............................. ......... ..... 149, 154

Correcting time......................... ..... 112, 118

Coupling socket load ................... ......... 224

Courtesy light ............. ......... .................. 134

Courtesy lights

Bulb replacement ............ .................. 262

Cruise control.......... ......... ...................... 200

Curtain airbag s ...... ................................. 85

Curv e lighting (AFL) ... ..................... 22, 132

316 In dex

Dashboard, see Instrument panel ............ 6

Data ............. ......... ............................ 26, 282

Date ...................... ......... ................. 110, 113

Daytime running lights .......... ........ ........ 128

Dec om missioning ............. ..................... 281

Demisting and defrosting

Windows ............................. ........ ........ 147

With climate control system........... ... 159

With air conditioning system .... 150, 155

Diesel fuel filter .... .................................. 274

Diesel fuel system .......................... 228, 274

Diesel particle filter....... 102, 143, 185, 194

Dimensions.. ......... ............................... ... 310

Dipped beam ...................................... ....... 7

Bulb replacement.......... ......... .... 253, 255

Display......... ......... .......................... 107, 108

Display mode ............................. ............ 120

Door locks.......................... ......... ...... 26, 266

Doors .. ......... ........................................ ... 100

Door-to-door lighting ... ......... ................ 133

Drink holders .............................. ......... ..... 97

Driver’s seat with climate control ......... 144

Driving abroad ..... .......................... 188, 269

Headlights .............................. ......... ... 136

Toll system........ .................................. 138

Driving hints ......... ......... ......................... 184

Easytronic ........ ................................. 14, 168

Driving programm es ......................... 171

Interruption of power supply .... ........ 175

Kic kdown ..... ......... .............................. 172

Selector lever... ......... ............................ 14

Starting-off.................... ........ ............. 170

Winter programm e.................... ........ 172

Economical driving .. .............................. 186

Elec tric seat adjustment........... ......... ...... 52

Elec tric sunroof ........ ................................ 47

Elec tric windows . ......... ............................ 45

Elec trica l system . ......... .......... 246, 280, 307

Electro-hydraulic p ow er-assisted

steering............................ ....... 10, 103, 184

Elec tronic com ponents ..... ............. ........ 280

Electronic imm obiliser...... ........ ............... 27

Electronic Stability Programme ............ 196

Engine c ode ...................... ..... 283, 284, 285

Engine c ontrol indicator... ..................... 192

Engine oil ...................... ......... ................. 272

Engine oil c hange ..................... ............. 273

Engine oil level and consump tion 103, 272

Engine oil filter.......................... ............. 273

Engine oil p ressure ................... ......... ...... 98

Engine speed .. ....................................... 185

Engine w ash .... ............. .......................... 266

Env ironmental protection ... ......... . 264, 273

ESP (Electronic Stability Programme).. 196

Exhaust c ontrol indicator ........ ......... .... 192

Exhaust g ases......... ............................... 193

Exhaust system .................... .................. 193

Exterior mirrors ............................ 6, 43, 143

317Ind ex

Fan........... ........ ...................... 145, 152, 271

Filling station

Capacities...................... ......... .... 308, 309

Engine oil level ........................... ........ 272

Fuel . ................................... 188, 284, 285

Opening the bonnet . ......................... 228

Tyre pressure.......................... .... 187, 299

Vehicle data ......... ......... ..................... 283

Windscreen wash system.................. 279

First-aid k it, .......... ......... ......................... 234

Flat tyre ........... ......... .............................. 242

FlexOrganizer . ......... ................................ 69

Fog tail light .... ......... .............................. 131

Bulb replacement.......... ......... ............ 258

Footbrake...................... ............. ............ 208

Front fog lights ............. ......... ................ 130

Bulb replacement.......... ......... ............ 258

Front pa ssenger’s airbag.......... ......... ..... 81

Fuel . ....................................... 188, 284, 285

Fuel consump tion ......... 186, 188, 287, 288

Fuel filter............................ ......... ............ 274

Fuel gauge ............................. ........ ........ 106

Fuel system, diesel ..................... ......... ... 228

Fuses ............ ........................................ ... 246

Gears .......... .............. ............................... . 14

Generator, see Alternator ....................... 99

Genuine Vauxhall Parts

and Accessories ..... .............................. 271

Glov e com partment ................. ............... 95

Cooled ........................................ ........ 143

Glov e com partment lighting ........ ........ 135

Bulb replacem ent ......... ..................... 263

Gra phical Inform ation Display ............. 108

Gross Vehicle Weight ............................ 293

Halogen headlight system . ......... ......... 253

Bulb replacement ............ .................. 253

Driving abroad ....... ......... .................. 136

Handb ra ke..... ............................... ... 16, 209

Haz ard warning lights ................. ......... 131

Head restraints........................ 5, 19, 55, 56

Headlight flash.................... ......... ......... 129

Headlight range adjustment........ 131, 252

Headlight switch ....................... 7, 128, 129

Headlight wash system .......... 12, 127, 279

Headlights .............. ............. ....................... 7

Daytime running lights.... .................. 128

Driving abroad ....... ......... .................. 136

Front fog lights .................................. 130

Reversing lig hts............ ......... ............. 131

Warning device................ .............. .... 126

Heated exterior mirrors ...... ............ 13, 143

Heated front sea ts ............................ .... 144

Heated rear seats .................... ............. 144

Heated rear w indow ........... ............ 13, 143

Heating .......... ......... ............... 140, 146, 154

Seats.................... ......... ...................... 144

With clima te control system ............. 158

With air conditioning system.... 150, 155

Height adjustment

Seat belts ............ ......... ........................ 76

Steering wheel ........ .............. .................. 6

High-pressure cleaners ....... .. 221, 266, 267

Horn... ............. ............................... ......... .. 11

318 In dex

Identification plate ........... ......... ............ 282

IDS+ (Interactive Driving System) . 196, 198

Ignition logic ............ ...................... 113, 120

Ignition system........................... .... 271, 280

Imm ob iliser.. ............. ............................... . 27

Information display ............................ ... 108

Infotainm ent system ...................... ........ 137

Inspection system .................................. 268

Instrument display .............................. ... 105

Instrument illum ination ......................... 134

Bulb replacement.......... ......... ............ 263

Instrument panel . ......... ............................. 6

Instruments . ......... .................... 98, 105, 137

Interactive Driving System (IDS+) . 196, 198

Interior mirror .. ..................................... 5, 44

Univ ersal remote control .................... . 41

Interruption of power supply .. 47, 122, 125

Easytronic .... ............................... ........ 175

Elec tric wind ow s..................... ......... ..... 47

Selector lever lock ..... ............. ............ 183

ISOFIX................... ......... ........................... 79

Jack ............................... ......... ................. 238

Jump starting.. ......... .............................. 230

Keys

Extending .............................. ............. .. 26

Ignition lock......... ......... .............. 6, 15, 27

Locking doors ......... ......... .................... 30

Remov e .. ......... ..................................... 16

Starting the engine.................... 6, 15, 27

319Ind ex

Langua ge selection................... .... 113, 118

Lashing eyes ........ ......... ........................... 69

Leather trim .... ............................... ........ 266

Level control system........................... ... 204

Light switch ................... ......... .................... 7

Lighting ... ................................... 7, 100, 128

Driving abroad ........................... ........ 136

Loa ding ... ............................... ........ ........ 223

Loc king doors ...... ................................ 2, 30

Loc king from the inside................. ......... . 31

Loc ks... ............................... ......... ............ 266

Lub rica nts ......................... ......... .... 272, 283

Luggage compartment

Bulb replacement.......... ......... ............ 263

Extension .......... ......... ........................... 65

FlexOrga nizer............ ......... .................. 69

Lashing eyes ...................... ........ .......... 69

Lighting ............ ............................... ... 135

Loading ....... ......... ...................... 223, 293

Locking ....................................... ......... . 34

Safety net .... ......... ................................ 67

Luggage compartment cover ...... .......... 66

Lum bar sup port ....... .......................... 51, 53

Main bea m............................ ............. 7, 129

Bulb replacem ent ............. ......... 254, 256

Control indicator........... ............. ........ 101

Maintenance....... ............................... .... 268

Air conditioning system........ ......... .... 167

Anti-freeze protec tion ....................... 274

Brake fluid ..................... ........ ............. 276

Brakes.......... ......... .............................. 208

Catalytic converter .................... ........ 195

Engine oil .............. ......... ............. 272, 273

Fuel consum ption .............................. 187

Tyre pressure........ ......... ..................... 213

Tyres ...................................... ............. 214

Windscreen wiper ...................... ........ 277

Manua l transmission ..................... .......... 14

Mirrors .... ............................... ......... 5, 43, 44

Misted windows ....... ............. ... 13, 147, 159

Mobile telephone..... .............................. 139

Motorwa y lighting (AFL).. ............... 22, 132

Muffler, see Ex haust system ................. 193

Number plate lights

Bulb replacement ............ .................. 261

N um ber plate lighting ........ .................. 261

N um ber plates.... ........ ........................... 281

320 In dex

Octane numbers.. ................. 188, 284, 285

Odometer .... ............................... ......... ... 105

Oil chang e.................................. ......... ... 273

Oil filter change ..................................... 273

Oil level and consum ption .................... 272

Oil pressure ............................ ........ .......... 98

Oils ..................................... ......... ............ 272

Operating temperature......................... 185

Outside temperature ga uge ................. 109

Overrun............ ......... ...................... 185, 187

Pa intwork damage........................ ........ 265

Pa rking ............ ......... ........................ 16, 202

Pa rking distance sensors .............. ........ 202

Pa rking lights .. ................................... 7, 134

Bulb replacem ent ......... ..................... 257

Pa rts ... ............................... ........ ............. 271

Pedals ..... ......... ....................................... 185

Perform ance ....... .............. ............. 287, 288

Petrol .. ............. ....................... 188, 284, 285

Pinking .... ........................................ ........ 188

Pollen filter...... ......... .............................. 166

Position mem ory....................... ......... 43, 54

Power stee ring, see electro-hyd ra ulic

power-assisted steering . ........ ............. 184

Preheating.. ............................... ......... .... 102

Pushing, towing ........... ......... ................. 229

Quic kheat .............................. 146, 154, 158

321Ind ex

Radio ........... ......... .................................. 137

Radio equipment (CB)........................... 139

Radio reception ... ............................... ... 137

Rain sensor.. ........ 12, 47, 48, 127, 264, 277

Reading lights...... ............................... ... 135

Rear light cluster............................ ........ 128

Bulb replacement.......... ......... ............ 258

Rear window

wa sh system ....... ........... 12, 127, 264, 279

Refuelling . ........ ............................... ........ 189

Fuel filler cap ............. ............. ............ 188

Remote control

Auxiliary heating............................. ... 165

Central locking system . ....................... 28

Steering wheel.. ......... ................... 21, 137

Univ ersal remote control .................... . 41

Replacem ent keys ......................... .......... 26

Reversible carpet .......... ......... .................. 69

Reversing lights

Bulb replacement.......... ......... ............ 258

Roof load ........................... ....... 71, 184, 187

Roof rack . ....................................... 187, 218

Running-in

Brakes .. ....................................... ........ 208

Safeguard against unauthorised use 6, 16

Safety accessories ............ ........ ....... 77, 234

Safety net ........ ........................................ . 67

Saving energy ........................... ......... .... 186

Sea t adjustment ................... ......... 3, 50, 52

Sea t belts ............ ......... .............. 72, 76, 266

Sea t height adjustm ent ....... ............... 3, 51

Sea t occupancy recognition ............. ...... 87

Sea t position ..................... ........ ......... 52, 53

Sea ts ...................................... ......... 3, 50, 51

Extending the luggage compartment 65

Heated ...................... ......... ................. 144

With climate control ......... ......... ........ 144

Selector lev er... ............. .................. 169, 177

Selector lev er lock........ ......... ........... 14, 177

Self-diagnosis ........................... ......... 74, 86

Self-help . ............. ............................... .... 228

Central locking system . ........ ............... 33

Electric sunroof ........ ............. ............... 49

Electric windows... ......... ....................... 47

Information disp lay. .......................... 110

Remote c ontrol ........ ............................ 29

Serv ice interv al display ..................... .... 270

Serv ice work ........ ......... .......................... 270

Side airbags ........ ......... ............................ 83

Spare fuses...... ....................................... 247

Spare keys............................. ......... .......... 26

Spare wheel ................................... 236, 238

Speed ......... ......... ................................... 186

Fuel consumption ........ ......... ..... 186, 187

Speedometer.............. ......... .................. 105

Sport mode ...................... ......... ..... 101, 198

Sta rter switch.......... ......... .............. 6, 15, 27

Sta rting the engine ............. .. 6, 15, 27, 229

Self-help ........................... ......... ......... 229

Steam-jet cleaners ..... ......... .. 221, 266, 267

Steering column lock....... ......... ........... 6, 16

Steering w heel a djustment...... .................. 6

Steering w heel remote control ....... 21, 137

Stowa ge c om partments . ............ 57, 95, 96

Sunblind ......... ............. ............................. 49

Sunroof............................. ............. ........... 47

Sunsha de ....... ......... ............................... .. 49

System settings........... ......... .......... 112, 117

322 In dex

Tables....................... ......... ....................... 62

Tachometer................... ......... ................ 105

Tail lights .................................... ............ 128

Bulb replacement.......... ......... ............ 258

Tailgate ....... ........................................ ..... 34

Tailgate wiper ................... ..................... 127

Technical d ata ..... ......... ......................... 282

Telephone, see Mobile telephone ........ 139

Tem perature regulation............ .... 145, 158

Tem porary spare wheel ... ............. 217, 237

The first 600 miles............................... ... 184

Thigh support . ........................................ . 53

Tightening torque.... ...................... 242, 299

Time ............................... ......... ........ 110, 113

Toll sy stems. ............................... ......... ... 138

Tools ..................... ............. ..................... 238

Towing ............................... ......... ............ 232

Towing equipm ent ................................ 219

Towing eye...... ......... ...................... 232, 233

Trailer/caravan towing .......... ........ ........ 184

Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)...... ............ 225

Transm ission display ..................... 168, 176

Tra nsmission, automatic ........................ 14

Automatic mode........................ ........ 177

Driving programm es ......................... 178

Fault...................... .............................. 182

Interruption of power supply .... ........ 183

Kic kdown ..... ......... .............................. 180

Selector lever... ........................... 177, 178

Selector lever lock.......................... .... 177

Winter programm e.................... ........ 180

Tra nsmission, Easytronic . ..................... 168

Driving programm es ......................... 171

Interruption of power supply .... ........ 175

Kic kdown ..... ......... .............................. 172

Selector lever... ......... .................... 14, 170

Winter programm e.................... ........ 172

Tra nsmission, m anual ................... .......... 14

Tra vel Assistant .................... ......... .... 22, 58

Tread d epth ........ ................................... 214

Trip computer .......................... 20, 114, 120

Trip odometer.............. ......... ................. 105

Triple Information Display ............ ........ 108

TSA (Trailer Sta bility Assist) . ......... ........ 225

Turn lighting (AFL) ................... ....... 22, 132

Turn signal lights ............................... ........ 7

Bulb replacem ent ......... ..................... 258

Tw in Audio . ......... ............................. 21, 138

Tyre c hains. ......... ........................... 217, 299

Tyre c ondition . ......... .............................. 214

Tyre p ressure ......................... 204, 213, 299

Tyre p ressure monitoring system ..... .... 204

Tyre repair kit ........................... ......... .... 242

Units of mea sure ........ ................... 113, 119

Unlea ded fuel................ 188, 190, 284, 285

Used oil .......... ......... ............................... 273

Valve cap k ey ............................... ......... 213

Vauxhall alarm system....... .................... 38

Vauxhall Service ..... ............................... 268

Vehicle care ........ ........ ........................... 264

Vehicle decom missioning ........ ............. 281

Vehicle Identification Number ............. 283

Vehicle keys, see Keys .... ........................ 26

Vehicle recomm issioning .... .................. 281

Vehicle tools ............................. ......... .... 238

Ventilation . ......... ........... 140, 146, 153, 160

323Ind ex

Warning buzzers.................... ............. ... 126

Warning messages .................... .... 111, 116

Warning triangle,........................... ........ 234

Wash fluid reservoir,

windscreen wash system.................. ... 279

Wheels, tyres ... ............................... ........ 211

Windows

De mis ting

and defrosting .... 13, 147, 150, 155, 159

Windscreen wash system...... .......... 12, 127

Anti-freeze protection .................... ... 279

Capacities...................... ......... .... 308, 309

Wash fluid reservoir .. ......... ................ 279

Windscreen wiper .... ......... ....... 11, 126, 277

Winter mode

Starting -off aid ............. ......... ............ 172

Winter operation

Battery ........................... ..................... 185

Coolant, anti-freeze...... ............. ........ 274

Fuel consumption ......... ......... ............ 187

Fuel for d iesel engines........... ......... ... 188

Heating ...................... ........ 140, 150, 155

Locks ............ ....................................... 266

Tyre chains ........... ...................... 217, 299

Window demisting and defrosting ... 147

Windscreen wash system,

anti-freeze protection............ ......... ... 279

Winter programme ........... ......... ............ 172

Winter tyres.......... ......... ................. 216, 299

Xenon headlight system....................... 255

Bulb replacem ent ......... ..................... 255

Driving abroad ..... .............................. 136

324 In dex

VECTRA

Reproduction or translation, in whole or in parts,

is not permitted without prior written consent from

Vauxhall Motors Ltd.

All rights as understood under the copyright laws are explicitly

reserved by Vauxhall Motors Ltd.

All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this

manual are based on the latest production information

available at the time of publication.

The right is reserved to make changes at any time without

notice.

Edition: July 2007.

TS 1557-A-08

VECTRA

Operation, Safety and Maintenance

Owner’s Manual

Vauxhall Vectra 2007 Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Andere handleiding(en) van Vauxhall Vectra 2007

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info